[email protected] Confocal Fiber Type Displacement Sensor User`s Manual

ZW-CE1@T Confocal Fiber Type Displacement Sensor User`s Manual
Displacement Sensor
ZW series
Confocal Fiber Type
Displacement Sensor
User’s Manual
[email protected]
Z332-E1-06
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the ZW.
This manual provides information regarding functions, performance and operating methods that
are required for using the ZW.
When using the ZW, be sure to observe the following:
• The ZW must be operated by personnel knowledgeable in electrical engineering.
• To ensure correct use, please read this manual thoroughly to deepen your understanding of the
product.
• Please keep this manual in a safe place so that it can be referred to whenever necessary.
Terms and Conditions Agreement
(Please Read)
Basic configuration
1
Installation and Connections
2
Basic Operation
3
Settings for Function
4
Convenient Functions
5
Communications with External Devices
6
Offline Settings
7
Troubleshooting
8
Sensor controller operations
9
User's Manual
APPENDICES
Confocal Fiber Type
Displacement Sensor
ZW
10
Terms and Conditions Agreement
Read and understand this Manual
Please read and understand this catalog before purchasing the products. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty, Limitations of Liability
Warranties
• Exclusive Warranty
Omron's exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period expressed in writing by
Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied.
• Limitations
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS
WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE.
Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on
infringement by the Products or otherwise of any intellectual property right.
• Buyer Remedy
Omron’s sole obligation hereunder shall be, at Omron’s election, to (i) replace (in the form originally shipped
with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non-complying Product, (ii)
repair the non-complying Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of the
non-complying Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity
or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omron’s analysis confirms that the Products
were properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or
inappropriate modification. Return of any Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before
shipment. Omron Companies shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of
Products in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system assemblies or any
other materials or substances or environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or
in writing, are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty.
See http://www.omron.com/global/ or contact your Omron representative for published information.
Limitation on Liability; Etc
OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY
WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT,
WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY.
Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which
liability is asserted.
2
ZW User's Manual
Application Considerations
Suitability of Use
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes or regulations which apply
to the combination of the Product in the Buyer’s application or use of the Product. At Buyer’s request, Omron
will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply
to the Product. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the
Product in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use. Buyer shall be
solely responsible for determining appropriateness of the particular Product with respect to Buyer’s application,
product or system. Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY
WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE
RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCT(S) IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE
INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
Programmable Products
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user’s programming of a programmable Product, or any
consequence thereof.
Disclaimers
Performance Data
Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for the user
in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of Omron’s test
conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to
the Omron’s Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
Change in Specifications
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons. It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Product may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications
for your application. Please consult with your Omron’s representative at any time to confirm actual
specifications of purchased Product.
Errors and Omissions
Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions.
ZW User's Manual
3
Precautions for Safe Use
Please observe the following precautions for safe use of the products.
1. Installation Environment
• Do not use the product in environments where it can be exposed to inflammable/explosive gas.
• To secure the safety of operation and maintenance, do not install the product close to high-voltage devices
and power devices.
2. Power Supply and Wiring
• Take care when using a power supply with an overcurrent detector, because this sensor uses DC-DC
converter for its power supply circuit and inrush current may activate the protective circuit for a power supply
with an overcurrent detector.
Recommended power supply: S8VS-06024 (Omron, DC24 V 2.5 A 60 W)
• The supply voltage must be within the rated range (DC24 V ± 10 %).
• Reverse connection of the power supply is not allowed.
• Open-collector outputs should not be short-circuited.
• Use the power supply within the rated load.
• High-voltage lines and power lines must be wired separately from this product. Wiring them together or
placing them in the same duct may cause induction, resulting in malfunction or damage.
• Use adequate safety measures, for example fail-safe circuits.
• Use a specified-sized wire when wiring. Do not connect wires other than those of the specification to the
terminal block.
• For a power supply, use a DC power supply unit provided with a remedy, for example, safety ultralow voltage
circuit, to prevent a high voltage from being generated.
• Route so that power supply wires are as short as possible.
• Use a power supply dedicated for this product, without sharing it with other products.
• Tighten fixing screws securely at a torque specified in this manual.
• Before performing any of the following activities, be sure to turn off the product, or breakdown may result.
- Connecting or wiring cables
- Connecting or disconnecting connectors
- Installing or removing Calibration ROM
- When inserting or removing an EtherCAT cable, do not put any stress on the calibration ROM.
3. Grounding
• Use a frame ground terminal of the specified size to be grounded. Do not connect a wire with an only twisted
end directly to a terminal block.
- Terminal screw: M4
- Crimp-type terminal:
8.5mm
or less
8.5mm
or less
• Use D-type grounding (ground resistance of 100  or less). Make the ground point as close as possible and
make the ground wire used as short as possible.
• Never a ground wire with other equipment and never ground to building beams. Doing so could cause
negative impacts.
• The power supply circuit of the Sensor Controller is not insulated from the internal circuits.
• When grounding the positive (+) terminal of the 24 VDC power supply, do not connect the Sensor Controller's
frame ground terminal or PLC's frame ground terminal to ground. [(1), (2)]
The PC housing may be internally connected to the SG (0 V), in which case current will flow through the path
shown below and may cause seizure.
4
ZW User's Manual
• If there is no PC, or specifically there is no SG (0 V)/FG short-circuiting path, grounding the Sensor
Controller's frame ground terminal will not cause seizure. Wire the PLC after checking the specification of
your PLC.
• The dedicated RS-232C cable (ZW-XRS2/XPT2) has its cable shield isolated from the connector housing.
[(3)]
Sensor Controller
RS-232C
SG
SG
24V
24V
Power supply
circuit
SG
SG
RS-232C
connector housing
FG
FG
(3)
24 V DC
power
supply
SG
SG
SG
SG
Ethernet
connector housing
SG
SG
Ethernet
FG
FG
(1)
PC or PLC
FG
FG
FG
FG
(2)
SG: Signal Ground (0 V for 24 V DC power supply)
FG: Frame Ground
4. Others
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not use this product for nuclear facilities, or safety circuits involving human lives.
Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, modify, apply pressure to deform or burn up the body.
Dispose of this product as industrial waste.
Use exclusive devices, including a sensor head, Calibration ROM, fiber cable or RS-232C cable, to connect,
or ignition, burst, false operation or breakdown may be caused.
Do not cut fiber cable. Glass at the cut section may cause injury. Also, if cut, it will not work normally
anymore.
Whenever any trouble, including, strange odor smelled, the body overheated or smoke escaped, was found,
immediately stop the operation, and consult an OMRON branch or sales office with the system shut down.
Do not drop or make a strong impact on the unit.
Before using any equipment provided with a lock mechanism, make sure that it has been locked.
5. Regulations and Standards
This sensor conforms to the following EMC directive and EN standard:
• EMC directive, No. 2004, 108, EC
• EN standard, EN61326
6. Notice for Korea Radio Law
A급 기기 (업무용 방송통신기자재)
이 기기는 업무용 ( A급 ) 전자파적합기기로서 판매자
또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 , 가정외의
지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다.
ZW User's Manual
5
Precautions for Correct Use
Please observe the following precautions to prevent failure to operate, malfunctions, or undesirable effects on
product performance.
1. Installation Site
Do not install the product in locations subjected to the following conditions:
• Ambient temperature outside the rating
• Rapid temperature fluctuations (causing condensation)
• Relative humidity outside the range of 35 to 85 %
• Presence of corrosive or flammable gases
• Presence of dust, salt, or iron particles
• Direct vibration or shock
• Reflection of intense light (such as other laser beams, electric arc-welding machines or ultraviolet shine)
• Direct sunlight or near heaters
• Water, oil, or chemical fumes, spray or mist atmospherics
• Strong magnetic or electric field
2. Power Supply and Wiring
• When using a commercially available switching regulator, make sure that the FG terminal is grounded.
• If surge currents are present in the power lines, connect surge absorbers that suit the operating environment.
• Before turning ON the power after the product is connected, make sure that the power supply voltage is
correct, there are no incorrect connections (e.g. load short-circuit) and the load current is appropriate.
Incorrect wiring may result in breakdown of the product.
• Use the specified voltage. If voltage exceeding the rating or AC voltage is applied, circuit parts may be burnt
or rupture.
• Use the Extension Fiber Cable ([email protected]@R) for extending the fiber cable between the Sensor extension
fiber cable, five total lengths, 2, 5, 10, 20 or 30 m, are available.
• Handling fiber cables
Use them in compliance with the following. This may result in damage to the fiber cable.
-Fiber cable bend radiuses must be at least 20 mm.
- Do not let bending cause stress at the root section of a fiber connector.
- Do not yank hard on a fiber cable.
- Do not step on a fiber cable or place anything heavy on it.
- Do not apply any twisting stress to the fiber cable.
• Be sure to use a Sensor Head and Calibration ROM with the same serial number. A pair with different serial
numbers cannot operate normally.
• Use the configuration software with the combination specified in this manual, or the system may operate
faultily.
• Do not shut down the power supply when saving any data into the memory built in the Sensor Controller, or
the data may be corrupted.
• While a fiber cable is disconnected, be sure to attach the included protective cap on both the Sensor
Controller side and the fiber cable side. Leaving the fiber cable with the protective cap not attached, the
optical fiber may fail due to any adhered foreign matter.
3. Warming Up
After turning ON the power supply, allow the product to stand for at least 30 minutes before use. The circuits
are still unstable immediately after the power supply is turned ON, so measured values may fluctuate gradually.
6
ZW User's Manual
4. Maintenance and Inspection
Do not use thinner, benzene, acetone or kerosene to clean the Sensor Head, fiber cable and Sensor Controller.
If large dust particles adhere to the emitter/receiver of the Sensor Head or Sensor Controller, use a blower
brush (used to clean camera lenses) to blow them off. Do not blow the dust particles with your mouth.
To remove smaller dust particles, dirt, oil, and fat, wipe gently with a soft cloth (for cleaning lenses). Do not use
excessive force to wipe off dust particles. Scratches on the emitter/receiver may cause false operations or
measuring errors.
For details on the method for cleaning the ends of fiber cables, refer to "Connecting Fiber Cable" (p.38).
Clean the ventilation port periodically to prevent any build up of dirt and dust. If the ventilation port is blocked,
heat builds up inside and can cause breakdown.
5. Sensing Objects
The product sometimes cannot accurately measure the following types of objects: Transparent objects, objects
with an extremely low reflection factor, objects smaller than the spot diameter, objects with a large curvature,
excessively inclined objects, target objects with a thin film on the surface etc.
6. Effect caused by peripheral lights
Do not install the Sensor Head in a place where strong light hits the laser emitter/receiver section of the Sensor
Head. Also, if an object has a shiny surface, the light from the lighting will be reflected and a malfunction may
occur. In such a case, prevent reflection by, for example, covering the light to stop reflection.
Basic precautions for installation p.30
7. Influence by Air Turbulences
Slow air turbulences around the Sensor Head may disperse measured values.
To avoid these possible air turbulences, wrap the Sensor Head with an appropriate cover.
8. Operations Outside Measurement Range
This sensor is highly sensitive, it may operate incorrectly outside the measurement range (too close in). In such
a case, the problem can be solved by reducing the exposure time.
Editor's Note
■ Meaning of Symbols
Menu items that are displayed on the main or sub-display, and windows, dialog boxes and other GUI elements
displayed on the personal computer are indicated enclosed by brackets [ ].
■ Visual Aids
Important
Note
Indicates points that are important to achieve the full product performance, such as operational
precautions.
Indicates application procedures.
Indicates pages where related information can be found.
Optional
Indicates that the setting is optional in a configuration procedure.
Copyrights and Trademarks
• Sysmac is a trademark or registered trademark of OMRON corporation in Japan and other countries for our FA
equipment products.
ZW User's Manual
7
• Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 8 are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the USA and other countries.
• EtherCAT is registered trademark and patented technology that is licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH,
Germany.
• Other system names and product names that appear in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
the respective companies.
Notice
• Photocopying, duplication, or copying of all or part of this manual without permission is prohibited.
• Please understand that the specifications and other contents of this manual are subject to change for improvement
without notice.
• Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual, but if you should notice any
mistake, questionable section, or the like in this manual, please contact an OMRON branch or sales office.
• If you do so, please also tell us the manual number, which is found at the end of the manual.
Related Manuals
The following manual is related to the NJ-series Controllers. Use this manual for reference.
Manual name
Sysmac Studio Version 1
Operation Manual
8
Cat. No.
W504
Model numbers
[email protected]@@
Application
Learning about the operating
procedures and functions of
the Sysmac Studio.
Description
Describes the operating procedures of the Sysmac Studio.
ZW User's Manual
Table of Contents
Editor's Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Copyrights and Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Related Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Search from Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.Basic configuration
1-1 ZW-series Displacement Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Types of Sensor Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1-2 Basic Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.Installation and Connections
2-1 System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Table of Contents
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connection Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2-2 Part Names and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Sensor Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Calibration ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Sensor Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2-3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Installation of Sensor Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Installation of Sensor Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connecting Calibration ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Connecting Fiber Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Calibrating Sensor Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2-4 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
32-pole extension connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Analog output terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
24 V input terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2-5 Installing the Sysmac Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.Basic Operation
3-1 Launching a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Connecting to the sensor with PC tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
ZW User's Manual
9
Entering project information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3-2 Explanation of Screen Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
PC tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3-3 Switching operation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3-4 Bank switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Multi-task and Bank Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Switching Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3-5 Perform the Zero Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Zero reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3-6 Setting Threshold Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Threshold Value Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3-7 Saving a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Saving a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Exporting a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Importing a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3-8 Operating with Sensor Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.Settings for Function
4-1 Setting Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Selecting the Area Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Setting the Material of the Target to Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Setting the Noise Cut Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Setting Smoothing Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Setting Start Direction of Count Measurement Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Setting Exposure Time Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Setting the Measurement Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4-2 Setting Measurement Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
What is a Measurement Item? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Measuring the Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Measuring the Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Performing Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4-3 Setting the Output Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Setting Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Setting Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Setting Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Setting the Zero Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
4-4 Setting the Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Changing the Bank Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Copying the Bank/System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Saving the Bank/System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Clearing the Bank Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
4-5 Setting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
10
ZW User's Manual
Checking Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Making Sensor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Initializing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.Convenient Functions
5-1 Displaying measured values in graphs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Specifying the sampling start and end conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Starting and ending sampling before and after the trigger condition is met . . 124
5-2 Saving measured values in a file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Outputting the results of sampling as a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Exporting the results of sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5-3 Displaying saved measured values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5-4 Performing internal logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5-5 Storing the light reception wave form in a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5-6 Recovering calibration ROM data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
5-7 Printing the contents of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
5-8 Controll input signal with PC tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6.Communications with External Devices
Table of Contents
6-1 Parallel I/O connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
I/O Signal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Settings for Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Settings for Judgment Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Settings for Processing When Measurement Is Not Possible . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Settings for Bank Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Settings for Internal Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Timing Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
6-2 EtherCAT Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Overview of EtherCAT Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
ZW Communications Methods in an EtherCAT Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Setting Communications Specifications (EtherCAT Communications) . . . . . . 165
List of I/O Ports for Each Area (PDO Mapping) and Memory Assignments . . 166
Timing Chart (EtherCAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Sample Ladder Program (EtherCAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Sysmac Device Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
6-3 EtherNet/IP Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Introduction to EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
ZW Communications for EtherNet/IP Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Setting Communications Specifications (EtherNet/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Tag Data Link Setting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Memory Assignments and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Timing Chart (EtherNet/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
ZW User's Manual
11
Sample Ladder Program (EtherNet/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
6-4 No-protocol Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Outline of No-protocol Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Setting Up No-protocol Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Setting Communications Specifications (RS-232C Communications) . . . . . . 230
Setting for serial data output after application of measured value . . . . . . . . . 231
Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
7.Offline Settings
7-1 Performing Settings Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
7-2 Starting a Project in Offline Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
7-3 Changing between Online and Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
7-4 Offline Debugging of the Sensor Control Program and Sensor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
8.Troubleshooting
8-1 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Errors for EtherCAT Connection (Sysmac Error Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Errors for EtherCAT Connection (SDO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Errors for Ethernet or EtherNet/IP Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Errors Common to All Communication States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
8-2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
9.Sensor controller operations
9-1 Search from Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
FUN Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
RUN (run) Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
9-2 Functions of Operating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
9-3 Digital Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
9-4 Switching operation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
9-5 Functions and Operations during Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Switching the RUN (Run) Mode Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
9-6 Setting Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Setting the Material of the Target to Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Setting Start Direction of Count Measurement Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Setting Exposure Time Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
9-7 Setting Measurement Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Measuring the Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Measuring the Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
12
ZW User's Manual
9-8 Setting the Output Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Setting the Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Setting Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Setting Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Setting the Zero Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
9-9 Setting the Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Switching Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Changing the Bank Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Copying the Bank Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Saving the Bank/System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Clearing the Bank Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
9-10 Setting Threshold Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
9-11 Setting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Checking Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Setting the Key Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Calibrating Sensor Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Initializing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
9-12 Connecting Parallel I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Table of Contents
Settings for Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Settings for Judgment Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Settings for Processing When Measurement Is Not Possible . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Setting for Internal Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
9-13 Connecting with EtherCAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Setting Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Setting GATE Signal ON Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
9-14 Connecting with EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Network Settings of the Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Setting Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
9-15 Connecting by No-protocol Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Initial Settings for No-protocol Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Setting Communications Specifications (RS-232C Communications) . . . . . . 353
Setting Serial Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Set the delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
10.APPENDICES
10-1 Specifications and External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Sensor Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Sensor controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
PC tools (Sysmac Studio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
EMC Directive Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
ZW User's Manual
13
10-2 Firmware update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Use PC tools (Sysmac Studio) to update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Performing the Update on Warp Engine ZW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
10-3 Processing Item Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
10-4 System data list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
10-5 Object Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Object Dictionary Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Data type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Description Format of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Communication Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
PDO Mapping Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Sync Manager Communication Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Manufacturer Unique Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
14
ZW User's Manual
1
ZW User's Manual
15
Search from Settings
Settings
16
Set by Sysmac Studio
Set by Sensor Controller
Setting the Material for the Target to Measure
p.75
p.302
Setting Exposure Time Control Mode
p.79
p.304
Measuring the Height
p.83
p.305
Measuring the Thickness
p.85
p.306
Calculating
p.86
p.307
Setting the Filter
p.93
p.310
Setting the Scaling
p.87
p.314
Setting the Hold
p.98
p.318
Setting the Zero Reset
p.105
p.322
Changing the Bank Mode
p.110
p.327
Copying the Bank/System Settings
p.111
p.328
(Bank Settings only)
Saving the Bank/System Settings
p.112
p.329
Clearing the Bank Settings
p.113
p.330
Checking Information
p.114
p.334
Setting the Key Lock
p.115
p.335
Initializing Settings
p.116
p.337
Search from Settings
ZW User's Manual
1
1-1 ZW-series Displacement Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1-2 Basic Operation Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Basic configuration
Basic configuration
1-1 ZW-series Displacement Sensors
The ZW-series is a line of fiber coaxial displacement sensors.
They consist of Sensor Head and Sensor Controller, calibration ROM, and exclusive setting PC tool which runs
on personal computers for system settings and monitoring.
Sensor head
Sensor Controller
PC tool
Detects a target to
measure.
Personal
computer
Calibration ROM
(included with sensor head)
Performs measurements
and outputs the result.
Associated with
the sensor on a
one-to-one basis
Allows making advanced settings
and checking up measured
values easily using exclusive
personal computer software.
Types of Sensor Controllers
The ZW Series has two types of Controllers (hereinafter be referred to as "Sensor Controller" in this
document.). Differences are described below.
18
Model
[email protected]/[email protected]
[email protected]
I/O
Specifications
EtherCAT and EtherNet/IP not mounted,
Binary output device mounted
EtherCAT and EtherNet/IP mounted,
Binary output device not mounted
PC tool
Sysmac Studio (Measurement Sensor Edition)/
Smart MonitorZW version 1.10 or later
Sysmac Studio (Standard Edition)/ Sysmac Studio
(Measurement Sensor Edition)/Smart MonitorZW
version 1.10 or later
ZW-series Displacement Sensors
ZW User's Manual
1-2 Basic Operation Flow
The following is the basic operation flow for ZW Series.
Setting
measurement
items
Default settings for connecting
the sensor head.
Perform a sensor head calibration.
Setting measurement items
Select task(s) from TASK1 to
TASK4, and set measurement
items, including height, thickness
and calculation.
Setting the scaling
Calibrate the display of the
measured value.
Setting output
processing
Setting the hold
Set the hold conditions.
Setting the Zero Reset
Set the Zero Reset.
Saving settings
Saving the setting data (*1)
Save the set data.
Basic configuration
Preparation
for measurement
Section 2 Installation and Connections
1
Installation and connection
Install the sensor head.
Section 2 Installation and Connections
Section 4 Settings for Functions
4-2 Setting Measurement Items
Section 4 Settings for Functions
4-3 Setting the Output Conditions
Section 4 Settings for Functions
4-3 Setting the Output Conditions
Section 4 Settings for Functions
4-3 Setting the Output Conditions
Section 3 Basic Operation
3-7 Saving a Project
(*1) After you have made or changed settings,
be sure to save the setup data.
All set data will be cleared if you turn the
power OFF without saving the data.
ZW User's Manual
Basic Operation Flow
19
Setting Threshold Value
Functions used
during operation
Section 3 Basic Operation
3-6 Setting Threshold Value
Switching Banks
3-4 Bank Switching
Executing Zero Reset
3-5 Perform the Zero Reset
Section 6 Communications with
External Devices
Operations and
settings according
to need
Setting I/O (analog/judgment)
6-1 Parallel I/O connection
Using EtherCAT Communications
6-2 EtherCAT Connection
Using Ethernet/IP Communications
6-3 Ethernet/IP Connection
Using Ethernet/
RS-232C Communications
6-4 No-protocol Connection
Setting the Banks
Setting the System Environment
Changing Material Settings
When having
trouble with setting
20
Basic Operation Flow
4-5 Setting the System
Section 4 Settings for Functions
4-2 Setting Measurement Items
Changing Exposure Time Control
Mode Settings
4-1 Setting Sensing
Setting Filter
4-3 Setting the Output Conditions
When the Sysmac error status is
displayed
When you need
help
Section 4 Settings for Functions
4-4 Setting the Banks
Section 8 Troubleshooting
8-1 Error Messages
When an error message is
displayed
8-1 Error Messages
When it does not work correctly
8-2 Troubleshooting
ZW User's Manual
Installation and Connections
2
2-2 Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2-3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2-4 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2-5 Installing the Sysmac Studio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Installation and Connections
2-1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2-1 System Configuration
System Configuration
Connecting with EtherCAT
(when the master is NJ Series)
EtherCAT Master
(*1)
Sysmac Studio
Standard Edition
NJ-series Machine
Automation Controller
General-purpose USB Cable
General-purpose Ethernet Cable
Special EtherCAT
Cable (RJ45/RJ45)
I/O control PLC
[email protected]
Other EtherCAT slaves
24-V
power supply
Trigger input
sensor
Special EtherCAT Cable
(RJ45/RJ45)
Parallel Cable
Connecting with EtherCAT (when
the master is other than NJ Series)
Special EtherCAT Cable
(RJ45/RJ45)
EtherCAT Master
(*1)
Sysmac Studio
Displacement Sendor
Edition
Programmable Controller
with CJ2 CPU Unit
General-purpose
Ethernet Cable
Special EtherCAT
Cable (RJ45/RJ45)
[email protected]
Other EtherCAT slaves
I/O control PLC
24-V
power supply
Special EtherCAT Cable
(RJ45/RJ45)
Trigger input
sensor
Special EtherCAT Cable
(RJ45/RJ45)
Parallel Cable
Ethernet/IP and No-protocol
Ethernet Connections
Control PLC, RC, or MC
(*1)
Sysmac Studio
Displacement Sendor
Edition
Industrial
EtherNet/IP/
Ethernet
Switching Hub
General-purpose
Ethernet Cable
General-purpose
Ethernet Cable
Programmable Controller
with CJ2 CPU Unit
General-purpose
Ethernet Cable
NJ-series Machine
Automation Controller
[email protected]
General-purpose
Ethernet Cable
Parallel Cable
24-V
power supply
Trigger input
sensor
I/O control PLC
(*1) If you use Smart Monitor ZW, Connect the PC and the ZW to control.
22
System Configuration
ZW User's Manual
Connection Compatibility
Other connection
EtherCAT
EtherNet/IP
EtherCAT
---
EtherNet/IP
Not compatible
Ethernet
(no-protocol)
Ethernet
(programmable noprotocol)
Ethernet
(no-protocol)
RS-232C
(no-protocol)
I/O Cable
Not compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
---
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
---
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
---
Compatible
2
Connected to
[email protected]
Installation and Connections
Important
• EtherCAT and EtherNet/IP connections cannot be used at the same time.
• Can be connected simultaneously via Ethernet with PC tools (Sysmac Studio, SmartMonitorZW) and another
device (PLC etc). Can be connected simultaneously via Ethernet with PC tools (Sysmac Studio, SmartMonitorZW)
and another device (PLC etc). The port number for the PC tool is fixed to 9600. When connecting different devices,
set the port number to other than 9600 (default value is 9601).
Product
Model
Application
ZW
[email protected]
This Displacement Sensor performs measurements.
PC Tool
Sysmac Studio Standard This is the setup application. It is part of the Sysmac Studio Package and it
runs on Windows.
Edition
The Sysmac Studio comes in two different editions.
• SYSMAC-SE200D
• Sysmac Studio Standard Edition
(no licenses included
The Sysmac Studio provides an integrated development environment for
(media only))
the NJ-series Controllers and other Machine Automation Controllers and
• SYSMAC-SE201L
EtherCAT Slaves. It supports setup, programming, debugging, operation,
(1-license edition)
and maintenance.
• [email protected]@L
The Sysmac Studio Standard Edition DVD includes Support Software for
(multilicense editions
EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet, serial communications, and PT screen design
(3, 10, 30, or 50
(CX-Designer). Refer to the Sysmac catalog (Cat. No. PXXX) for details.
licenses))
• Sysmac Studio Measurement Sensor Edition
Sysmac Studio
This license provides the functions that are required to set up ZW Vision
Measurement Sensor
Sensors from the Sysmac Studio. This model number is for the license
Edition
only. You must also purchase the DVD for the Sysmac Studio Standard
• [email protected]@L
Edition Ver.1.05 or higher.
(1 or 3 licences)
Special EtherCAT Cable
Refer to 10-1
Specifications and
Dimensions
The Special EtherCAT Cable connects the Sensor to another Sensor or to
another EtherCAT device.
General-purpose Ethernet
cable
---
Prepare commercially available Ethernet cable
satisfying the following requirements:
• Category 5e or more, 30 m or less
• RJ45 connector (8-pin modular jack)
• For direct connection: Select cross cable.
• For connection through an industrial switching hub: Select straight cable.
Special I/O Cable
For connecting to a PLC Connect the sensor with a PLC, programmable terminal, or personal
or programmable terminal computer etc..
• ZW-XPT2
For connecting to a PC
• ZW-XRS2
Industrial EtherNet/IP /
Ethernet Switching Hub
ZW User's Manual
• W4S1-03B
(3 ports type)
• W4S1-05B
• W4S1-05C
(5 ports type)
The Switching Hub connects multiple Sensors to one Touch Finder or one
computer running PC Tool.
System Configuration
23
Product
EtherCAT Junction Slave
24
System Configuration
Model
• GX-JC03
(3 ports type)
• GX-JC06
(6 ports type)
Application
Used to connect multiple sensors or PLCs using EtherCAT.
ZW User's Manual
2-2 Part Names and Functions
The following describes the names and functions of parts of the Sensor Head, Calibration ROM and Sensor
Controller.
Sensor Head
5
4
3
2
5
Installation and Connections
2
4
1
3
2
1
Straight type
Right angle type
No.
Names
Functions
1
Projector/receiver
Projects and receives light.
2
Serial number.
Serial number.
Only a calibration ROM with the same serial number is available.
3
Fiber interface
Interfaces the Sensor Head and optical fiber (unremovable).
4
Fiber Cable
Sends or receives light signals to/from the Sensor Controller.
5
Fiber Connector
Couples the Sensor Controller and fiber cable.
Calibration ROM
This ROM is associated with the sensor on a one-to-one basis, and operates connected to the Sensor
Controller.
1
No.
Names
Functions
1
Serial number
Serial number.
Only a Sensor Head with the same serial number is available.
Important
Use with the Calibration ROM always connected. If the Calibration ROM is not connected, an error is displayed.
ZW User's Manual
Part Names and Functions
25
Sensor Controller
<Front view>
<Rear view>
Display
1
2
3
4
5
6
19
20
7
Control
Panel
21
22
8
9
10
11
16
17
18
12
26
28
23
29
13
14
24
Connectors/
terminals
31
15
27
30
25
<Bottom view>
32
26
Part Names and Functions
ZW User's Manual
Front view
● Display
Functions
1
HIGH indicator (orange)
The HIGH indicator is lit while judgment is resulted in HIGH (HIGH threshold value <
measured value).
2
PASS indicator (green)
The PASS indicator is lit while judgment is resulted in PASS (LOW threshold value 
measured value  HIGH threshold value).
3
LOW indicator (orange)
The LOW indicator is lit while judgment is resulted in LOW (measured value < LOW
threshold value).
4
STABILITY indicator (green)
The STABILITY indicator is lit while a measured value is within the measuring range.
It goes out if a measured value is out of the measuring range.
5
ZERO indicator (green)
The Zero Reset indicator is lit while the zero reset function is enabled.
6
ENABLE indicator (green)
The ENABLE indicator lights when the Sensor is ready for measurement. It goes off when
measurement is not possible (e.g. when the received light amount is excessive or
insufficient, when the measuring range is exceeded, when the calibration ROM is not
connected, or when measurement is not being performed in FUN mode).
7
Main display (red)
The main display shows measured values and/or function names.
8
Sub-display (green)
The sub-display shows additional information for measured values or setting values for
functions.
9
RUN indicator (green)
The RUN indicator is lit in the RUN mode, and goes out in the FUN mode.
10
THRESHOLD-L indicator
(orange)
The LOW threshold value indicator is lit when the Sub-display indicates a LOW threshold
value.
11
THRESHOLD-H indicator
(orange)
The HIGH threshold value indicator is lit when the Sub-display indicates a HIGH threshold
value.
12
ECAT RUN indicator (green)
ECAT RUN indicator lights up when EtherCAT communication is established.
13
L/A IN indicator (green)
L/A IN indicator lights up when connected with the EtherCAT device.
Flashes when communication (data input) is performed.
14
L/A OUT indicator (green)
L/A OUT indicator lights up when connected with the EtherCAT device.
Flashes when communication (data output) is performed.
15
ECAT ERROR indicator (red)
ECAT ERROR indicator lights up when an EtherCAT communication error occurs.
Installation and Connections
Names (light color)
2
No.
● Control panel
No.
Names
Functions
16
ZERORST/ESC key
These keys function differently depending on operation modes.
17
 (LEFT) key
 (RIGHT) key
 (UP) key
 (DOWN) key
18
ZERO/SET key
19
Mode switching key
20
Node address setting switches
ZW User's Manual
9-2 Functions of Operating Keys p.294
These switches are used to set the node address as an EtherCAT communications
device.
The setting range is 01 to 99.
Part Names and Functions
27
● Connectors/terminals
No.
Names
Functions
21
RS-232C connector
Connect the RS-232C cable when you are connecting the system with a PLC or personal
computer through RS-232C.
For the RS-232C cable, please use the following exclusive products:
If you use a cable not included in the exclusive products, a false operation or breakdown
may result.
• For connecting to a PLC or programmable terminal: ZW-XPT2
• For connecting to a PC: ZW-XRS2
22
Ethernet connector
This connector is used to connect with a personal computer through Ethernet.
Prepare commercially available Ethernet cable satisfying the following requirements:
• Category 5e or more, 30 m or less
• RJ45 connector (8-pin modular jack)
• For one-to-one connection: Select cross cable.
• For connection through an industrial switching hub: Select straight cable.
(Recommended hub: [email protected] (Omron))
23
EtherCAT input connector
This connector is used to connect to EtherCAT-compatible devices.
Use the recommended EtherCAT cable.
24
EtherCAT input output connector This connector is used to connect to EtherCAT-compatible devices.
Use the recommended EtherCAT cable.
25
24 V input terminal block
This connector is used to connect to Sensor Controller DC24 V power supply.
26
32-pole extension connector
This connector connects the parallel I/Os, including output for judgment, ALARM, BUSY
or ENABLE, or input for ZERO, RESET, TIMING, LED-OFF or LOGGING, or bank number
output and bank number selection input.
27
Analog output terminal block
This connector connects the output for analog voltage and analog current.
28
Fiber connector
The fiber connector connects the fiber cable.
29
ROM connector
The ROM connector connects the calibration ROM.
30
Frame ground terminal
This is the connector for frame ground. It connects grounding wire.
Rear view
No.
Names
Functions
31
DIN track attachment hook
Used when fixing the Sensor Controller on DIN track.
Bottom view
28
No.
Names
Functions
32
Installation screw hole
Used when fixing the Sensor Controller with screws.
Part Names and Functions
ZW User's Manual
Detailed LED specifications are given below.
LED name
Color
Status
Contents
ECAT RUN indicator
Green
OFF
Initialization status
Blinking
Pre-Operational status
ECAT ERROR indicator
L/A OUT indicator
Green
Operational status
OFF
No error
Blinking
Communication setting error or PDO mapping error
Single flash
Synchronization error or communications data error
Double flash
Application WDT timeout
ON
PDI WDT timeout
OFF
Link not established in physical layer
Flickering
In operation after establishing link
ON
Link established in physical layer
OFF
Link not established in physical layer
Flickering
In operation after establishing link
ON
Link established in physical layer
Installation and Connections
Green
Safe-Operational status
ON
2
L/A IN indicator
Red
Single flash
Note
The timing of the flashing of the EtherCAT operation indicators is as follows:
50 ms
ON
Flickering
OFF
ON
Blinking
200 ms 200 ms
OFF
ON
1000 ms
Single flash
200 ms
200 ms
OFF
ON
1000 ms
Double flash
200 ms 200 ms 200 ms
OFF
ZW User's Manual
Part Names and Functions
29
2-3 Installation
Installation of Sensor Head
Installation procedure
1
Place the Sensor Head with an appropriate distance from
the target to measure, fixing it by tightening four M3 screw
inserted into their respective installation holes.
Tightening torque: 0.54 N • m
10-1 Specifications and External Dimensions p.358
M3 screw×4
Important
• For the location screw holes, see the external dimensions.
• When measuring on a high-reflectivity object, such as a mirror or wafer, false measured values beyond the
measuring range may be outputted. When an object with diffuse reflection is used, we recommend installing and
adjusting while watching the position of the spot.
Basic precautions for installation
Do not install the Sensor Head in a place where strong light hits the laser emitter/receiver section of the Sensor
Head. Also, if an object has a shiny surface, the light from the lighting will be reflected and a malfunction may
occur. In such a case, prevent reflection by, for example, covering the light to stop reflection.
30
Installation
ZW User's Manual
Measuring range
With the ZW series, the measurement center distance is expressed as 0 with the NEAR side as + and the FAR
side as -.
Straight type
ZW-S07
ZW-S20
2
Measuring range
NEAR side: +0.3 mm
Measuring
center: 0 mm
Measuring range
ZW User's Manual
NEAR side: +1 mm
Measuring
center: 0 mm
Measuring range
FAR side: -1 mm
FAR side: -0.3 mm
ZW-S30
Measurement center
distance: 30 mm
Measurement center
distance: 20 mm
Installation and Connections
Measurement center
distance: 7 mm
ZW-S40
NEAR side: +3 mm
Measuring
center: 0 mm
FAR side: -3 mm
Measurement center
distance: 40 mm
NEAR side: +6 mm
Measuring
center: 0 mm
Measuring range
FAR side: -6 mm
Installation
31
Right angle type
ZW-SR07
ZW-SR20
Measurement center
distance: 7 mm
Measuring
range
Measurement center
distance: 20 mm
NEAR side: +0.3 mm
Measuring
center: 0 mm
FAR side: -0.3 mm
Measuring
range
NEAR side: +1 mm
Measuring
center: 0 mm
FAR side: -1 mm
ZW-SR40
Measurement center
distance: 40 mm
NEAR side: +6 mm
Measuring
range
Measuring
center: 0 mm
FAR side: -6 mm
32
Installation
ZW User's Manual
Mutual interference
When using two or more Sensor Heads next to each other, mutual interference will not occur if other beam
spots are outside the ■ areas in the following diagrams.
Straight type
ZW-S07
ZW-S20
2
Installation and Connections
6.7 mm
0.6 mm
19 mm
1.6 mm
2 mm
3.0 mm
ZW-S30
ZW-S40
27 mm
34 mm
6 mm
4.8 mm
12 mm
6.0 mm
ZW User's Manual
Installation
33
Right angle type
ZW-SR07
ZW-SR20
6.7 mm
0.6 mm
19 mm
1.6 mm
2 mm
3.0 mm
ZW-SR40
34 mm
12 mm
6.0 mm
34
Installation
ZW User's Manual
Installation of Sensor Controller
Precautions for installation
Install the Sensor Controller in the orientation indicated by the circle mark in the following figure. Do not install
it laying on its side or upside down.
2
Installation and Connections
For adequate intake and/or exhaust, keep the Sensor Controller clear by 30 mm or more on its top, and by 10
mm or more from either side.
To secure the Sensor Head and cables connected safely, keep the front of the Sensor Controller clear by 65
mm or more.
30 mm
10
mm
10
mm
If more than one Sensor Controller must be placed in parallel, place them 10 mm or more apart each other,
keep them clear by 30 mm or more on their top and 30 mm or more under them.
30 mm
10
mm
10
mm
30 mm
10
mm
Important
Do everything possible to avoid installation in a location with vibration.
ZW User's Manual
Installation
35
Installing on the DIN track
The following describes how to attach the Sensor Controller on a 35 mm-wide DIN track.
DIN track (option)
PFP-100N (1 m)
PFP-50N (0.5 m)
PFP-100N2 (1 m)
End plate (option)
PFP-M
Installation procedure
1
Hook the upper edge of the Sensor Controller's back
slot onto the upper edge of the DIN track.
2
Push the Sensor Controller down onto the DIN track
until the DIN track attachment hook is locked.
Push in until you hear a "click" sound.
DIN track
attachment
hook
Important
Always hook the upper edge of the slot on the Sensor Controller's back first onto the DIN track. Hooking the Sensor
Controller starting from the lower edge of the slot may impair the mounting strength. After completely installing the
Sensor Controller, make sure that it is securely fixed.
Removal procedure
1
Pull DIN track attachment hook downwards using a
slotted screwdriver or an equivalent.
2
Lift up the Sensor Controller from the lower side, and
remove it from the DIN track.
DIN track
attachment
hook
36
Installation
ZW User's Manual
Installing on bottom
The following describes how to attach the Sensor Controller on its bottom.
1
Drill four installation holes on the base.
Important
For the location installation holes, see the external
dimensions.
Installation and Connections
2
2
10-1 Specifications and External Dimensions
p.358
Tighten four M4 screws to fix the Sensor Controller
on the base.
Tightening torque: 1.2 N • m
Sensor Controller thread depth: 6 mm
M4 screw × 4
Connecting Calibration ROM
To connect the calibration ROM to the Sensor Controller, follow the steps below:
1
Connect the calibration ROM to the ROM connector
on the Sensor Controller.
2
Fix the calibration ROM by tightening the supplied
M2 screw.
Tightening torque: 0.15 N • m max.
M2 screw
Calibration ROM
ROM connector
Important
• Before connecting or disconnecting the calibration ROM, make sure that the Sensor Controller's power supply is
turned OFF. The Sensor Controller may break down if the calibration ROM is connected while the power is ON.
• Use with the Calibration ROM always connected. If the Calibration ROM is not connected, an error is displayed.
• Only a calibration ROM and Sensor Head with a same serial number are compatible. When connecting a calibration
ROM with a Sensor Head, make sure that they have a same serial number, or measurement cannot be performed
correctly.
ZW User's Manual
Installation
37
Connecting Fiber Cable
Connect the fiber cable on the Sensor Head to the Sensor Head connector on the Sensor Controller as follows:
1
Remove the protective caps from the Sensor Controller's fiber connector and the fiber cable.
Protective cap
Protective cap
Fiber cable
Fiber connector
Important
Do not discard but keep the protective cap handy.
2
Mate the convex section on the fiber cable with the groove on the fiber connector and turn the
threaded section clockwise while pushing in (see figure 1).
(Figure 1)
(Figure 2)
Good
No good
Good
No good
Groove
(Figure 3)
Threaded
section
Fiber cable
Convex
section
Fiber
connector
In the "No good" status in figure 2 and figure 3, optic signals cannot be transmitted and correct
measurement is not possible. Always check that the system is in the "Good" status.
38
Installation
ZW User's Manual
Important
• Handling fiber cables
Use them in compliance with the following.
-Fiber cable bend radiuses must be at least 20 mm.
-Do not let bending cause stress at the connecting section of a fiber connector.
-Do not yank hard on a fiber cable.
-Do not step on a fiber cable or place anything heavy on it.
• Do not touch the end surface of a fiber cable, or the cable may be degraded in performance. Should the end surface
be touched or soiled, wipe the dirt away using a commercially available cleaner exclusive for fiber or dry and soft
cloth. Do not use a cloth moistened with alcohol, or the dirt may be reattached.
2
We recommend the following product as the fiber cleaner.
Item
Model
Manufacturer
Tip of fiber cable
OPTIPOP R1
ATC-RE-01
NTT Advanced Technology Corporation
Installation and Connections
Point
• Use the optional ZW-XCL when cleaning the groove of the fiber connector.
Fiber connector cleaner p.376
• The fiber cable and fiber connectors should not be left with their protective caps removed, not even for a short
period of time. Leaving them unprotected can let dirt get on the end surface and cause performance deterioration.
• Calibrate the Sensor Head after removing and inserting a fiber cable.
Calibrating Sensor Head p.42
ZW User's Manual
Installation
39
Extending fiber cable
To extend the fiber cable on the Sensor Head, use an extension fiber cable and connecting adapter.
Connection adapter
ZW-XFC
Sensor Head
fiber cable
Extension fiber cable
[email protected]@R:
(2 m/5 m/10 m/20 m/30 m)
Mate the convex section on the fiber cable with the groove
on the connection adapter and turn the threaded section
clockwise while pushing in.
Convex Groove
section
In the "No good" status in figure below, optic signals cannot
be transmitted and correct measurement is not possible.
Always check that the system is in the "Good" status.
Good
No good
Extension fiber cable (option)
Model
Length
ZW-XF02R
2m
ZW-XF05R
5m
ZW-XF10R
10 m
ZW-XF20R
20 m
ZW-XF30R
30 m
Connecting adapter (option)
Model
ZW-XFC
40
Installation
ZW User's Manual
Important
• The connection adapter (ZW-XFC) comes packed together with the extension fiber cable ([email protected]@R).
• Never use any extension fiber cable and/or connecting adapter other than those specified in the above.
• Hold the combined length of the normal and extension fiber cables to no more than 32 m.
• Only one fiber cable is allowed to extend the normal fiber cable. Never use two or more extension fiber cable
connected together.
• Do not touch the end surface of a fiber cable, or the cable may be degraded in performance. Should the end surface
be touched or soiled, wipe the dirt away using a commercially available cleaner exclusive for fiber or dry and soft
cloth. Do not use a cloth moistened with alcohol, or the dirt may be reattached.
We recommend the following product as the fiber cleaner.
Model
Manufacturer
Tip of fiber cable
OPTIPOP R1
ATC-RE-01
NTT Advanced Technology Corporation
Installation and Connections
Item
2
Point
• Use the optional ZW-XCL when cleaning the groove of the fiber connector.
Fiber connector cleaner p.376
• The fiber cable and fiber connectors should not be left with their protective caps removed, not even for a short
period of time. Leaving them unprotected can let dirt get on the end surface and cause performance deterioration.
• Calibrate the Sensor Head after removing and inserting an optical fiber.
Calibrating Sensor Head p.42
ZW User's Manual
Installation
41
Calibrating Sensor Head
Calibrate the Sensor Head by obtaining the dark data in the no-incoming light status.
• When removing and inserting a fiber cable from/to the Sensor Controller (Including the initial connection).
• When extending a fiber cable.
The calibration data is stored inside the Sensor Controller. Therefore, if the sensor head is calibrated once, as
long as the fiber connection state does not change (if it is not disconnected from or connected to the Sensor
Controller or an extension added), this operation is not needed each time.
The Sensor Head should be calibrated without any object within the measuring range or with the tip of the
Sensor Head shielded from light with an object with diffuse reflection.
(Correct calibration is not possible with a transparent object, semi-transparent object, or mirror. )
• Without any object
within the measuring range
• With light shielded
Sensor head
Sensor head
Install an object with diffuse
reflection (metal, paper, plastic, etc.)
than the measurement range.
Measuring range
1
Measuring range
Set the operation mode to FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
 Explorer pane : [Device Group] | [(Sensor Name)] | [System] | [System Data] (double click)
 Edit pane: [Sensor Settings] icon (
)
2
42
Click [Sensor head calibration] - [Execute
sensor head calibration].
Sensor head calibration is executed.
Installation
ZW User's Manual
Important
When Sensor Head calibration fails
If the Sensor Head is calibrated in an inappropriate environment, an error is displayed on the main display. If this
happens, chack the environment and try again. If an error continues even after calibrating the Sensor Head in an
appropriate environment, the fiber connector on the Sensor Head or Sensor Controller may be stained. Clean the fiber
cable or fiber connector referring to p.39.
Note
Calibrating Sensor Head can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Calibrating Sensor Head p.336
2
Installation and Connections
ZW User's Manual
Installation
43
2-4 Wiring
32-pole extension connector
Used for judgment output, control input, etc.
Compatible connector: FX2B series (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
A parallel cable (ZW-XCP2E) for an extension connector with 2 m cable is included.
Color(*1 ) Signal name
No.(*2 )
Signal name
Color(*1 )
Blue
COM_IN1
B16
A16
NC
Blue
Green
TIMING1
B15
A15
NC
Green
Yellow
RESET1
B14
A14
NC
Yellow
Orange
ZERO1
B13
A13
NC
Orange
Red
LED OFF1
B12
A12
NC
Red
Brown
COM_OUT1
B11
A11
NC
Brown
Black
HIGH1
B10
A10
NC
Black
White
PASS1
B9
A9
NC
White
Gray
LOW1
B8
A8
NC
Gray
Purple
ALARM
B7
A7
NC
Purple
Blue
BUSY1
B6
A6
NC
Blue
Green
ENABLE1
B5
A5
COM_IN2
Green
Yellow
COM_OUT2
B4
A4
BANK_SEL1
Yellow
Orange
BANK_OUT1
B3
A3
BANK_SEL2
Orange
Red
BANK_OUT2
B2
A2
BANK_SEL3
Red
Brown
BANK_OUT3
B1
A1
LOGGING
Brown
*1 Indicates ZW-XCP2E code color
*2 This is the layout for when the 32-pole extension connector on the Sensor Controller
is viewed from front.
Important
Cut the unnecessary signal lines so that they do not touch other signal lines.
44
Wiring
ZW User's Manual
Name
Description
Parallel
output
HIGH output
This outputs judgment results - HIGH (HIGH threshold values < Measured value).
PASS output
This outputs judgment results - PASS (LOW threshold values  Measured value  HIGH
threshold values).
LOW output
This outputs judgment results - LOW (LOW threshold values > Measured value).
ALARM output
This turns ON when there is a system error.
BUSY output
This turns ON during sampling with the hold function enabled. It allows you to check
whether or not the self-trigger is functioning correctly.
It also turns ON during bank switching.
ENABLE output
This turns ON when the sensor is ready for measurement.
This output is interlocked with the ENABLE indicator.
BANK_OUT output
This outputs the currently specified bank number.
It expresses the bank number in combinations of BANK_OUT1, 2 and 3.
BANK_OUT2
BANK_OUT3
BANK1
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK2
ON
OFF
OFF
BANK3
OFF
ON
OFF
BANK4
ON
ON
OFF
BANK5
OFF
OFF
ON
BANK6
ON
OFF
ON
BANK7
OFF
ON
ON
BANK8
ON
ON
ON
Installation and Connections
Parallel
input
Bank Number BANK_OUT1
2
Class
ZERO input
This is used to execute and clear a zero reset.
RESET input
This resets all executing measurements and outputs.
While a RESET is being input, judgment output conforms to the non-measurement setting.
If this RESET input switches ON while the hold function is used, the state in effect before
the hold function was set will be restored.
TIMING input
This is a signal input from an external device that is used to time the hold function with the
continuous measurement function enabled.
This is a signal input from an external device that is used to time the measurement with the
trigger measurement function enabled.
LED OFF input
This LED-OFF signal puts out the measurement LED.
While LED-OFF is being input, the analog output, binary output, and judgment output
conform to the non-measurement setting.
BANK_SEL input
This is used for switching banks.
Specify the bank number in combinations of BANK_SEL1, 2 and 3.
However, if the bank mode is set to "JUDGEMENT", the bank cannot be switched at the
external signal input because the number of banks increases to 32.
LOGGING input
ZW User's Manual
Bank Number BANK_SEL1
BANK_SEL2
BANK_SEL3
BANK1
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK2
ON
OFF
OFF
BANK3
OFF
ON
OFF
BANK4
ON
ON
OFF
BANK5
OFF
OFF
ON
BANK6
ON
OFF
ON
BANK7
OFF
ON
ON
BANK8
ON
ON
ON
This is used to start and end internal logging.
Wiring
45
Analog output terminal block
Used for analog output.
Compatible cable specifications: AWG 18 to 28, pin processed length: 7 mm
Signal name
No.
Signal name
OUT1(V)
1
4
NC
OUT1(A)
2
5
NC
OUT1 0V
3
6
NC
Important
Cut the unnecessary signal lines so that they do not touch other signal lines.
Class
Name
Description
Analog
output
OUT1 (V)
This outputs the measured value, from -10 V to +10 V as the voltage value.
When measurement not possible: Approx. +10.8 V (default value; can be selected by user)
Alarm: Approx. 10.8 V
OUT1 (A)
This outputs the measured value, from 4 mA to 20 mA as the current value.
When measurement not possible: Approx. +21mA (default value; can be selected by user)
Alarm: Approx. +21 mA
OUT1 0V
0 V for analog voltage output.
1
Loosen the two fixing screws using a screwdriver to
remove Analog output terminal block from the
Sensor Controller.
Fixing Screws
(both end)
46
Wiring
ZW User's Manual
2
Push in and hold the release button next to the
terminal hole using a screwdriver while pushing the
wire fully into the terminal hole and remove the
screwdriver.
After the connection has been established, pull the wire
gently, to make sure that the connection has been made
securely.
Release button
Terminal hole
Reinstall the Analog output terminal block to the
Sensor Controller.
2
3
Installation and Connections
24 V input terminal block
Used for 24 VDC power supply.
Compatible cable specifications: AWG 12 to 26, pin processed length: 10 mm
No.
Signal name
1
DC24V (-)
2
DC24V (+)
Class
Name
Description
Power Supply
DC24V (+)
Terminal for external power supply (24 V)
DC24V (-)
Terminal for external power supply (0 V)
Important
• Wiring with the power on could result in a short-circuit or electric shock. Wire with the power off.
• Wire the power supply separate from other devices. Wiring together with other devices or using the same duct could
cause a false operation or damage the sensor.
• Do not turn off the power during initial processing immediately after the Sensor Controller power is turned on, as the
memory inside the Sensor Controller is being accessed. This may corrupt the data.
• Securely fasten the terminal block to prevent injury when you press in the release button with a screwdriver.
ZW User's Manual
Wiring
47
1
Remove 24 V input terminal block from the Sensor
Controller.
2
Push in and hold the release button next to the
terminal hole using a screwdriver while pushing the
wire fully into the terminal hole and remove the
screwdriver.
After the connection has been established, pull the wire
gently, to make sure that the connection has been made
securely.
3
48
Release button
Terminal hole
Reinstall the 24 V input terminal block to the Sensor
Controller.
Wiring
ZW User's Manual
Electrical Specifications
Input circuit
Specifications
Model
ZW-CE10T
ZW-CE15T
Input type
NPN
PNP
Input voltage
DC24 V10 % (21.6 to 26.4 V)
DC24 V10 % (21.6 to 26.4 V)
7 mA Typ. (DC24 V)
7 mA Typ. (DC24 V)
19 V min./3 mA min.
19 V min./3 mA min.
OFF voltage/OFF current *2 5 V max./1 mA max.
5 V max./1 mA max.
ON delay
0.1 ms max.
0.1 ms max.
0.1 ms max.
0.1 ms max.
COM_IN1/2
3.3 kΩ
+
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
+
Input
terminals
3.3 kΩ
910 Ω
Input
terminals
1000 pF
Internal circuit diagram
*3
1000 pF
OFF delay
Installation and Connections
ON voltage/ON current
*1
910 Ω
Input current
2
Item
COM_IN1/2
*1 ON voltage/ON current
This is the voltage value or current value that makes the signal go OFF to ON.
The ON voltage value becomes the potential difference between COM IN 1/2 and the input terminals.
*2 OFF voltage/OFF current
This is the voltage value or current value that makes the signal go ON to OFF.
The OFF voltage value becomes the potential difference between COM IN 1/2 and the input terminals.
*3 Below is a table giving the COM_IN (input common) and input signal connection correspondence.
Terminal
name
COM_IN1
COM_IN2
TIMING1
BANK_SEL1
Input terminal RESET1
name
ZERO1
BANK_SEL2
LED OFF1
BANK_SEL3
LOGGING
Important
Chattering countermeasures
• The sensor is designed with functions to deal with chattering, but if chattering of 100 s or more occurs, incorrect
input due to chattering cannot be prevented. (Input signal changes of less than 100 s are ignored. The input signal
is applied when the same level is maintained for 100 s or longer.)
• Always use non-contact relays (SSR, PLC transistor output) for input signals. If contact relays are used, contact
bounding may turn ON a TIMING input again during measuring.
ZW User's Manual
Wiring
49
Output circuit
Item
Specifications
Model
ZW-CE10T
ZW-CE15T
Output type
NPN
PNP
Output voltage
DC21.6 to 30 V
DC21.6 to 30 V
Load current
50 mA max.
50 mA max.
ON residual voltage
1.2 V max.
1.2 V max.
0.1 mA max.
0.1 mA max.
ON leakage current
Internal circuit diagram
*1
Output
terminals
L
Load
Internal
circuit
+
COM_OUT1/2
Internal
circuit
COM_OUT1/2
+
Load
L
Output
terminals
*1 Below is a table giving the COM_OUT (output common) and output signal connection correspondence.
Terminal name
COM_OUT1
COM_OUT2
HIGH1
BANK_OUT1
PASS1
BANK_OUT2
Output terminal LOW1
name
ALARM
BANK_OUT3
BUSY1
ENABLE1
Important
• Connect a load that matches the output specifications. Short-circuit can cause sensor breakdown.
• Keep the load current less than or equal to the specification value. Exceeding the specification value could cause
damage to the output circuit.
50
Wiring
ZW User's Manual
2-5 Installing the Sysmac Studio
The PC Tool used to set up ZW-series Displacement Sensors is installed from the Sysmac Studio Installer.
Refer to the Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (Cat. No. W504) for the system requirements and
installation procedure.
2
Installation and Connections
ZW User's Manual
Installing the Sysmac Studio
51
MEMO
52
Installing the Sysmac Studio
ZW User's Manual
Basic Operation
3
3-2 Explanation of Screen Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3-3 Switching operation modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3-4 Bank switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3-5 Perform the Zero Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3-6 Setting Threshold Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3-7 Saving a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3-8 Operating with Sensor Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Basic Operation
3-1 Launching a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3-1 Launching a project
Connecting to the sensor with PC tool
Creating a new project
Create a new project, add a sensor to the project, then start communicating with the sensor.
1
2
Start up the PC tool.
Create a new project.
Click [New Project] and select [Displacement
Sensor] from [Category] under [Select Device],
and [ZW] from [Device].
Then enter [Project name], [Author], and
[Comment].
Click [Create] to create a blank project.
Note
If there are existing projects, click [Open Project].
A list of the projects is displayed. Select the
project you want to open and click [Open].
If an existing project is opened, it starts up in
offline mode. For the details of offline mode, see
below.
Chapter 7 Offline Settings p.261
3
Specify the sensor to connect using one of
the methods below.
• Directly specify the IP address of the sensor to
connect.
Check the [Specify a sensor] box. Then, directly
enter the IP address and click [OK].
For the default value of the IP address, refer to
p.203.
• When not connected with the sensor (offline)
When setting a project offline without
connecting to the actual sensor, check [Enter
the type] to select.
Then, select the sensor model and software
version to use and click [OK].
Chapter7 Offline Settings p.261
54
Launching a project
ZW User's Manual
4
After the sensor is connected, the following
window appears.
The Main pane appears on the Edit pane. The
sensor starts up in RUN mode.
3
Adding a sensor to a project
 Explorer pane
Basic Operation
After the project is created, additional sensors can be added to the project.
: [Device Group] (right click) | [Add]
Entering project information
Comments about the project can be entered.
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
1
: [Device Group] | [(Sensor Name)] (double click)
: [General Settings] icon (
)
Enter comments for the project in the [Comment] field.
ZW User's Manual
Launching a project
55
3-2 Explanation of Screen Sections
PC tool
The following summarizes the names and functions of the window sections of Sysmac Studio.
Sysmac Studio Main window
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
56
No.
Name
(1)
Menu bar
Menu items that can be used with this tool is displayed.
(2)
Toolbar
Tool functions that can be used with this tool is displayed with icons.
(3)
Explorer pane
Displays the data hierarchy of the sensor with a hierarchy tree.
Double clicking each data displays Main pane, Bank data edit pane, and System data
edit pane on the Edit pane.
(4)
Edit pane
Edits and displays data selected in the Explorer pane.
It mainly consists of Menu icon, Line bright monitor, setting items, and properties.
(5)
Status bar
Displays the status of setting operations.
Explanation of Screen Sections
Description
ZW User's Manual
Explorer pane
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Description
(1)
Sensor model
Displays the sensor model. Displays online/offline status at the end.
(2)
Bank group
This is a group of bank data. Bank data can be registered up to 8 in NORMAL mode,
and up to 32 in JUDGMENT VALUE BANK mode.
(3)
Bank data
This is used to set functions to perform measurements. It consists of sensing setting,
task setting, and I/O setting.
(4)
System data
System data common to all banks.
Basic Operation
Name
3
No.
A list of menu items displayed with right click
Tree view items
Menu
Description
Device group
Add | ZW-C
Adds a sensor to the project.
Sensor model
Bank data
System data
ZW User's Manual
Paste
Pastes the copied sensor to the project.
Rename
Changes the device group name.
Edit
Displays the main pane as the Edit pane.
Delete
Deletes a sensor from the project.
Copy
Copies a sensor.
Online
Switches the connection status with the sensor to online.
Offline
Switches the connection status with the sensor to offline.
RUN
Switches the sensor to RUN mode.
Setup
Switches the sensor to Setup mode.
Save settings
Save the sensor settings data to nonvolatile memory.
Initialize Sensor
Initialize the sensor.
Restart
Restart the sensor.
Print
Setting data is printed.
Edit
Displays the bank data edit pane as the Edit pane.
Copy
Copies a bank data.
Paste
Overwrites the copied bank data.
Initialize
Deletes (initializes) bank data.
Rename
Changes the bank data name.
Edit
Displays the system data edit pane as the Edit pane.
Copy
Copies system data.
Paste
Overwrites system data.
Explanation of Screen Sections
57
Edit pane
The Edit Pane changes as shown below based on what is selected in the Explorer Pane.
(2)
Main pane
(4) Bank data edit pane
(1)
(1)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(3)
(7)
(3)
System data setting pane
(1)
(2)
(3)
58
No.
Name
Description
(1)
Menu icon
Parameters to be edited on each edit pane can be changed.
(2)
Setting item
When editing each menu item selected with menu icons, a pop up window is called out.
(3)
Guidance
The description of the focused setting item is displayed.
(4)
Measurement value monitor
The selected measurement results or output values are displayed.
(5)
LED light
The status of each LED light is displayed when online.
(6)
I/O input
The status of I/O signals can be switched when online.
(7)
Line bright monitor
The line bright is displayed.
Explanation of Screen Sections
ZW User's Manual
List of icons
(1) Menu icon
Edit pane type
Main pane
Bank data edit pane
Description
General settings
Sensor name and project information can be checked.
Online
Switching between online and offline connections with the actual
sensors, and switching the operating mode can be performed. Also,
the internal logging process, saving set data, monitoring the
measurement results can be performed.
Tool
The initialization or upgrading the version of the actual sensor can
be performed.
Sensing
Switching the operation mode (1 area/2 area), and setting exposure
time and measurement areas can be performed.
Task 1
Allows you to perform setting to calculate the feature amounts of
height, thickness and calculation using scaling, filter, and hold
processes.
Settings can be made individually for the task 1 to 4.
I/O
Allow you to make settings for judgment output, and analog output.
Sensor settings
Allows you to make sensor settings such as bank mode or analog
output.
Basic Operation
Menu name
3
System data setting pane
Icon
Ethernet
Allows you to make settings for Ethernet communication.
communication settings
RS-232C
Allows you to make settings for RS-232C communication settings.
communication settings
Data output settings
ZW User's Manual
Edit the data output settings.
Explanation of Screen Sections
59
(2) Operation icons
Bank data edit pane
Icon
Name
Description
Zoom in
Zoom in the line bright.
Zoom out
Zoom out the line bright.
Fit to frame
Change the size of the line bright so it fits the window size.
Export
Saves the line bright being displayed.
Trend monitor window
Icon
60
Name
Description
Start sampling
Starts the sampling.
Stop sampling
Stops the sampling.
Show grid
Displays gridlines.
Show configuration
Displays the logging condition setting window.
Show data table
Displays the data window to be logged.
Show Analog Chart
Displays the analog chart window.
Show Digital Chart
Displays the digital chart window.
Import
Imports the exported measurement results and display them on each chart.
Export
Exports the measurement results displayed on each chart.
Explanation of Screen Sections
ZW User's Manual
3-3 Switching operation modes
The Sensor Controller has two operation modes. One is RUN mode and the other is FUN mode.
Switch to the desired mode depending on purpose.
(The Sensor Controller always starts up in the RUN mode when the power is turned on.)
Item
Setting item
Mode
Online
Operation mode RUN
Setup
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
1
Description
Switches to RUN (operation) mode. Normal operation mode.
Switches to Setup mode. Mode for setting the measurement conditions.
: [Device Group] | [(Sensor Name)] (double click)
: [Online] icon (
)
3
Select the operation mode with [Operation
mode].
Basic Operation
Note
Switching operation modes can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
9-4 Switching operation modes p.296
ZW User's Manual
Switching operation modes
61
3-4 Bank switching
Multi-task and Bank Data
Multi-task Function
With the ZW Series, you can set multiple measurement processing for one sensing setting. This measurement
processing is called a "task (TASK)."
Example: When measuring height and side run-out at the same time
Surface fluctuation (TASK2)
Height (TASK1)
For tasks, TASK1 to TASK4 are available for registration.
You can measure and judge up to four characteristic points simultaneously because you can specify the
desired measurement items such as peak, bottom, and average for each task.
* For the output, the following four types
are supported:
62
Bank switching
Output *
Measurement result
Judge
Zero reset
Hold
Scaling
Filter
- Analog output
Select one TASK that you want to output.
- Judgment output
Select one TASK that you want to output.
- Serial output (Ethernet/RS-232C)
Can output data from four tasks at a
time.
Output *
Judge
Zero reset
Hold
Scaling
Filter
Measurement item
Measurement processing flow in TASK4
Measurement item
Sensing setting
Measurement processing flow in TASK1
- Fieldbus output (EtherCAT / Ethernet/IP)
Can output data from four tasks at a
time.
ZW User's Manual
Bank Data
ZW series can hold up to eight sets of sensing settings, which are called "bank (BANK)".
When the setup is changed, the bank can be switched externally.
What is Bank?
The sensing settings for measurement
Sensing
Filter
Output
I/O
are held as one bank.
Threshold value
Sensing
Filter
Output
I/O
Threshold value
BANK
3
Example of switching bank for settings
Basic Operation
If you register settings of various classes,
Register the different settings
for changing the device setup.
Sensing setting for product class A
Sensing
Filter
Output
I/O
Sensing setting for product class B
Sensing
Filter
Threshold value
Output
BANK1
BANK2
BANK3
Measuring operation
with the contents set
in BANK1
Measuring operation
with the contents set in
BANK2
Switch
to BANK2.
I/O
Threshold value
BANK1
BANK2
BANK3
BANK8
BANK8
It is easy to change the device setup.
Sensing
TASK1
Measurement point
Filter
Output
Threshold value
TASK4
Filter
Measurement point
Output
Threshold value
TASK1 to TASK4 are
specified in the settings
for each bank.
I/O
BANK1
Important
• If you want to register multiple bank data having the same values set except for "threshold values (judgment
values)", by changing the mode of the bank, you can increase the number of banks from 8 to 32.
Changing the Bank Mode p.110
• The "output destination" (current output value/voltage output value) in the I/O setting parameters is set the same for
all banks. The output destination cannot be set separately for individual banks.
Setting the analog output destination p.140
ZW User's Manual
Bank switching
63
Switching Banks
Switches banks.
1
Click the bank group on the Explorer pane to
open.
2
Select the bank data to switch and double
click or right click it to select the Edit menu.
The bank in the Bank data edit pane that is
active on the Edit pane becomes the current
bank.
Important
You can also switch the bank by entering the non-procedural command or from SmartMonitor ZW.
Current bank data setting command <BS command> p.242
SmartMonitor ZW Operation Manual
Note
Switching Banks can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Switching Banks p.326
64
Bank switching
ZW User's Manual
3-5 Perform the Zero Reset
Zero reset
What is Zero Reset?
This function allows resetting the measured value to "0" at any timing during measurement in the RUN mode.
The measured value can be displayed and output as a positive or negative deviation (tolerance) from the set
reference value "0".
Example 1: Use the height of the sensing object as a reference value and the deviation is the measured value.
3
Basic Operation
Sensor head
+2 (HIGH threshold value)
0
(reference value)
Sensing
object
-2 (LOW threshold value)
Example 2: Use the measured value according to the height of the sensing object (set 10 as an offset value)
Sensor head
+12 (HIGH threshold value)
10
Sensing
object
ZW User's Manual
+8 (LOW threshold value)
Perform the Zero Reset
65
Example 3: Measure the level difference of the sensing object (execute zero reset at every measurement)
Sensor head
This step is
measured.
Zero reset
executed
Zero reset
executed
Zero reset
executed
Direction of movement
The zero reset function also allows setting the reference value to the hold value for a hold measurement or any
value other than zero.
Setting the Zero Reset p.105 p.322
Executing Zero Reset
66
1
Place the reference sensing object in
position.
2
Press the
key.
The ZERO indicator illuminates and the current
measured value is registered as 0.
Perform the Zero Reset
ZW User's Manual
Important
• When a zero reset is executed, the analog output becomes the voltage or current value at the center of the two
preset points. Analog output becomes roughly 0 V or 12 mA when focus is not set.
Setting Monitor Focus p.142
• The Zero Reset function can also be executed by supplying a ZERO signal to the 32-pole extension connector.
32-pole extension connector p.44
• The Zero Reset function can also be executed by turning ON the EtherCAT ZERO input signal.
Zero reset execution p.166 p.173
Canceling Zero Reset
3
Press and hold the
seconds.
Basic Operation
1
key for two
Important
• The Zero Reset function can also be executed by supplying a ZERO signal to the 32-pole extension connector.
32-pole extension connector p.44
ZERO input p.139
• The canceling Zero Reset function can also be executed by turning ON the EtherCAT ZEROCLR input signal.
Zero reset cancel p.166 p.173
ZW User's Manual
Perform the Zero Reset
67
3-6 Setting Threshold Value
Threshold Value Settings
Switch the Sensor Controller to the FUN mode and set the range in order for the measured value to be judged
as PASS.
Both HIGH and LOW threshold values are set.
As a judgment result, HIGH, PASS or LOW is output.
HIGH threshold value
Measured value
LOW threshold value
Output
HIGH
ON
OFF
PASS
ON
OFF
LOW
ON
OFF
ON when Measurement result
> HIGH threshold value
ON when LOW threshold value
< Measurement result
< HIGH threshold value
ON when Measurement result
<LOW threshold value
A judgment result appears on the Sensor Controller as follows.
• When the judgment result is "HIGH": HIGH indicator lights up
• When the judgment result is "PASS": PASS indicator lights up
• When the judgment result is "LOW": LOW indicator lights up
68
Setting Threshold Value
ZW User's Manual
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Judgment
LOW threshold
- 999.999999 to 0 (default value) to
999.999999 [mm]
Set the lower limit (LOW) threshold value.
HIGH threshold
- 999.999999 to 0 (default value) to
999.999999 [mm]
Set the upper limit (HIGH) threshold value.
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task settings window : [Judgment]
1
Enter the [LOW threshold] and [HIGH threshold].
3
Basic Operation
Important
• Hysteresis (hysteresis width) can also be set to threshold values. Set hysteresis when measured values are
dispersed around a threshold value, and judgments are unstable, to prevent chattering.
Setting Operation at Judgment Output p.146
• Threshold values can also be adjusted by directly entering values in the RUN mode.
This helps you to make fine adjustments without shutting down the system.
Changing Threshold Values p.301
Note
Threshold Value Settings can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
9-10 Setting Threshold Value p.331
ZW User's Manual
Setting Threshold Value
69
3-7 Saving a project
Saving a project
Save the project being edited with the PC tool.
The project to be saved has the following information.
Configuration data
Description
Project information
Information on the sensor registered in this project.
Entire sensor information Entire sensor information.
Tool setting information
Information on tool setting parameters for each sensor registered in this project.
A project cannot be saved in RUN mode. Switch to the RUN mode to save.
Note
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
Important
• Save a project data when the setting of the Sensor Controller is changed. If the power is turned off without saving,
the changed setting is cleared.
Saving the Bank/System Settings p.112
1
Menu bar: Click [File] - [Save] to select.
Exporting a project
A project data (.smc) can be exported.
The exported data can be used by importing with the other personal computer's PC tool.
1
Menu bar: Click [File] - [Export] to select.
Importing a project
The exported data from other personal computers can be imported as project data.
1
70
Menu bar: Click [File] - [Import] to select.
Saving a project
ZW User's Manual
3-8 Operating with Sensor Controller
Other than using PC tools, ZW Series can also be operated using the operation keys on the Sensor Controller.
For details on how to operate with operation keys, see 9. Sensor controller operations.
3
Basic Operation
ZW User's Manual
Operating with Sensor Controller
71
MEMO
72
Operating with Sensor Controller
ZW User's Manual
Settings for Function
4-1 Setting Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4-4 Setting the Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
4-5 Setting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Settings for Function
4-3 Setting the Output Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4
4-2 Setting Measurement Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4-1 Setting Sensing
Selecting the Area Mode
Area modes can be used selectively according to the target to measure.
Item
Setting item
Operating mode Area Mode
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
1
Setting value
Description
1 area mode
Usually, select this setting.
2 area mode
We recommend measuring in the 2 area mode when the measurement object
is a transparent object and the reflection characteristics of the target to
measure are different.
The sensing setting suitable for each the measurement surface can be used.
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
: [Sensing setting] icon ( )
Select the area mode at [Operating mode] [Area mode].
Important
• When the 2 area mode is selected,
[Measurement area 2] is added to the setting
items for sensing setting.
• In the 2 area mode, the exposure time control
mode and measurement area must each be set
for [Measurement area 1] and [Measurement
area 2].
Setting Exposure Time Control Mode
p.79
Setting the Measurement Area p.80
• The measuring cycle for the 2-area
measurement mode is twice as long as the one
for Area 1 or 2, which is longer than the other.
74
Setting Sensing
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Material of the Target to Measure
Setting the material of the target to measure.
Item
Setting item
Operation mode Material
Setting value
Description
Normal (default value)
A measurement can be performed at specific linearity
regardless of the type of target to measure.
Usually, select this setting.
Mirror
Select this mode when specular reflection (regular
reflection) occurs on the surface. (Glass, wafer, lustrous
metal, etc.)
Rough
Select this mode when diffuse reflection occurs on the
surface.
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank data name)] (double-click)
 Edit pane
: [Sensing setting] icon ( )
 Sensing settings window : [Operating mode]
1
4
Select the material of the target to measure
at [Material].
Settings for Function
Important
Refer to p.362 for the linearity data of various materials according to each material setting.
Note
The material of the target to measure can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Setting the Material of the Target to Measure p.302
ZW User's Manual
Setting Sensing
75
Setting the Noise Cut Level
The setting a larger value than the noise level, the noise can be cut.
Noise can be cut.
Noise
Item
Setting item
Operation mode Noise cut level
Setting value
Description
0 to 4,095 [Gradation]
(Default value :100)
Set the number of gradations when noise is cut from the
line bright.
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Sensing setting] icon ( )
 Sensing settings window : [Operating mode]
1
76
Set [Noise cut level].
Setting Sensing
ZW User's Manual
Setting Smoothing Size
When two measurement surfaces are close, the line bright may not be divided. The setting of smoothing size a
smaller value, it becomes easy to divide.
Smoothing size : 5
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
1/3/5/7/9 [pixels]
(Default value :5)
Set the pixel size to be used as the unit when smoothing
the line bright.
4
Operation mode Smoothing size
Smoothing size : 1
Settings for Function
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Sensing setting] icon ( )
 Sensing settings window : [Operating mode]
1
Set [Smoothing size].
Important
Usually use the initial value, because the resolution may worsen when the setting a small value
ZW User's Manual
Setting Sensing
77
Setting Start Direction of Count Measurement Surfaces
When a number of measurement surfaces exists, start direction can be selected from NEAR side or FAR side.
Example: NEAR
Example: FAR
1 surface
4 surface
2 surface
3 surface
3 surface
4 surface
Item
Setting item
2 surface
1 surface
Setting value
Operation mode Start direction of NEAR (default value)
count
FAR
measurement
surfaces
Description
Measurement surfaces are counted from NEAR side.
Measurement surfaces are counted from FAR side.
Important
It cannot set and display using Sysmac Studio.
Note
The setting of start direction of count measurement surfaces can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor
Controller.
Setting Start Direction of Count Measurement Surfaces p.303
78
Setting Sensing
ZW User's Manual
Setting Exposure Time Control Mode
Set the exposure time control mode and exposure time (maximum) or exposure time (fixed).
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Exposure time
Exposure mode
Auto (default value)
Automatically sets the exposure time within the range that
does not exceed the specified upper limit. Usually, select
this setting.
Manual
Select this mode when you want to specify the exposure
time, and set the exposure time (fixed value).
Exposure time
(maximum)
1 to 1,000 (default value) to 5,000
[s]
Set the upper limit value of the exposure time when
[Automatic] has been selected for the control mode.
Exposure time
(fixed)
1 to 1,000 (default value) to 5,000
[s]
Set the fixed value of the exposure time when [Fixed] has
been selected for the control mode.
Control edge
1 surface/2 surfaces/3 surfaces/
4 surfaces/Peak (default value)
Select the measurement surface target for light adjustment.
The peak is the surface of all measurement surfaces having
the highest received light amount.
Important
4
Exposure time and measuring cycle
Settings for Function
• For the "AUTO" exposure time control mode, the measuring cycle is twice the preset exposure time upper limit. (The
measuring cycle remains the same even if the actual exposure time is the upper limit or less.)
• For the "MANUAL" exposure time control mode, the measuring cycle twice the exposure time is used.
• If the exposure time is 250 s or less, the measuring cycle is set to 500 s.
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Sensing setting] icon ( )
 Sensing settings window : [Measurement area 1] or [Measurement area 2] - [Exposure time]
1
Select the exposure mode from [Exposure
mode].
2
Set [Exposure time (maximum)] and [Control
edge].
Note
The exposure time control mode can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Setting Exposure Time Control Mode p.304
ZW User's Manual
Setting Sensing
79
Setting the Measurement Area
The measurement area can be limited, setting upper line and lower line of selected area.
The measurement object can be measured stabile, cutting out the area that the object does not exist.
When the measurement object is set to "Glass," measurement may not be performed correctly as
measurement will be influenced by reflection from the rear surface. If this happens, set the measurement area
of each measurement surface so that they can be correctly measured.
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Measurement
area
Upper line
Measuring range Set the measurement start position for the selected measurement area.
of Sensor Head When the window for the selected measurement area is open, the start
[mm]
position can also be edited by dragging the start line on the line bright monitor.
Lower line
Measuring range Set the measurement end position for the selected measurement area.
of Sensor Head When the window for the selected measurement area is open, the end
[mm]
position can also be edited by dragging the end line on the line bright monitor.
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Sensing setting] icon ( )
 Sensing settings window : [Measurement area 1] or [Measurement area 2]
1
Set the [Upper line] and [Lower line] values
at [Measurement area].
Important
• Ensure that the setting values for the measurement area satisfy the following relationship: [Start] < [End].
• To set the measurement area using any value by the above method at [Measurement area 2], set [Area follow] at
[Area follow settings] to [OFF].
80
Setting Sensing
ZW User's Manual
Automatically Following the Range of Measurement Area2
When 2 area mode is set, the measurement area 2 can be set automatically to measure the measurement
surface (Follow) , and the measurement area 2 range can be follow the measurement surface (Base)
movement.
This function is used when a few surface of vibrating object is measured stabile.
Base
Area2 upper line
Area2 lower line
Follow
4
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Area follow
settings
Area follow
OFF (default
value)
Area follow is not set. Select this to set any desired value.
Upper line
Adjust the measurement area of measurement area 2 to track the [Start]
setting value for measurement area 1.
Lower line
Adjust the measurement area of measurement area 2 to track the [End]
setting value of measurement area 1.
Upper line and
lower line
Adjust the measurement area of measurement area 2 to track the [Start] and
[End] setting value of measurement area 1.
Base
Edge1/Edge2/
Edge3/Edge4/
peak
(default value:
Edge1)
Select the measurement surface of measurement area 1 to be used as the
reference for automatic tracking.
The peak is the surface of all measurement surfaces having the highest
received light amount.
Follow
Edge1/Edge2/
Edge3/Edge4/
peak
(default value:
Edge2)
Select the measurement surface of measurement area 1 to be used as the
reference for automatic tracking.
The measurement area 2 is automatically set referenced to the surface
selected when [Area Teach] is clicked.
The peak is the surface of all measurement surfaces having the highest
received light amount.
Settings for Function
Item
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Sensing setting] icon ( )
 Sensing settings window : [Measurement area 2] - [Area follow setting]
ZW User's Manual
Setting Sensing
81
82
1
Set [Area follow].
2
Set [Reference surface] and [Following
surface].
3
Click [Area Teach].
The range applied to measure the measurement
surface (Follow) is automatically set as the
measurement area 2.
Setting Sensing
ZW User's Manual
4-2 Setting Measurement Items
What is a Measurement Item?
Obtain the waveform data based on the specified sensing condition, and calculate the height/thickness of up to
four surfaces included in the measuring range. Perform calculations using the output result of each task.
Count the measurement surface closest to the Sensor Head first.
Sensor head
4
Edge 1st
Edge 2nd
Edge 3rd
Edge 4th
Settings for Function
Measuring the Height
The setting for common height
measurements as shown in the
following diagram is registered
for TASK1 in advance. In such
a case, this setting is not required.
Set this item when measuring
the height of an object below
a transparent object as shown
in the following diagram.
Sensor head
Sensor head
Transparent
object
Edge 1st
Edge 1st
Edge 2nd
Measurement
range
Height
ZW User's Manual
Setting Measurement Items
83
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Height settings
Measurement
area
Area 1 (default value)/Area 2
The area targeted for measurement can be switched.
Measurement
surface
Edge1/Edge2/Edge3/Edge4/
peak (default value)
The measurement surface targeted for measurement can
be switched.
The peak is the surface of all measurement surfaces having
the highest received light amount.
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Measurement mode] - [Height]
1
Select the measurement area targeted for
measurement from [Measurement area].
2
Select the measurement surface targeted for
measurement from [Measurement surface].
Important
[Height] and [Edge1] are preset to TASK1 as the measurement item and measurement surface, respectively. To
measure the height in TASK2 to TASK4, set Edge1 first.
Note
Height measurement can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Measuring the Height p.305
84
Setting Measurement Items
ZW User's Manual
Measuring the Thickness
If you have glass of known thickness, scaling can be adjusted referenced to that glass so that transparent
objects can be measured more easily.
Sensor head
Transparent
object
Edge 1st
Thickness
Edge 2nd
Setting value
Description
Thickness
settings
Measurement
area
Area 1 (default value)/Area 2
The area targeted for measurement can be switched.
Measurement
surface 1
Edge1/Edge2/Edge3/Edge4/
peak (default value)
The measurement surface (top surface) targeted for
measurement can be switched.
The peak is the surface of all measurement surfaces having
the highest received light amount.
Measurement
surface 2
Edge1/Edge2/Edge3/Edge4/
peak (default value)
The measurement surface (rear surface) targeted for
measurement can be switched.
The peak is the surface of all measurement surfaces having
the highest received light amount.
Settings for Function
Setting item
4
Item
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Measurement mode] - [Thickness]
1
Select the measurement area targeted for
measurement from [Measurement area].
2
Select the measurement surface (top
surface) targeted for measurement from
[Measurement surface 1].
3
Select the measurement surface (rear
surface) targeted for measurement from
[Measurement surface 2].
Note
• Thickness measurement can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Measuring the Thickness p.306
• For the operation of the thickness scaling, refer to p.92.
ZW User's Manual
Setting Measurement Items
85
Performing Calculations
Perform calculations using the results calculated by the tasks. The calculation formula is mX+nY+K.
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Calculation
Parameter X
OFF (default value)/TASK1 to TASK4
The task to be calculated can be switched.
Parameter Y
OFF (default value)/TASK1 to TASK4
The task to be calculated can be switched.
Parameter K
-999.999999 to 999.999999
(default value: 0)
Set the offset value.
Parameter m
-0.0 to 10.0 (Default value: 0)
Set the coefficient value.
Parameter n
-0.0 to 10.0 (Default value: 0)
Set the coefficient value.
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Measurement mode] - [Calculation]
1
Select the task to be calculated from
[Parameter X] and [Parameter Y].
2
3
Select the offset value from [Parameter K].
Select the coefficient from [Parameter m]
and [Parameter n].
Note
Performing Calculations can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Calculating p.307
86
Setting Measurement Items
ZW User's Manual
4-3 Setting the Output Conditions
Setting Scaling
This setting is used when you want to correct any errors that are generated due to the installation status of the
Sensor Head, and display the corrected value on the main display as a measured value.
There are three types of setting: "auto scaling" ("1-point scaling" and "2-point scaling") that automatically sets
the correction value of a placed sensing object, "fixed scaling" that manually sets the correction value and
"thickness scaling" that automatically sets the correction value of a placed sensing object (transparent object).
Important
The "Zero reset" p.65 settings return to the default settings when scaling is set. If scaling is set, perform a zero reset
as necessary.
Performing Manual Scaling
Set the scaling by entering the correction value.
Setting item
Setting value
Description
OFF (default value)/ON
Set scaling ON/OFF.
-2.0000 to 2.0000
(default value: 1.0000)
Set the inclination of the sensor characteristics as a
coefficient.
Settings for Function
Scaling
Scaling
(Manual scaling)
Span
4
Item
Measurement value
(mm)
2.0
Workpiece
displacement
-2.0
Offset
-999.999999 to 999.999999
(default value: 0)
A fixed value is added to/subtracted from the measured
value.
Measurement value
(mm)
Workpiece
displacement
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
87
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Scaling]
1
2
Select [Scaling].
Enter the correction value to [Span] and
[Offset].
Note
Fixed scaling can also be executed by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Performing Manual Scaling p.314
Automatically Setting Scaling
Performing 1-point Scaling
Measurement is performed at one position, and offset values are set for that measured value.
The offset and increment/decrement inversion can be set.
Example: When displaying the distance to the sensing object
Display value
(mm)
Sensor head
4.5
Target display value:
Relative reference value
from the sensor with this
distance as the reference.
Measuring center
distance
Measured value:
4.5 mm
Default
display
0 mm
Measured value
(mm)
Sensing
object
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Actual scaling
(one point)
Set value
-999.999999 to 999.999999 [mm]
Correct the measured value, and set the value to display.
Scaling direction Inverse change
Forward change
88
4.5
Setting the Output Conditions
The FAR side becomes a plus value.
The NEAR side becomes a plus value.
ZW User's Manual
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Scaling]
1
2
Select [Scaling] ON.
3
Select [Actual scaling (one point)], and click
[Next >].
The [Scaling] popup menu display changes to
[1st point settings], and the current measured
value is displayed at [Current value].
4
Click [STOP] to fix the [Current value], set
[Set value] and click [Next >].
The [Scaling] popup menu display changes to
[Direction settings].
Click [Auto setting].
The [Scaling] popup menu appears.
4
Settings for Function
Note
The [Current value] display is refreshed at a 100
ms cycle. When [STOP] is clicked, refreshing of
the [Current value] display stops. Clicking the
[STOP] button again resumes display refreshing.
5
Set the change direction, and click [Next >].
The [Scaling] popup menu display changes to
[Confirm the scaling parameters], and the span
and offset values are displayed.
6
Click [OK].
Note
1-point scaling can also be executed by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Performing 1-point Scaling p.315
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
89
Performing 2-point Scaling
Measurement is performed at two positions, and offset values are set for those measured values.
Example: When correcting display values to match actual distances
Display value
(mm)
Point 2
4.0
3.8
-3.0
4.0
Point 1
Measured value
(mm)
-2.8
-3.0
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Actual scaling
(two points)
Set value
(1st point)
-999.999999 to 999.999999 [mm]
Correct the measured value of the 1st point, and set the
value to display.
Set value
(2nd point)
-999.999999 to 999.999999 [mm]
Correct the measured value of the 2nd point, and set the
value to display.
Important
Separate the two specified points by at least 1% of the rated measuring range for the connected Sensor Head.
For example, for the ZW-S40, the two measured points must be separated by at least 12 mm  0.01 = 0.12 mm as the
measuring range is 12 mm (± 6 mm).
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Scaling]
1
2
90
Select [Scaling] ON.
Click [Auto setting].
The [Scaling] popup menu appears.
Setting the Output Conditions
ZW User's Manual
3
Select [Actual scaling (two points)], and
click [Next >].
The [Scaling] popup menu display changes to
[1st point settings].
4
Set correction of the 1st point.
Click [STOP] to fix the [Current value], set
[Set value] and click [Next >].
The [Scaling] popup menu display changes to
[2nd point settings].
Note
In the same way, set correction of the 2nd
point.
The [Scaling] popup menu display changes to
[Direction settings]. When the change direction
is set and [Next>] is clicked, the [Scaling] popup
menu display changes to [Confirm the scaling
parameters], and the span and offset values are
displayed.
6
Click [OK].
Settings for Function
5
4
The current measured value is displayed at
[Current value], and is refreshed at 100 ms
cycles. When [STOP] is clicked, refreshing of the
[Current value] display stops. Clicking the
[STOP] button again resumes display refreshing.
Note
2-point scaling can also be executed by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Performing 2-point Scaling p.316
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
91
Performing Thickness Scaling
The thickness is measured at one position and offset values are set for that measured value.
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Thickness scaling
Setting value
-999.999999 to 999.999999 [mm]
Correct the measured value, and set the value to display.
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Scaling]
1
2
Select scaling ON/OFF from [Scaling].
3
Select [Thickness scaling], and click [Next
>].
The [Scaling] popup menu display changes to
[Thickness settings].
4
Click [STOP] to fix the [Current value], set
[Set value] and click [Next >].
The [Scaling] popup menu display changes to
[Confirm the scaling parameters], and the span
and offset values are displayed.
Click [Auto setting].
The [Scaling] popup menu appears.
Note
The current measured value is displayed at
[Current value], and is refreshed at 100 ms
cycles. When [STOP] is clicked, refreshing of the
[Current value] display stops. Clicking the
[STOP] button again resumes display refreshing.
5
Click [OK].
Note
Thickness scaling can also be executed by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Performing Thickness Scaling p.317
92
Setting the Output Conditions
ZW User's Manual
Setting Filters
Set the filter condition when filtering information obtained from the sensor before output.
The following types of filters can be set depending on purpose.
Displacement
Waveform when
filter is not set
Smooth
Spike-like changes are
removed.
Median filter
[MEDIAN]
Changes are smoothed
out.
Average filter
[AVE]
Displacement
Differ filter
[DIFFER]
0
Changes are extracted to
eliminate displacement value.
4
Settings for Function
Lowpass filter [LOPASS]
Sudden changes are removed.
Waveform when
filter is not set
Highpass filter [HIPASS]
Frequency filter
[FREQ]
Gradual changes are removed.
Three frequency variations
are mixed.
Bandpass filter [BDPASS]
A given change is detected.
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
93
Setting the Median Filter
The intermediate value of multiple sets of data can be output as the measurement result.
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Medial filter
Filter mode
OFF
(default value)
Median filter is not used.
LOW
Outputs the intermediate value of the last three measurements.
Middle
Outputs the intermediate value of the latest nine measurements.
HIGH
Outputs the intermediate value of the last 15 measurements.
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Filter]
1
Select how many of the latest intermediate
values to output from [Medial filter] - [Filter
mode].
Note
The median filter can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Setting the Median Filter p.310
94
Setting the Output Conditions
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Average Filter
Output measured data as the average value of a preset count.
Set this, for example, to ignore sudden changes in measured value.
Item
Setting item
Average number Average
of times
Setting value
Description
1/2/4/8/16/32/64/128/
256 (default value)/512/
1024/2048/4096 [times]
Switches the average count.
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Filter]
1
Select how many times the latest measured
values are to be averaged before output from
[Average number of times] - [Average].
4
Settings for Function
Important
When measurement is started, the measurement result is not updated and output until the measured values have
been sampled for the preset average count.
Note
The average filter can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Setting the Average Filter p.311
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
95
Setting the Frequency Filter
Set a filter to ignore or detect the changes in a specific frequency in the measured data.
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Frequency filter
Frequency filter
OFF (default value)
Frequency filter is not used.
Lowpass filter
Ignores frequency components larger than the specified
cut-off frequency. (Only gradual changes are captured.)
Highpass filter
Detects frequency components smaller than the specified
cut-off frequency. (Sudden changes are captured.)
Bandpass filter
Detects the frequency components between the cut-off
frequency (lower limit) and the cut-off frequency (upper
limit).
Cutoff frequency
0.001 (default value) to
999.999 [Hz]
Set this item when a low pass filter or a high pass filter is
selected.
Cutoff frequency (Upper
limit)
0.001 (default value) to
999.999 [Hz]
Set this item when a band pass filter is selected.
Cutoff frequency (Lower
limit)
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Filter]
1
Select the frequency filter type from
[Frequency filter].
2
Set the cutoff frequency from [Cutoff
frequency]. When a band pass filter is
selected, set [Cutoff frequency (upper limit)]
and [Cutoff frequency (lower limit)].
Note
The frequency filter can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Setting the Frequency Filter p.312
Important
• Set the cut-off frequency to a value smaller than one-half of the sampling frequency. Otherwise, the frequency filter
will not function properly. If a value outside of the appropriate range is set, the frequency filter will be applied with
the values included in the range.
• If the cut-off frequency values (upper/lower limits) are too close, the frequency bandwidth to be detected cannot be
properly detected.
• The sampling frequency is the inverse of the measuring cycle.
• The measuring cycle can be viewed in the "System Information" menu on the Sensor Controller.
Checking Information p.334
96
Setting the Output Conditions
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Differentiation Filter
Set this filter to detect sudden changes in measured values occurring within an extremely short time.
The differentiation filter detects changes in the measured value and current value before a comparison interval.
The time of this comparison interval is defined as the differential cycle. (Default value: OFF)
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Differentiation
filter
Filter mode
OFF (default value)/ON
Set the differentiation filter ON/OFF.
Differentiation cycle
1 (default value) to
5000 [ms]
Set the internal time for the measurement value to be
compared with the current value.
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Filter]
Present value
Settings for Function
Measuring cycle
4
Sampling
Comparison interval: 10 ms
Display value
(differentiation result)
1
Select differentiation filter ON/OFF from
[Differentiation filter] - [Filter mode].
2
Set the number of differential cycles from
[Differentiation cycle].
Note
The differentiation filter can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Setting the Differentiation Filter p.313
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
97
Setting Hold
Set the hold conditions of the measured value.
The hold function holds (retain) any value from the measured values during the specific time (sampling period),
such as the maximum or minimum value.
Setting the Hold Mode
Set the hold mode of the measured value.
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Hold
Hold mode
Peak
Holds the "maximum value" of the sampling period. Output changes after
sampling, and this state is held until the next sampling ends.
Output
Max.value
Current
measured value
Sampling period
Bottom
Holds the "minimum value" of the sampling period. Output changes after
sampling, and this state is held until the next sampling ends.
Current
measured value
Min.value
Output
Sampling period
Peak to Peak
Holds the "difference between the maximum value and the minimum value" of
the sampling period. Mainly select this when detecting vibration, for example.
Output changes after sampling, and this state is held until the next sampling
ends.
Max.value
Current
measured value
Output
(Max.value Min.value)
Min.value
Sampling period
Auto Peak
Holds the "maximum value" of the measurement result. The output changes
every time the maximum value is updated.
Output
(Max.value)
Current
measured value
Auto Bottom
Holds the "minimum value" of the measurement result. The output changes
every time the minimum value is updated.
Current
measured value
Output
(Min.value)
98
Setting the Output Conditions
ZW User's Manual
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Hold
Hold mode
Auto Peak to
Peak
Holds the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the
measurement result. The output changes every time the maximum or the
minimum value is updated.
Output
(Max.value - Min.value)
Current
measured value
0
Average
Holds the "average of the measured value" of the sampling period. Output
changes after sampling, and this state is held until the next sampling ends.
Output
(Average)
Current
measured value
Sampling period
Sampling
Holds the measured value the moment that control enters the sampling
period. Output changes at the start of sampling, and this state is held until the
next sampling is started.
4
Settings for Function
Output
Current
measured value
Sampling period
Through
(default value)
The hold function is not used. The measured value is always output.
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Hold]
1
Select the hold mode from [Hold mode].
Setting items for required parameters are
displayed depending on the selected hold
mode.
Setting Triggers p.101
Setting a Trigger Delay p.104
Note
The hold mode can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Setting the Hold Mode p.318
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
99
Hold clearing conditions
Held values can be cleared by the following operation.
• When FUN (adjustment) mode/RUN (operation) mode is switched
• When hold RESET is entered (32-pole extension connector,
key)
• Hold RESET command is entered.
(Example) Peak
The mode is switched between
the FUN mode and RUN mode
FUN mode
RUN mode
When RESET is executed
(32-pole extension connector/key input/command).
Sampling
When the hold value is reset,
the clamp level is output until
the next hold value is applied.
Sampling
Clamp level
Hold value
Measurement
value
(Example) Auto Peak
The mode is switched between
the FUN mode and RUN mode
FUN mode
RUN mode
When RESET is executed
(32-pole extension connector/key input/command).
Clamp level
Hold value
Measurement
value
Important
If an abnormal measured value is obtained during sampling, the hold value is cleared. To not clear the hold value even
if an abnormal measured value is obtained, set "KEEP" as the non-measurement setting.
Setting operation when measurement is not possible p.148
100
Setting the Output Conditions
ZW User's Manual
Setting Triggers
Set how measurement start to end timing is to be input.
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Trigger
Settings
Trigger method
External input
Enter the trigger for the start of sampling in "TIMING input" for the 32-pole
terminal block.
The period that the signal input to "TIMING input" is ON is the sampling
period.
Timing input
ON
OFF
Sampling period
Important
When a delay time is set, input OFF and sampling period end are
not synchronized. End timing is after the specified sampling period
has elapsed.
Selfup trigger
Settings for Function
Self-trigger
level
4
The period in which the measured value exceeds the preset self-trigger level
is taken to be the sampling period.
Hold measurement can be performed without a synchronous input.
Hysteresis width
(for self-trigger)
Measured
value
Sampling period
Sampling period
Action point
Return point
Important
When a delay time is set, the timing that the measured value falls
below the self-trigger level and the sampling period end are not
synchronized. End timing is after the sampling period has elapsed.
Selfdown trigger
The period in which the measured value falls below the preset self-trigger
level is taken to be the sampling period.
Hold measurement can be performed without a synchronous input.
Measured
value
Hysteresis width
(for self-trigger)
Self-trigger
level
Action point
Return point
Sampling period
Important
When a delay time is set, the timing that the measured value
exceeds the self-trigger level and the sampling period end are not
synchronized. End timing is after the sampling period has elapsed.
Trigger level
-999.999999 to 999.999999 Set the self-trigger level when [SELF-UP] or [SELF-DOWN] are selected at
[mm]
[Trigger method].
(default value: 0)
Trigger
hysteresis
0 to 999.999999 [mm]
(default value: 0.05% of
measuring range)
ZW User's Manual
Set the hysteresis width for the self-trigger when [SELF-UP] or [SELFDOWN] are selected at [Trigger method].
Setting the Output Conditions
101
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Hold]
1
Set the hold mode.
Setting the Hold Mode p.98
2
Select the trigger method from [Trigger
settings] - [Trigger method].
3
Enter [Trigger level] and [Trigger hysteresis]
when [Selfup trigger] or [Selfdown trigger]
are selected at [Trigger method].
Important
Set "Trigger hysteresis" according to the fluctuation of the measured value near the trigger level. Hysteresis is applied
simultaneously with start of measurement to prevent chattering of the TIMING input.
Note
The trigger can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Setting Triggers p.319
102
Setting the Output Conditions
ZW User's Manual
Performing Hold with a Key Input
The TIMING/RESET inputs can be held on the Sensor Controller by setting as follows.
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Sensor settings
Timing/Reset key input
OFF (default value)/ON
Enables TIMING and RESET key inputs from the
Sensor Controller.
Setting the Hold Mode p.98
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
1
: [System] (double-click)
: [Sensor Settings] icon (
)
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
2
Select ON/OFF from [Key input mode(Timing
and Reset)].
4
Settings for Function
Note
The timing/reset key input can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Performing Hold with a Key Input p.320
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
103
Setting a Trigger Delay
Set this to ignore measure values following TIMING input to avoid the influence of bounding or mechanical
vibration when a device is started up.
The delay time (the delay between timing input and the start of sampling) and the sampling time can be set.
ON
TIMING input
OFF
Delay time
Sampling time
Sampling period
Measured value
Measured values in this time period
is included in the sampling.
Item
Setting item
Trigger delay
Setting value
Description
Trigger delay mode
OFF (default value)/ON
Turns the trigger delay ON/OFF.
Delay time
1 (default value) to 5,000
[ms]
Set the time from TIMING input ON up to start of sampling.
Sampling time
1 to 5,000 [ms]
(default value: 100ms)
Set to period during which sampling is to be performed.
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Hold]
1
Set the hold mode and trigger.
Setting the Hold Mode p.98
Setting Triggers p.101
2
Select ON/OFF from [Trigger delay] - [Trigger
delay mode].
3
Enter [Delay time] and [Sampling time].
Important
Set so that the "delay time + sampling time" is
shorter than the TIMING input interval. When the
TIMING input turns ON again before the "delay
time + sampling time" elapses, the TIMING input
that is input later is ignored and is not reflected in
sampling.
Note
The trigger delay can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Setting a Trigger Delay p.321
104
Setting the Output Conditions
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Zero Reset
Setting the Status
Set enable/disable of the zero reset function.
Important
The status is set for each task.
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Zero reset]
1
Select ON/OFF from [Status].
4
Settings for Function
Note
The status can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Setting the Status p.322
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
105
Setting the Offset
Set this item to set the reference value by a zero reset to a value other than zero.
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Zero reset
Offset
-999.999999 to 999.999999 [mm]
(default value: 0)
Set the offset value.
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Zero reset]
1
Set [Status] to ON.
Setting the Status p.105
Important
Offset can be set only when [Status] is set to ON.
2
Enter an offset value at [Zero reset] - [Offset].
Note
The offset can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Setting the Offset p.323
106
Setting the Output Conditions
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Zero Reset Type
Set the zero reset type.
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Zero reset
Zero reset type
Real value
Sets the measured value when a zero reset is executed to zero.
Sensor head
Measurement of height
from reference surface
Zero reset
Hold value
Reference A
Sets the measured value (hold value) when a zero reset is executed to zero.
This is enabled when hold measurement is performed.
4
Settings for Function
Sensor head
Measurement of height
from reference surface
Hold A
(reference)
Zero reset
Direction of movement
 Explorer pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Task Settings] icon ( )
 Task Settings window : [Zero reset]
1
Set [Status] to ON.
Setting the Status p.105
Important
The zero reset type can be set only when [Status]
is set to ON.
2
Select the zero reset type from [Type].
Note
The zero reset type can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Setting the Zero Reset Mode p.324
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
107
Setting the Zero Reset Memory
Select whether or not to hold the measured value zero reset level even if the power is turned OFF.
As shown in the figure below, use the zero reset memory still set to "OFF" when using this function to perform
a zero reset at each measurement.
Example: When the level difference of a measurement target is measured
Sensor head
This step is
measured.
Zero reset
executed.
Zero reset
executed.
Zero reset
executed.
Direction of movement
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Sensor settings
Zero reset memory
OFF (default
value)
The zero reset is canceled when the power is turned OFF.
ON
The zero reset level is held even if the power is turned OFF.
Important
• When zero reset memory is set to "ON", the zero reset is written to EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Sensor
Controller each time that a zero reset is performed. The EEPROM can be written a maximum of 1,000,000 times.
Pay attention to the maximum number of writing allowed when this is set to "ON."
• Even if zero reset memory is disabled, the zero reset level will be held also when the setting is saved. In this
instance, the zero reset will also be continued after a restart.
108
Setting the Output Conditions
ZW User's Manual
1
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
2
: [System] (double-click)
: [Sensor Settings] icon (
)
Select ON/OFF from [Zero-Reset Memory
mode].
4
Note
Settings for Function
The zero reset mode can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Setting the Zero Reset Memory p.325
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
109
4-4 Setting the Banks
Changing the Bank Mode
Select the bank contents to be obtained from the settings or judgment value.
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Sensor settings
Bank mode
Normal (default
value)
Sensing setting, measurement setting and I/O setting that are set in the FUN
(adjustment) mode are regarded as bank data. The number of banks is up to
eight.
Judgement
value
Only the threshold value under the measurement setting is regarded as bank
data. The number of banks increases up to 32.
1
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
2
: [System] (double-click)
: [Sensor Settings] icon (
)
Select the bank mode from [Bank mode].
Note
The bank mode can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Changing the Bank Mode p.327
110
Setting the Banks
ZW User's Manual
Copying the Bank/System Settings
Copy the selected bank setting to another bank.
Also, copy ZW system settings to a different ZW.
1
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
Copy the bank data or system data.
Select the copy source bank data or system
data from the explorer pane, and select [Copy]
from the right-click menu.
3
Paste the bank data or system data
Select the copy destination bank data or system
data from the explorer pane, and select [Paste]
from the right-click menu.
4
2
Settings for Function
Note
The bank settings can also be copied by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Copying the Bank Settings p.328
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Banks
111
Saving the Bank/System Settings
Save the bank/system settings to the Sensor Controller.
Important
• The settings of all banks are saved regardless of the currently selected bank number.
• After you have made or changed settings, be sure to save the setup data. All settings will be deleted if you turn the
power OFF without saving the data.
1
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
 Explorer pane
: [(ZW model name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Online] icon ( )
 Online setting window : [Save data]
2
Select [Save data (Sensor internal memory)].
Bank/system settings are saved to Sensor
internal memory.
Note
• Settings can also be saved by selecting and right-clicking a [(ZW model)] from the explorer pane and selecting
"Save settings" from the right-click menu.
• The bank/system settings can also be saved by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Saving the Bank/System Settings p.329
112
Setting the Banks
ZW User's Manual
Clearing the Bank Settings
Select a bank and initialize its settings.
1
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
2
Select the bank data.
Select the bank data from the explorer pane,
and select [Initialize] from the right-click menu.
4
Note
Settings for Function
The bank settings can also be cleared by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Initializing Settings p.337
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Banks
113
4-5 Setting the System
Display/set the system environment.
Checking Information
Displays the information of the Sensor Controller and Sensor Head.
Item
Displayed item
General settings Sensor
information
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
1
Setting value
Description
Name
Displays the name of the Sensor Controller
Sensor controller model
Displays the model information of the Sensor Controller.
Software Version
Displays the version information of the software of the Sensor
Controller.
Sensor head model
Displays the model information of the Sensor Head.
Sensor serial No.
Displays the serial No. of the Sensor Head.
MAC address
Displays the MAC address that is set.
: [(ZW model name)] (double click)
: [General Settings] icon ( )
The Edit pane main pane is displayed in the
Edit pane.
You can check the above information under
[General settings] - [Sensor information].
Note
In addition to the above information, the currently set measuring cycle can be checked by the operating keys on the
Sensor Controller.
Checking Information p.334
114
Setting the System
ZW User's Manual
Making Sensor Settings
Setting the Key Lock
This function disables all key inputs on the Sensor Controller.
Once the key lock is set, no key input will be accepted until the lock is released. This function is useful for
preventing inadvertent changes to settings.
Item
Displayed item
Setting value
Description
Sensor settings
Key lock
OFF (default value)
Cancels the key lock function.
ON
Turns the key lock function ON.
Important
Note that, moving to the key lock setting menu or moving between menu hierarchies are possible even when the key
lock function is ON by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
4
1
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
2
: [System] (double-click)
: [Sensor Settings] icon (
Settings for Function
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
)
Select ON/OFF from [Key lock].
Note
The key lock can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Setting the Key Lock p.335
ZW User's Manual
Setting the System
115
Setting the Number of Digits Displayed Past the Decimal Point
Set the number of digits displayed past the decimal point for when numerical values are displayed on the main
display and sub-display of the Sensor Controller.
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Sensor settings
The number of decimal
places
0 to 5 Digit
(default value: 4 digits)
Set the number of digits displayed past the decimal point for
when numerical values are displayed on the Sensor
Controller.
1
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
2
: [System] (double-click)
: [Sensor Settings] icon (
)
Select the number of digits displayed past
the decimal point from [The number of
decimal places].
You can select from the above setting values.
Initializing Settings
Returns all banks/system settings to their default settings.
Important
• The settings of all banks/system settings are returned to the default settings regardless of the currently selected
bank number.
• Parameters for which the default values are decided by the Sensor Head measuring range (HYSTERESIS,
TRIGGER HYSTERESIS, HIGH THRESHOLD, LOW THRESHOLD) are all set to the factory default value "0".
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
1
116
: [(ZW model name)] (double click)
: [Tool] icon ( )
Click [Sensor setup] - [Initialize sensor].
Initialization is executed.
Setting the System
ZW User's Manual
Note
• Settings can also be initialized by selecting and right-clicking a [(ZW model)] option from the explorer pane and
selecting "Initialize sensor" from the right-click menu.
• Settings can also be initialized by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Initializing Settings p.337
4
Settings for Function
ZW User's Manual
Setting the System
117
MEMO
118
Setting the System
ZW User's Manual
Convenient Functions
5-1 Displaying measured values in graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5-2 Saving measured values in a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5-3 Displaying saved measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5-4 Performing internal logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5-5 Storing the light reception wave form in a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5
5-6 Recovering calibration ROM data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Convenient Functions
5-7 Printing the contents of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
5-8 Controll input signal with PC tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
5-1 Displaying measured values in graphs
The measured values can be displayed in graphs.
Important
This function can only be used with project of the displacement sensor (ZW).
With project of the controller (NJ), you can use the "Data trace" function to display graphs of measured values.
 Explorer pane
: [(ZW model name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Online] icon ( )
 Online setting window : [Trend Monitor]
1
Click [Trend Monitor] - [Start monitor].
The Trend Monitor window starts up.
2
Add the data to monitor the trend for.
Add the data to monitor the trend for to the list.
Click the add target data icon (
).
Click the logging target data display icon (
)
to add to the list of data to be logged.
A new target data line is added.
Note
To delete target data from the list, select the line with the data to be deleted, then click the [Delete] or press
the [Delete] key.
120
Displaying measured values in graphs
ZW User's Manual
3
Select data to monitor the trend for.
Set data to monitor the trend for.
The types of data that can be set are as follows.
4
Item
Setting item
Description
Target data
TASK1
TASK1 measurement results
TASK2
TASK2 measurement results
TASK3
TASK3 measurement results
TASK4
TASK4 measurement results
TIMING
TIMING input signal (parallel I/O)
ZERO
ZERO input signal (parallel I/O)
BUSY
BUSY output signal (parallel I/O)
ENABLE
ENABLE output signal (parallel I/O)
HIGH
HIGH output signal (parallel I/O)
PASS
PASS output signal (parallel I/O)
LOW
LOW output signal (parallel I/O)
Set the logging sampling interval.
Set the logging sampling interval for the target data.
Item
Setting item
Range
Description
Sampling setting
Data interval
0 to 65535
Set the sampling interval for the target data.
5
Convenient Functions
5
Click the Start icon (
) to start the sampling.
When the sampling starts, the sampled data is displayed in the graph.
Note
You can also specify the timing (start trigger, end trigger) for the graph display.
6
Click the End icon (
) to end the sampling.
When the sampling ends, the graph display stops too.
ZW User's Manual
Displaying measured values in graphs
121
Specifying the sampling start and end conditions
You can specify the conditions for starting and ending sampling.
1
Check the Trigger start conditions/Trigger end conditions checkbox.
2
Select the trigger condition.
Item
Setting item
Range
Description
Sampling setting
Trigger start
conditions
Input and output
Specify parallel I/O (TIMING, ZERO, BUSY, ENABLE,
HIGH, PASS, LOW) as the trigger condition.
Data slope
Sets the change in the measured values for TASK1-4 as
the start condition. Sets the trigger level. When the
measured value rises above this value or falls below it, the
start trigger is issued.
Data window (In)
Sets the change in the measured values for TASK1-4 as
the start condition. When the measured value is inside the
range, the start trigger is issued.
Data window (Out)
Sets the change in the measured values for TASK1-4 as
the start condition. When the measured value is outside
the range, the start trigger is issued.
Input and output
Specify parallel I/O (TIMING, ZERO, BUSY, ENABLE,
HIGH, PASS, LOW) as the trigger condition.
Data slope
Sets the change in the measured values for TASK1-4 as
the start condition. Sets the trigger level. When the
measured value rises above this value or falls below it, the
end trigger is issued.
Data window (In)
Sets the change in the measured values for TASK1-4 as
the start condition. When the measured value is in the
range, the end trigger is issued.
Data window (Out)
Sets the change in the measured values for TASK1-4 as
the start condition. When the measured value is outside
the range, the end trigger is issued.
Number of data
The sampling data is counted from when the start
condition is met and when the specified number of data
points have been sampled, the end trigger is issued.
Trigger end
conditions
3
Select the trigger target.
Item
Setting item
Range
Description
Trigger target
I/O
TIMING
TIMING input signal (parallel I/O)
ZERO
ZERO input signal (parallel I/O)
BUSY
BUSY output signal (parallel I/O)
ENABLE
ENABLE output signal (parallel I/O)
HIGH
HIGH output signal (parallel I/O)
PASS
PASS output signal (parallel I/O)
Data slope
Data window (in)
Data window (out)
122
Displaying measured values in graphs
LOW
LOW output signal (parallel I/O)
TASK1
TASK1 measurement results
TASK2
TASK2 measurement results
TASK3
TASK3 measurement results
TASK4
TASK4 measurement results
ZW User's Manual
4
Set the trigger condition.
• When the trigger target is "Data slope"
Item
Setting item
Trigger condition Condition
Judgment
Range
Description
=
When the measurement results are the same value as the
judgment value, the trigger condition is considered to have
been met.

When the measurement results are a different value from
the judgment value, the trigger condition is considered to
have been met.
>
When the measurement results are greater than the
judgment value, the trigger condition is considered to have
been met.

When the measurement results are greater than or equal to
the judgment value, the trigger condition is considered to
have been met.
<
When the measurement results are less than the judgment
value, the trigger condition is considered to have been met.

When the measurement results are less than or equal to
the judgment value, the trigger condition is considered to
have been met.
-999.999999 to
999.999999 mm
This is the judgment value for the measurement results.
• When the trigger target is "Data window (In)"
5
Setting item
Range
Description
Trigger condition Judgment value
1
-999.999999 to
999.999999 [mm]
When the measurement results are greater than or equal to
judgment value 1 and less than or equal to judgment value
2, the trigger condition is considered to have been met.
Judgment value
2
-999.999999 to
999.999999 [mm]
Convenient Functions
Item
• When the trigger target is "Data window (out)"
Item
Setting item
Range
Description
Trigger condition Judgment value
1
-999.999999 to
999.999999 [mm]
When the measurement results are less than judgment
value 1 or greater than judgment value 2, the trigger
condition is considered to have been met.
Judgment value
2
-999.999999 to
999.999999 [mm]
• When the trigger target is "Input and output"
Item
Setting item
Trigger condition Condition
ZW User's Manual
Range
Description
TRUE (rising)
When the I/O signal rises, the trigger condition is
considered to have been met.
False (falling)
When the I/O signal falls, the trigger condition is considered
to have been met.
Displaying measured values in graphs
123
Starting and ending sampling before and after the trigger condition is met
You can adjust how long to start or end the sampling before or after the condition for starting and ending
sampling is met.
Measurement data satisfied the start condition trigger
Measurement value
Sampling interval
Sampling start position A
Sampling start position B
• Sampling start position A
To start sampling before the time when the trigger start condition is met, input a negative value for the delay
time.
• Sampling start position B
To end sampling after the time when the trigger end condition is met, input a positive value for the delay time.
1
Input the delay time.
Item
Setting item
Trigger condition Delay time
124
Range
Description
-999.999999 to
999.999999 ms
The sampling starts or ends at the time shifted by the set
time from when the trigger condition is met.
Displaying measured values in graphs
ZW User's Manual
5-2 Saving measured values in a file
Data sampled with the trend monitor can be exported and imported as a CSV format file.
Outputting the results of sampling as a file
Sampled measured values can be saved as a CSV format file.
A file is prepared each time the trigger condition is met.
1
2
Check the checkbox for the save destination.
Set the save condition.
Item
Setting item
File settings
Logging mode
Range
Description
Save in

This is the folder to save the files in.
File prefix

This is the prefix for the name of the file saved.
Samples per file 100 to 10000000
This is the number of samples saved in one file. If more
samples than this set number are taken, a new file is
prepared.
Max sampling
time
This indicates the upper limit on the interval for saving a file.
0:0:0 to 24:59:59
Convenient Functions
When the trigger end condition is met, sampling stops.
Sampling does not stop until you press the End button.
Each time the trigger start condition is met, a new file is
prepared and saved.
5
Single
Continuous
Exporting the results of sampling
Sampled measured values can be exported as a CSV format file.
Item
Output items
Description
LoggingMode
Single
Continuous
Indicates the sampling mode.
Single or continuous
SamplePeriod
1 to 9999
Indicates the sampling interval.
TriggerStart
True
False
Indicates whether the trigger start condition is "Enabled" or
"Disabled".
TriggerStartType
IO
DataSlope
DataWindowIn
DataWindowOut
DataSize
Indicates the trigger start condition.
IO: I/O result
DataSlope: Data slope
DataWindowIn: Data window (in)
DataWindowOut: Data window (out)
ZW User's Manual
Saving measured values in a file
125
126
Item
Output items
Description
TriggerStartObject
TASK1
TASK2
TASK3
TASK4
TIMING
ZERO
BUSY
ENABLE
HIGH
PASS
LOW
Indicates the target data for the trigger start condition.
TriggerStartConditions
EqualTo
NotEqualTo
AndMore
MoreThan
LessThan
AndLess
True (rising)
False (falling)
Indicates the trigger start condition.
EqualTo: =
NotEqualTo: 
AndMore: 
MoreThan: >
LessThan: <
AndLess: 
True: Rising
False: Falling
TriggerStartValue1
-999.999999 to 999.999999 mm
Indicates the judgment value for the trigger start condition.
For data window (in/out), indicates the lower limit.
TriggerStartValue2
-999.999999 to 999.999999 mm
Indicates the judgment value for the trigger start condition.
For data window (in/out), indicates the upper limit.
TriggerStartDelay
-999.999999 to 999.999999 mm
Indicates the delay time for the trigger start condition.
TriggerEnd
True
False
Indicates whether the trigger end condition is "Enabled" or
"Disabled".
TriggerEndType
IO
DataSlope
DataWindowIn
DataWindowOut
DataSize
Indicates the trigger end condition.
IO: I/O result
DataSlope: Data slope
DataWindowIn: Data window (in)
DataWindowOut: Data window (out)
DataSize: Number of data points
TriggerEndObject
TASK1
TASK2
TASK3
TASK4
TIMING
ZERO
BUSY
ENABLE
HIGH
PASS
LOW
Indicates the target data for the trigger end condition.
TriggerEndConditions
EqualTo
NotEqualTo
AndMore
MoreThan
LessThan
AndLess
True (rising)
False (falling)
Indicates the trigger end condition.
EqualTo: =
NotEqualTo: 
AndMore: 
MoreThan: >
LessThan: <
AndLess: 
True: Rising
False: Falling
TriggerEndValue1
-999.999999 to 999.999999 mm
Indicates the judgment value for the trigger end condition.
For data window (in/out), indicates the lower limit.
TriggerEndValue2
-999.999999 to 999.999999 mm
Indicates the judgment value for the trigger end condition.
For data window (in/out), indicates the upper limit.
TriggerEndDelay
-999.999999 to 999.999999 mm
Indicates the delay time for the trigger end condition.
MaxSamplesPerFile
1 to 999999999
Indicates the number of samples in one file.
TargetDirectory
Indicates where the file is stored.
FilePrefix
Indicates the prefix.
Saving measured values in a file
ZW User's Manual
 Explorer pane
: [(ZW model name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Online] icon ( )
 Online setting window : [Trend Monitor]
1
Select [Trend Monitor].
The Trend Monitor window starts up.
2
Execute the sampling.
Note
6-1 Parallel I/O connection p.138
3
After sampling execution, click the export icon (
4
Set the name of the export file.
The data is output in the following format.
LoggingMode
).
Single
SamplePeriod
0:0:1:0:0
TriggerStart
True
TriggerStartType
DataSlope
TriggerStartObject
TASK1
1.1
Convenient Functions
EqualTo
TriggerStartValue1
5
TriggerStartConditions
TriggerStartValue2
TriggerStartDelay
0
TriggerEnd
True
TriggerEndType
DataWindowIn
TriggerEndObject
TASK2
TriggerEndConditions
TriggerEndValue1
-0.5
TriggerEndValue2
0.5
TriggerEndDelay
0
ExternalFileStorage
FALSE
MaxSamplesPerFile
4500
TargetDirectory
C:\Omron\Data\DataTrace\
FilePrefix
Index
(DataName1)
(DataName2)
1
1.21314
1.21314
2
1.22098
1.22098
3
0.12334
0.12334
4
-0.1211
-0.1211
5
-1.23456
-1.23456
6
-1.22222
-1.22222
ZW User's Manual
Saving measured values in a file
127
5-3 Displaying saved measured values
You can import a file to which measured values were exported and display those sampling results as a graph.
 Explorer pane
: [(ZW model name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Online] icon ( )
 Online setting window : [Trend Monitor]
128
1
Select [Trend Monitor].
The Trend Monitor window starts up.
2
Click the import icon (
3
Select the file to import.
The file is imported and a graph displayed.
).
Displaying saved measured values
ZW User's Manual
5-4 Performing internal logging
Up to 12,800 x 4tasks measured data can be logged in the Sensor Controller's internal memory.
Item
Output items
Description
LoggingMode
Internal
Indicates the internal logging.
SamplePeriod
1 to 99999
Indicates the storage interval.
 Explorer pane
: [(ZW model name)] (double click)
 Edit pane
: [Online] icon ( )
 Online setting window : [Internal Logging]
1
Setting item
Range
Description
Data logging
conditions
Preservation
intervals
1 to 99999
Set the data storage interval.
If “1” is set , all measured data is stored, and “2” is set, one
measurement value is stored every two measurement.
Logging data
count
1 to 12800
Set the number of data points to store for each TASK.
TASK1
OFF/ON
Set whether to store the measurement results for TASK 1.
TASK2
OFF/ON
Set whether to store the measurement results for TASK 2.
TASK3
OFF/ON
Set whether to store the measurement results for TASK 3.
TASK4
OFF/ON
Set whether to store the measurement results for TASK 4.
Convenient Functions
Item
5
2
Set the logging conditions.
Select the [Preservation interval], [logging data
count], and the TASK to store the data for.
Click the [Logging start] button to start
internal logging.
A confirmation message is displayed. Click
[Yes] to start internal logging.
Note
Starting internal logging can also be executed by No-protocol communications or parallel I/O.
ZW User's Manual
Performing internal logging
129
3
After internal logging ends, click the [Save to
file (Sensor  PC)] to output the data to a
file.
A CSV format file in the following format is
output.
LoggingMode
130
Internal
SamplePeriod
1
Index
Task1
Task2
Task3
Task4
0
1.21314
1.21314
1.21314
1.21314
1
1.22098
1.22098
1.22098
1.22098
2
0.12334
0.12334
0.12334
0.12334
3
-0.1211
-0.1211
-0.1211
-0.1211
4
-1.23456
-1.23456
-1.23456
-1.23456
5
-1.22222
-1.22222
-1.22222
-1.22222
Performing internal logging
ZW User's Manual
5-5 Storing the light reception wave form in a file
The light reception wave form can be stored in a file as a record of the measurement state.
Item
Output items
Description
RegionNo
Area1 / Area2
Indicates the measurement area.
Area1: Measurement Area 1 Area2: Measurement Area 2
StartPosition
0 to 255
Indicates the start position for the measurement area.
EndPosition
0 to 255
Indicates the end position for the measurement area.
 Explorer pane
1
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
Select the line bright storage icon (
).
Input the name of the file to export to.
A CSV format file in the following format is
output.
Area1
StartPosition
(Display area start point)
EndPosition
(Display area end point)
Position
Value
0
(Amount of light received 0)
1
(Amount of light received 1)
2
(Amount of light received 2)
3
(Amount of light received 3)
:
:
254
(Amount of light received 254)
255
(Amount of light received 255)
ZW User's Manual
Convenient Functions
RegionNo
5
• For Area 1 mode
Storing the light reception wave form in a file
131
• For Area 2 mode
132
RegionNo
Area1
Area2
StartPosition
(Display area start point)
(Display area start point)
EndPosition
(Display area end point)
(Display area end point)
Position
Value
Value
0
(Amount of light received 0)
(Amount of light received 0)
1
(Amount of light received 1)
(Amount of light received 1)
2
(Amount of light received 2)
(Amount of light received 2)
3
(Amount of light received 3)
(Amount of light received 3)
:
:
:
254
(Amount of light received 254)
(Amount of light received 254)
255
(Amount of light received 255)
(Amount of light received 255)
Storing the light reception wave form in a file
ZW User's Manual
5-6 Recovering calibration ROM data
If an abnormality occurs in the sensor's calibration ROM, you can recover the backed up calibration ROM data
into the sensor.
1
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
2
: [Device Group] | [(Sensor Name)] (double click)
: [Tool] icon ( )
Click the [ROM recovery] in [Sensor setup].
Select the calibration ROM backup data file.
5
Convenient Functions
Important
The calibration ROM data is different for each sensor serial number. Select the backup file that matches the sensor
serial number. Measurement will not be correct unless they match.
ZW User's Manual
Recovering calibration ROM data
133
5-7 Printing the contents of settings
You can print the contents of bank data and system data settings.
Item
Setting item
Mode
Description
Print
Target data
All information
The sensor information, bank group data, and system data are all
printed.
Sensor information
The sensor information is printed.
Bank number
 Explorer pane
Bank Group
The bank group data (Banks 1 through 8) is printed.
Bank
The specified bank data is printed.
System
The system data is printed.
1 to 8
If bank data is selected as target data, specify the bank number to
print the data for.
: [Device Group] | [(Sensor Name)] (right-click)
1
Select [Print].
The [Print] window is displayed on the Edit pane.
2
Select the data to print.
From [Target data], select the data to print.
Select and expand the parameters to print.
If you click [Expand All], all the parameters are
expanded.
To print the default values as well, check the
[Display Default Values] checkbox.
Important
Only the expanded parameters are printed.
134
Printing the contents of settings
ZW User's Manual
5-8 Controll input signal with PC tool
Following input signal can be controlled with PC tool.
• LED-OFF
• TIMING
• RESET
• ZERO
Explorer pane
 Edit pane
: [Bank] | [(Bank data Name)] (double click)
: [I/O input]
1
Select ON from [I/O input].
2
If each button is clicked, the Sensor
Controller is controlled as corresponding
input signal is turned ON.
While the button is clicked , corresponding input
signal is status ON.
If the button is clicked again, the input signal is
turned OFF.
LED-OFF
The measurement LED is turned OFF.
TIMING
The TIMING input is turned ON.
RESET
The RESET input is turned ON.
ZERO
The ZERO input is turned ON.
ZW User's Manual
Convenient Functions
Effect
5
Button
Controll input signal with PC tool
135
MEMO
136
Controll input signal with PC tool
ZW User's Manual
Communications with External Devices
6-1 Parallel I/O connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6-2 EtherCAT Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
6-3 EtherNet/IP Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
6-4 No-protocol Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
6
Communications with External Devices
6-1 Parallel I/O connection
I/O Signal Functions
The following describes the functions of I/O signals.
Analog Output Terminals
Analog output
Name
Description
Analog voltage output
This outputs the measured value from -10 V to +10 V as the voltage value.
When measurement not possible: Approx. 10.8V (default value, can be selected by user)
At alarm: Approx. 10.8V
Analog current output
This outputs the measured value, from 4 mA to 20 mA as the current value.
When measurement not possible: Approx. 21 mA (default value, can be selected by user)
At alarm: Approx. 21 mA
32-pole expansion connector
Judgment output
Name
Description
HIGH output
Judgment result HIGH (HIGH threshold value < measured value) is output.
PASS Output
Judgment result PASS (LOW threshold value  measured value  HIGH threshold value) is
output.
LOW output
Judgment result LOW (LOW threshold value > measured value) is output.
ALARM output
Name
Description
ALARM output
This turns ON when there is a system error.
BUSY output
Name
Description
BUSY output
This turns ON during sampling with the hold function enabled.
It allows you to check whether or not the self-trigger is functioning correctly.
It also turns ON during bank switching.
ENABLE output
138
Name
Description
ENABLE output
This turns ON when the sensor is ready for measurement.
This output is interlocked with the ENABLE indicator.
Parallel I/O connection
ZW User's Manual
ZERO input
Name
Description
ZERO input
This is used to execute and clear a zero reset.
RESET input
Name
Description
RESET input
This resets all executing measurements and outputs.
While a RESET is being input, judgment output conforms to the non-measurement setting.
If this RESET input switches ON while the hold function is used, the state in effect before the
hold function was set will be restored.
TIMING input
Name
Description
TIMING input
This timing input is for signal input from external devices. Use it for hold function timing.
LED OFF input
Name
Description
LED OFF input
Turn off the measurement LED.
While LED OFF is being input, the analog output and judgment output conform to the nonmeasurement setting.
LOGGING input
Description
LOGGING input
This is used to start internal logging.
6
Name
Communications with External Devices
ZW User's Manual
Parallel I/O connection
139
Settings for Analog Output
The following describes the settings for outputting the current measurement results from the analog output of
the analog output terminal block.
Setting the analog output destination
With analog output, the measurement results can be output converted to a current from 4 to 20 mA or a voltage
from -10 to +10 V.
Selects which to output, the current or the voltage.
Important
The same output destination is set for all banks. The output destination cannot be set separately for individual banks.
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Sensor settings
Analog output
Voltage output
(default value)
Voltage output
Current output
Current output
1
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
2
: [Device Group] | [(Sensor Name)] | [System]
[System Data] (double-click)
: [Sensor settings] icon ( )
Select the output destination from [Analog
output].
Note
The analog output destination can also be set with key operations on the Sensor Controller.
Setting the analog output destination p.338
140
Parallel I/O connection
ZW User's Manual
Assigning Analog Output
Set the task for which to output the results as analog.
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Analog output
Output object
None/TASK1/TASK2/TASK3/
TASK4
Select the task to output as analog.
1
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
 I/O Setting Screen
2
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
: [I/O Settings] icon ( )
: [Analog output]
Select the task from [Output object].
You can select from the above setting values.
None/TASK1/TASK2/TASK3/TASK4
6
Communications with External Devices
Note
Analog output can also be assigned with key operations on the Sensor Controller.
Assigning Analog Output p.339
ZW User's Manual
Parallel I/O connection
141
Setting Monitor Focus
With analog output, the relationship between the output value and measured value to be displayed can be set
as desired to convert the measurement result to 4 to 20 mA current or -10 to +10 V voltage before output.
Set the focus to match the connected external device.
The output range can be set by entering the output value for the current or voltage values for any two points.
Example: When setting 4 mA output (1st point) for measured value of 0 mm and 20 mA output for measured
value of 6 mm (2nd point) (current output)
Output current
(mA)
20
Point 2
4
0
Point 1
0
Measured value
(mm)
6
Important
Separate the two specified points by at least 1% of the rated measuring range of the connected Sensor Head or 40
m.
For example, for the ZW-S40, the two measured points must be separated by at least 12 mm × 0.01 = 0.12 mm as the
measuring range is 12 mm ( 6 mm).
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Monitor
focus
Monitor focus
ON/OFF (default value)
Sets monitor focus ON/OFF.
-999.999999 to
-3.000000 (default value) to
999.999999 [mm]
Sets the reference measured value for output.
Point1
Point2
Distance
value
Current
4 (default value) to 20 [mA]
output value
When the analog output destination is set to current,
sets the current to be output when the distance value is
measured.
Voltage
-10 (default value) to 10 [V]
output value
When the analog output destination is set to voltage,
sets the voltage to be output when the distance value
is measured.
Distance
value
Sets the reference measured value for output.
-999.999999 to
3.000000 (default value) to
999.999999 [mm]
Current
4 (default value) to 20 [mA]
output value
When the analog output destination is set to current,
sets the current to be output when the distance value is
measured.
Voltage
-10 (default value) to 10 [V]
output value
When the analog output destination is set to voltage,
sets the voltage to be output when the distance value
is measured.
Note
The monitor focus can also be set with key operations on the Sensor Controller.
Setting Monitor Focus p.339
142
Parallel I/O connection
ZW User's Manual
1
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
 I/O Setting Screen
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
: [I/O Settings] icon ( )
: [Analog output]
2
3
Select ON/OFF from [Monitor Focus].
4
Likewise, enter the [Distance] and [Output
value] at [Point2].
Enter the [Distance] and [Output value] at
[Point1].
Adjusting the analog output value
6
Discrepancies may occur between the current value/voltage value output as analog set on the Sensor
Controller and the current value/voltage value actually measured due to the conditions for the connected
external device or other factors.
The analog output adjustment function can be used to correct this discrepancy.
The output values are corrected by entering the adjustment value for the current or voltage values for any two
points.
Communications with External Devices
Important
Set the output destination and select either current or voltage output beforehand. Also, connect the analog output
signal line to an external ammeter or voltmeter.
Item
Setting item Setting value
Description
Analog out- Analog output adjustment
ON/OFF (default value)
put adjustPoint1
Reference
value
4 to 20 [mA]/-10 to 10 [V]
ment
(current/value)
Point2
1
Set analog output correction ON/OFF.
Sets the current or voltage to be used as the correction
reference in the entry field on the left.
adjustment value -999 to 999
Sets the adjustment value when the reference value is
measured in the entry field on the right.
Reference value 4 to 20 [mA]/-10 to 10 [V]
(current/value)
Sets the current or voltage to be used as the correction
reference in the entry field on the left.
adjustment value -999 to 999
Sets the adjustment value when the reference value is
measured in the entry field on the right.
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
ZW User's Manual
Parallel I/O connection
143
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
 I/O Setting Screen
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
: [I/O Settings] icon ( )
: [Analog output]
2
3
Select ON from [Analog output adjustment].
4
Enter the [Distance] and [Output value] at
[Point1], and click [Output].
5
Likewise, enter the [Distance] and [Output
value] at [Point2], and click [Output].
6
Click [Setting].
Click [Setting].
The "Analog Output Adjust" popup menu
appears.
Note
Analog output values can also be adjusted with key operations on the Sensor Controller.
Adjusting the analog output value p.341
144
Parallel I/O connection
ZW User's Manual
Settings for Judgment Output
The following describes the settings for outputting the judgment results from the judgment output of the 32-pole
extension connector.
Assigning judgment output
Set the task for which to output the judgment results.
The judgment results for the selected task are output from the following output terminals of the 32-pole
extension connector.
HIGH1/PASS1/LOW1
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Judgment
Output object
TASK1/TASK2/TASK3/TASK4
Select the task for which to output the judgment result.
1
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
 I/O Setting Screen
2
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
: [I/O Settings] icon ( )
: [Judgment]
Select the task from [Output object].
6
Communications with External Devices
Note
Judgment output can also be assigned with key operations on the Sensor Controller.
Assigning judgment output p.342
ZW User's Manual
Parallel I/O connection
145
Setting Operation at Judgment Output
Set the hysteresis width of the judgment upper/lower limit values and judgment output timing.
3-6 Setting Threshold Value p.68
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Judgment
output
Hysteresis width 0 to 99.9999mm
Description
Sets the hysteresis value (difference between operating point and
recovery point) of the judgment upper/lower limit values when HIGH/
PASS/LOW judgment is unstable near the boundary.
Hysteresis
(hysteresis width)
HIGH threshold
value
Measured value
Action point
Return point
LOW threshold
value
ON
HIGH output OFF
ON
PASS output OFF
ON
LOW output OFF
Timer mode
OFF (default value)
Outputs the judgment as soon as the judgment result has been applied.
Measured value
HIGH threshold
value
LOW threshold
value
HIGH output
ON
OFF
PASS output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
LOW output
Off Delay
Delays the falling edge of the PASS output by the value set at [Timer
Duration] after the judgment result has been applied.
Measured value
HIGH threshold
value
LOW threshold
value
HIGH output
ON
OFF
PASS output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
LOW output
: Timer time
On Delay
Delays the rising edge of the PASS output by the value set at [Timer
Duration] after the judgment result has been applied.
Measured value
HIGH threshold
value
LOW threshold
value
HIGH output
ON
OFF
PASS output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
LOW output
: Timer time
146
Parallel I/O connection
ZW User's Manual
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Judgment
output
Timer mode
One Shot
When the judgment result changes to PASS, the PASS output is executed
for the time set to [Timer Duration].
Measured value
HIGH threshold
value
LOW threshold
value
HIGH output
ON
OFF
PASS output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
LOW output
: Timer time
Timer time
1
1 (default value) to
5000 [ms]
Sets the timer duration when the timer mode is other than OFF.
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
 I/O Setting Screen
2
3
Set [Hysteresis Width].
4
Sets [Timer time].
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
: [I/O Settings] icon ( )
: [Judgment]
Select the judgment output timing to match
operation of the external device from [Timer
settings] - [Timer mode].
6
Communications with External Devices
Note
The operations for judgment output can also be set with key operations on the Sensor Controller.
Setting Operation at Judgment Output p.343
ZW User's Manual
Parallel I/O connection
147
Settings for Processing When Measurement Is Not Possible
Setting operation when measurement is not possible
Set the output method when the sensor head temporarily enters a non-measurement state, for example, due to
insufficient received light amount or a RESET input state.
Example: When skipping occurs in the waveform due to insufficient received light intensity
Amount of displacement
(2)
(3)
(1)
State with waveform skip caused
by insufficient light amount
(1)
Direction of
workpiece
movement
(2)
(3)
When [Keep] is selected
Amount of displacement
As the value before the skip occurred is kept,
this is effective in canceling waveform skip.
Important
When performing hold measurement, the output before the initial hold value is applied is the same as that for "Clamp"
even if "Keep" is set.
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Non-Measurement setting
NonMeasurement
setting
Keep
The measured value before the non-measurement state
was entered is held and output.
Clamp
With analog output, the preset clamp value (abnormal
value) is output. All judgment outputs become OFF.
1
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
 I/O Setting Screen
148
Parallel I/O connection
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
: [I/O Settings] icon ( )
: [Non-Measurement Setting]
ZW User's Manual
2
Select the operation during nonmeasurement at [Non-Measurement
Setting].
Note
The operations for when measurement is not possible can also be set with key operations on the Sensor Controller.
Setting operation when measurement is not possible p.344
Setting the Clamp Value
Set the clamp value to output when "Clamp" is selected as processing when measurement is not possible.
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Analog output
Clamp output
When the analog output destination is set to current
MIN (approx. 3.4mA)/4 to 20mA (1mA increments)/
MAX (default value: approx. 21mA)
When the analog output destination is set to voltage
MIN (approx. -10.8V)/-10 to 10V (1V increments)/
MAX (default value: approx. 10.8V)
Select the current/voltage at clamp
output.
Communications with External Devices
1
6
Item
Set the operating mode to the FUN mode.
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
 I/O Setting Screen
2
: [Bank] | [(Bank Data Name)] (double click)
: [I/O Settings] icon ( )
: [Analog output]
Select the output value at [Output value
when clamp].
ZW User's Manual
Parallel I/O connection
149
Note
Clamp values can also be set with key operations on the Sensor Controller.
Setting the Clamp Value p.345
Settings for Bank Control
This section describes the settings for controlling banks by using parallel I/O.
Selecting banks
The bank is selected in combinations of the bank select input signals (BANK_SEL1 to 3).
Bank selection input 1
(BANK_SEL1)
Bank selection input 2
(BANK_SEL2)
Bank selection input 3
(BANK_SEL3)
Selected bank
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK1
ON
OFF
OFF
BANK2
OFF
ON
OFF
BANK3
ON
ON
OFF
BANK4
OFF
OFF
ON
BANK5
ON
OFF
ON
BANK6
OFF
ON
ON
BANK7
ON
ON
ON
BANK8
Important
• Bank switching is begun 0.2 seconds after the input state changes.
• At most it takes about 100ms to switch banks.
• During bank switching, the BUSY output becomes ON.
• If the bank mode is set to [JUDGE], the bank cannot be switched at the external signal input because the number of
banks increases to 32.
Outputting the currently selected bank number
The currently selected bank number is output.
The output bank number depends on the combination of the bank number output signals (BANK_OUT1 to 3).
150
Bank number output 1
(BANK_OUT1)
Bank number output 2
(BANK_OUT2)
Bank number output 3
(BANK_OUT3)
Output bank
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK1
ON
OFF
OFF
BANK2
OFF
ON
OFF
BANK3
ON
ON
OFF
BANK4
OFF
OFF
ON
BANK5
ON
OFF
ON
BANK6
OFF
ON
ON
BANK7
ON
ON
ON
BANK8
Parallel I/O connection
ZW User's Manual
Settings for Internal Logging
Set the LOGGING save count and LOGGING save intervals
The following describes the settings for internal logging.
Item
Setting item
Setting value
Description
Internal logging
LOGGING save
count
0 to 12800
(default value)
Sets the maximum data count to be internally logged.
LOGGING save
intervals
0 to 1 (default
value) to 1000
Sets the intervals to be internally logged.
If “1” is set , all measured data is stored, and “2” is set, one measured data is
stored every two measurement.
If “0” is set, only the applied measured data is stored when hold is set.
Important
• This settings are not applied when internal logging is started by sending No-protocol communications or the
operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
• It cannot set and display using Sysmac Studio.
Note
The setting of LOGGING save count and LOGGING save intervals can also be set by the operating keys on the
Sensor Controller.
Setting for Internal Logging p.346
6
Communications with External Devices
ZW User's Manual
Parallel I/O connection
151
Timing Chart
The following shows the timing charts when communication is performed with external devices.
Basic operation
(1)
(3) (4)
(2)
T0
T1
T2
T3
ON
Exposure OFF
Judgment output
HIGH/PASS/LOW)
Analog output
Item
Min.
Max.
T0
Measuring cycle
0.5ms
Depends on the set conditions
(0.5 to 10.0 ms)
T1
Exposure time
1 s
Max. exposure time
(1 to 5000 s)
T2
Response time of output
T0x2
T0x2
T3
Response time of analog output

0.1 ms
Explanation of operations
(1) During each measuring cycle, the LEDs are lit and exposure is started.
(2) After the end of exposure, measurement starts.
(3) After the end of measurement, the judgment result is output.
(4) After the judgment result output, the analog output is updated.
152
Parallel I/O connection
ZW User's Manual
Hold (peak/bottom/peak to peak/average)
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4) (5)
(6)
(7)(8)
(9)
T4
T5
T4
TIMING input
T5
T3
T5
T3
ON
OFF
RESET input ON
OFF
ON
BUSY output OFF
Judgment output
(HIGH/PASS/LOW)
Analog output
Item
Min.
Max.
T3
Response time of analog output

0.1 ms
T4
TIMING input/RESET input minimum time
3ms+T0

T5
Input response time
2ms+T0
3ms+T0 × 2
Explanation of operations
6
(1) The TIMING input is turned ON.
(2) During the TIMING input minimum time, when the TIMING input is ON, sampling is started and the BUSY
output is turned ON.
(3) The TIMING input is turned OFF.
(4) After the TIMING input turns OFF, sampling is ended and the judgment results are output. The BUSY output
is also turned OFF.
(5) After the judgment result output, the analog output is updated.
(6) The RESET input is turned ON. If the RESET input is turned ON during the RESET input minimum time, the
measured value is reset.
(7) The judgment result is reset.
(8) After the judgment result reset, the analog output is reset.
(9) The RESET input is turned OFF.
Communications with External Devices
Important
When the setting for non-measurement is "CLAMP", if the sampling value is an abnormal value or an undetermined
value *, sampling is not executed. If sampling has been started, it is stopped. The output value is as follows.
• Hold the clamp value.
• To start and continue sampling even if a sampling value is an abnormal value or an undetermined value, set "KEEP"
as the non-measurement setting.
*: After the start of measurement, if measurement results are not obtained the number of times required to take the
average, the measurement result is not applied.
ZW User's Manual
Parallel I/O connection
153
Hold (auto peak/auto bottom/auto peak-to-peak)
(3)
(1) (2)
(4) (5)
(6)
(7)
T4
T3
RESET input
T5
T3
T5
ON
OFF
ON
BUSY output OFF
Judgment output
(HIGH/PASS/LOW)
Analog output
Item
Min.
Max.
T3
Response time of analog output

0.1 ms
T4
TIMING input/RESET input minimum time
3ms+T0

T5
Input response time
2ms+T0
3ms+T0 × 2
Explanation of operations
(1) The peak value is updated and the judgment result is output.
(2) After the judgment result output, the analog output is updated.
(3) The RESET input is turned ON. If the RESET input is turned ON during the RESET input minimum time, the
measured value is reset.
(4) The judgment result is reset.The BUSY output is turned OFF.
(5) After the judgment result reset, the analog output is reset.
(6) The RESET input is turned OFF.
(7) The BUSY output is turned ON.
Important
When the setting for non-measurement is "CLAMP", if the sampling value is an abnormal value or an undetermined
value *, sampling is not executed. If sampling has been started, it is stopped. The output value is as follows.
• Hold the clamp value.
• The BUSY signal is turned OFF.
• To start and continue sampling even if a sampling value is an abnormal value or an undetermined value, set "KEEP"
as the non-measurement setting.
*: After the start of measurement, if measurement results are not obtained the number of times required to take the
average, the measurement result is not applied.
154
Parallel I/O connection
ZW User's Manual
Hold (sampling)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
T5
(7)
(6)
T4
T4
T3
T5
T3
TIMING input ON
OFF
RESET input
ON
OFF
ON
BUSY output OFF
Judgment output
(HIGH/PASS/LOW)
Analog output
Item
Min.
Max.
T3
Response time of analog output

0.1 ms
T4
TIMING input/RESET input minimum time
3ms+T0

T5
Input response time
2ms+T0
3ms+T0 × 2
Explanation of operations
6
(1) The TIMING input is turned ON.
(2) During the TIMING input minimum time, when the TIMING input is ON, sampling is started and the BUSY
output is turned ON. The measurement result is sampled and the judgment result is output.
(3) After the judgment result output, the analog output is updated.
(4) The RESET input is turned ON. If the RESET input is turned ON during the RESET input minimum time, the
measured value is reset.
(5) The judgment result and is reset.
(6) After the judgment result output, the analog output is reset.
(7) The RESET input is turned OFF.
Communications with External Devices
Important
When the setting for non-measurement is "CLAMP", if the sampling value is an abnormal value or an undetermined
value *, sampling is not executed. The output value is as follows.
• Hold the clamp value.
• The BUSY signal is not turned ON.
*: After the start of measurement, if measurement results are not obtained the number of times required to take the
average, the measurement result is not applied.
ZW User's Manual
Parallel I/O connection
155
Bank Switching
(1)
(3)
(2)
T8
T7
(4)
T9
BANK_SEL input
(BANK_SEL1/2/3)
BANK_SEL output
(BANK_OUT1/2/3)
ON
BUSY output OFF
ON
ENABLE output OFF
Measurement
Measurement
Clamp
Measurement
Item
Min.
Max.
T7
Input response time

200 ms
T8
Bank switching time

100 ms
T9
Measurement start response time
3 × T0
Depends on the set conditions
Explanation of operations
(1) The BANK_SEL signal is switched to the bank number to switch to.
(2) After the input response time, the measurement stops and the BUSY output is turned ON, then the bank
switching operation is started.
(3) After bank switching ends, the BUSY output is turned OFF and the BANK_ OUT output is switched.
(4) Measurement is restarted and the ENABLE output is turned ON.
LED OFF
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
T10
T11
LED OFF input
T12
T11
T9
ON
OFF
Turn ON
LED
Turn OFF
Turn ON
ON
ENABLE output OFF
Measurement
Measurement
Clamp
Item
Measurement
Min.
Max.
T9
Measurement start response time
3 × T0
Depends on the set conditions
T10
LED OFF input minimum time
100 s

T11
Time of receiving LED OFF input

100 s
T12
ENABLE response time after LEDs are turned OFF 
2 × T0
Explanation of operations
(1) The LED OFF input is turned ON.
(2) After the LED OFF input is turned ON, the LEDs are turned OFF.
(3) After the LEDs are turned OFF, the ENABLE output is turned OFF.
(4) The LED OFF input is turned OFF.
(5) After the LED OFF input is turned OFF, the LEDs are turned ON.
(6) After the LEDs are lit up, measurement is restarted and the ENABLE output is turned ON.
156
Parallel I/O connection
ZW User's Manual
Zero reset
(1)
(2)
T13
ZERO input
(4)
(3)
(5)
T7
T14
ON
OFF
Judgment output
(HIGH/PASS/LOW)
Item
Min.
Max.
T7
Input response time
2ms+T0
3ms+T0 × 2
T13
ZERO input time
50 ms
0.8s
T14
ZERO input cancel time
1s

Explanation of operations
(1) The ZERO input is turned ON.
(2) After the ZERO input time, the ZERO input is turned OFF.
(3) After the ZERO input is turned OFF, the zero reset is executed and the judgment results reflected in the
measurement results are output.
(4) The ZERO input is turned ON.
(5) After at least the cancel time of ZERO input has passed, the zero reset is cancelled.
Operating Mode Switching
(1)
(2)
(3)
6
FUN
RUN
Communications with External Devices
RUN
MODE
(4)
T9
T3
ON
BUSY output OFF
ON
ENABLE output OFF
Judgment output
(HIGH/PASS/LOW)
All OFF
Analog output
Item
CLAMP
Min.
Max.
T3
Response time of analog output

0.1 ms
T9
Measurement start response time
3 × T0
Depends on the set conditions
Explanation of operations
(1) After the mode is switched from RUN to FUN mode, the BUSY output and ENABLE output are turned OFF.
The judgment outputs all go OFF.
(2) The response time of analog output after the BUSY output is turned ON, the analog output is output
clamped.
(3) After the mode is switched from the FUN mode to the RUN mode, the BUSY output is turned OFF.
(4) Measurement is restarted and the ENABLE signal is turned ON, then the measurement results are output.
ZW User's Manual
Parallel I/O connection
157
Internal logging
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
T15
T16
T16
LOGGING input ON
OFF
Operation status
Logging stopped
state
Logging in progress
Item
Logging stopped state
Min.
Max.
T15
LOGGING input minimum time
3ms+T0

T16
Input response time
2ms+T0
3ms+T0 × 2
Explanation of operations
(1) The LOGGING input is turned ON.
(2) After the LOGGING input is turned ON, the internal logging is started.
(3) The LOGGING input is turned OFF.
(4) After the LOGGING input is turned OFF, the internal logging is ended.
158
Parallel I/O connection
ZW User's Manual
6-2 EtherCAT Connection
Overview of EtherCAT Networks
EtherCAT (Ethernet Control Automation Technology) is a high-performance industrial network system based on
Ethernet system and can realize faster and more efficient communications.
Each node achieves a short communications cycle time by transmitting Ethernet frames at high speed.
Furthermore, even though EtherCAT is a unique protocol, it offers excellent general-purpose applicability. For
example, you can use Ethernet cables because EtherCAT utilizes standard Ethernet technology for the
physical layer. And the effectiveness of EtherCAT can be fully utilized not only in large control systems that
require high processing speeds and system integrity, but also in small and medium control systems.
Features of EtherCAT
EtherCAT has the following features.
● Extremely high-speed communications with speed of 100 Mbps
It dramatically shortens the I/O response time from generation of input signals to transmission of output
signals. By fully utilizing the optimized Ethernet frame bandwidth to transfer data using a high-speed repeat
method, it is possible to efficiently transmit a wide variety of data.
● Extremely High Compatibility with Ethernet
EtherCAT is an open network with extremely high compatibility with conventional Ethernet systems.
6
Structure of EtherCAT
Communications with External Devices
EtherCAT does not send data to individual slave nodes on the network, instead, it passes Ethernet frames
through all of the slave nodes.
When frame passes through a slave node, the slave node reads and writes data in the areas allocated to it in
the frames in a few nanoseconds.
Ethernet frames sent from the EtherCAT Master Unit go through all the EtherCAT Slave Units without stopping
on the way. Once they reach the final Slave Unit, they are sent back from the final Slave Unit, pass through all
Slave Units again, and return to the EtherCAT Master Unit.
With this structure, EtherCAT secures high-speed and real-time data transmission.
EtherCAT
Master Unit
Slave Unit
Slave Unit
Slave Unit
Data
OUT
IN
• Reading output data addressed to the local Slave Units
• Writing input data
Ethernet frame
ZW User's Manual
EtherCAT Connection
159
It is the "EtherCAT datagram" stored directly in an Ethernet frame that exchanges data regularly between the
EtherCAT Master Unit and Slave Units.
Each "EtherCAT datagram" is configured with header (data length, including address of one or more Slave
Units, etc.), data, working counter (check bit).
When an Ethernet frame is compared to a "train", an EtherCAT datagram can be considered as "railway car."
Ethernet frame
Ethernet
header
Ethernet data (Maximum 1498 bytes)
1...n EtherCAT datagram
EtherCAT
header
1st EtherCAT 2nd EtherCAT
datagram
datagram
Header
CRC
Data
.....
EtherCAT frame
n th EtherCAT
datagram
WKC
WKC : Working counter
160
EtherCAT Connection
ZW User's Manual
Communications Types of EtherCAT
EtherCAT provides the following two types of communication functions.
PDO communications are always updating data per communication cycle on EtherCAT, while SDO
communications are processed in between those updates.
● Process data communications functions (PDO communications)
This communication function is used to transfer process data in real time in a fixed-cycle.
By mapping logical process data space to each node by the EtherCAT Master Unit, it achieves fixed-cycle
communications among the EtherCAT Master Unit and Slave Units.
EtherCAT Master Unit
Slave Unit
Slave Unit
Slave Unit
Slave Unit
Ethernet frame
Ethernet EtherCAT
header header
1st EtherCAT
datagram
2nd EtherCAT
datagram
3rd EtherCAT
datagram
. . .
CRC
Logic process data
.
.
.
6
Data a
Communications with External Devices
.
.
.
Data b
Data c
.
.
.
● Mailbox communications functions (SDO communications)
It refers to message communications.
At any timing, the EtherCAT Master Unit transmits commands to Slave Units and the Slave Units return
responses to the EtherCAT Master Unit.
It performs the following data communications:
• Read and write process data
ZW User's Manual
EtherCAT Connection
161
ZW Communications Methods in an EtherCAT Connection
Communications between the EtherCAT master and the displacement sensor is performed over EtherCAT to
enable control from the master by control signals and data output after measured values are applied.
When the displacement sensor is connected to an NJ series CPU Unit via EtherCAT, Sysmac Studio (standard
edition) is used to register the ZW to the EtherCAT slave configuration on the network configuration edit pane.
For details on registration methods, refer to Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (SBCA-362) "4-2
Controller Configuration/Setting."
Important
If EtherCAT is set to enables to perform communications over EtherCAT, the EtherNet/IP communications setting is
disabled and EtherNet/IP communications is no longer possible.
Setting Communications Specifications (EtherCAT Communications) p.165
Communications method using process data objects (PDO)
● Control of displacement sensors by control/status signals
With EtherCAT communications, process data objects (PDO) are used to perform PDO communications (cyclic
communications). Control of the displacement sensor is performed by storing control signals/command from
the master to the displacement sensor, status signals from the displacement sensor to the master, and
command responses to the I/O ports (or I/O memory) (*1)of the Controller.
*1:
When connected to the NJ series, "I/O ports" are used, and when connected to the CJ series, "I/O memory" is used. Explanations from
here on are for when the connection is to the NJ series.
Controller (master)
Displacement Sensor (slave)
NJ-series CPU Unit
I/O ports
Controll signal,
Commands
Command area
Response area
TIMING input
Current bank settings
command, etc.
Response
HOLDSTAT output
Command Response, etc.
EtherCAT communications
The Controller sends the instruction to the displacement sensor over EtherCAT by switching the control signal
bit assigned with control to be executed to ON.
The displacement sensor executes the instruction, and updates the status signal bit according to the result to
return it over EtherCAT. ÅB
When instructions are executed by control commands, control commands are sent to the displacement sensor
over EtherCAT by writing the control command, for example, to I/O port Command and then turning the control
command execution (EXE) bit ON.
The displacement sensor executes that control command, and returns the response to the Controller over
EtherCAT. The Controller stores the response to I/O port Response, for example.
162
EtherCAT Connection
ZW User's Manual
● Output of displacement sensor measurement data to output area
The measurement data of all tasks is automatically output from the displacement sensor to I/O port
Measurement Value of Task 1 to 4 immediately after the measured value is applied.
This enables the measurement results of all tasks to be easily handed over to the Controller.
Controller (master)
Displacement sensor
(slave)
NJ-series CPU Unit
After applying
measured value
I/O ports
Data
Output area
Automatically output
the measured data of
4 tasks
EtherCAT communications
With EtherCAT communications, communications is performed via the I/O ports of the following four area on
the Controller. Sysmac error status area I/O ports are used only when an NJ series CPU unit is connected as
the master.
Control by control/
status signals
(1) I/O ports of instruction
area
I/O ports to which the user writes control signals to be
executed on the displacement sensor and control commands
(2) I/O ports of response
area
I/O ports to which the displacement sensor writes the
control signals written to the instruction area and the
result of executing control commands
6
Data output after applica- (3) I/O ports of output area I/O ports to which the displacement sensor writes the output data accompanying measurement after application of
tion of measured value
For error status
ZW User's Manual
(4) I/O ports of Sysmac
error status area
Communications with External Devices
the measured value
I/O ports to which the displacement sensor writes the
error status
EtherCAT Connection
163
Displacement Sensor (slave)
Controller (master)
Command area I/O port
The following control commands are
written to the Displacement Sensor.
Command/
response
communications
The control commands written to the I/O
ports in the Command Area are
executed.
Execution
Response area I/O port
The execution results from the
Displacement Sensor are written
here.
Output area I/O port
Data output
after
measurements
Command
Output data from the Displacement
Sensor is written here.
Response
The results of execution are written to
the I/O ports in the Response Area.
After applying measured value
Measurement results are written to the
I/O ports in the Data Output Area.
I/O Ports in Sysmac Error Status Area
Error status
Error status information from the
Displacement Sensor is written here.
Error status information is written to the
I/O ports in the Sysmac Error Status Area.
●
Sysmac error status
Communications method using service data objects (SDO)
The ZW series supports SDO communications. SDO communications is used for setting objects and
monitoring the status of the ZW series. Objects can be set or the status monitored by reading and writing data
to entries in the object dictionary of the host Controller.
164
EtherCAT Connection
ZW User's Manual
Setting Communications Specifications (EtherCAT Communications)
Setting default settings for EtherCAT communications
Set the default settings for EtherCAT communications.
Item
Description
Range
Fieldbus
Select whether to use EtherNet/IP communications or EtherCAT
communications.
OFF
EtherNet/IP
EtherCAT
GATE signal ON time
Set the output time of the GATE signal for notifying the timing that the
measured value was updated when hold is output.
0 to 100ms
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
: [Device Group] | [(Sensor Name)] | [System]
[System Data] (double-click)
: [Ethernet Communications Settings] icon ( )
1
Set the fieldbus settings.
Select [EtherCAT] at [Fieldbus].
2
Set the output time of the GATE signal.
Set the value at [GATE signal ON time].
6
Note
Communications with External Devices
The setting of default settings for EtherCAT communications can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor
Controller.
Setting Fieldbus p.348
Setting GATE Signal ON Time p.349
ZW User's Manual
EtherCAT Connection
165
List of I/O Ports for Each Area (PDO Mapping) and Memory Assignments
When connection destination is an NJ series Controller
This section describes the respective I/O ports of the instruction area, response area, output area, and Sysmac
error status area.
● I/O ports of instruction area
Controller (master)  Displacement sensor (slave)
I/O port name
Signal
Common Control Flag
EXE
Signal name
Function
Sensor head common
control signal
EXE
Control command
execution
Turns ON when the user (Controller) instructs execution of
control commands to the displacement sensor.
(Turns ON after the control command code and
parameters are set.)
Is returned to OFF on condition (input condition) that the
user (Controller) turns the control command completion
signal (FLG signal) from the displacement sensor ON.
SYNC
SYNC
Measurement
synchronous start
Turns ON when the user (Controller) instructs
measurement synchronization to the displacement sensor.
Is returned to OFF on condition (input condition) that the
user (Controller) turns the measurement synchronization
completion signal (SYNCFLG signal) ON.
ERCLR
ERCLR
Error clear
Turns ON when the displacement sensor error signal
(ERR signal) turns OFF.
Is returned to OFF on condition (input condition) that the
user (Controller) turns the error signal (ERR signal) OFF.
Sensor Head1
Control Flag
TIMING1
Sensor head 1 control
signal
TIMING1
Timing
Turns ON when the user (Controller) instructs start of hold
sampling to the displacement sensor.
Turns OFF when the user (Controller) instructs end of hold
sampling to the displacement sensor.
RESET1
RESET1
Reset
Turns ON when the user (Controller) instructs judgment
processing and output reset to the displacement sensor.
If the hold function is used, the state in effect before the
hold function was set will be restored.
Turns OFF when the user (Controller) ends judgment
processing and output reset to the displacement sensor.
LIGHTOFF1
LIGHTOFF1
Light metering OFF
Turns ON when the user (Controller) instructs logical beam
OFF to the displacement sensor.
Turns OFF when the user (Controller) instructs logical
beam ON to the displacement sensor.
ZERO1_T1 to 4
ZERO1_T1 to 4
Zero reset execution
Turns ON when the user (Controller) instructs execution of
zero reset of TASK1 to 4 to the displacement sensor.
Is returned to OFF on condition (input condition) that the
user (Controller) turns the zero reset completion signal
(ZEROSTAT signal) from the displacement sensor ON.
ZEROCLR1_T1 to 4 ZEROCLR1_T1 to 4 Zero reset cancel
Turns ON when the user (Controller) instructs zero reset
cancel of TASK1 to 4 to the displacement sensor.
Is returned to OFF on condition (input condition) that the
user (Controller) turns the zero reset completion signal
(ZEROSTAT signal) from the displacement sensor OFF.
166
EtherCAT Connection
ZW User's Manual
I/O port name
Signal
Signal name
Function
Command
Command code
Command code
Stores the command code.
Command Parameter 1
to 3
Parameter 1-3
Command parameter
Stores the command parameter.
Note
• In the FUN mode, control signals other than ERCLR and LIGHTOFFx cannot be executed.
• Multiple control signals cannot be executed in the same cycle. Note, however, that when zero reset execution/
cancellation are performed simultaneously on multiple tasks, ZEROx_T1 to 4 and ZEROCLRx_T1 to 4 can be
executed in the same cycle. Also, all control signals can be executed in the same cycle on ERCLR and
LIGHTOFFx.
• When the status of control signals differs from that of the input status of parallel I/O, processing is executed of one
of the statuses is ON.
• SYNC can be used only in EtherCAT communications. It cannot be used in EtherNet/IP communications.
● I/O ports of response area
Displacement sensor (slave)  Controller (master)
I/O port name
Signal
Common Status Flag
FLG
Signal name
Function
Sensor head common
status signal
FLG
Control command
completion
Turns ON when the displacement sensor completes
control command execution.
(Turns ON after the control command code, response code
and response status are stored.)
Automatically turns OFF if the control command execution
signal (EXE signal) from the user (Controller) turns OFF.
SYNCFLG
SYNCFLG
Turns ON when the displacement sensor executes
measurement synchronization processing and the state
changes to one where normal measured values can be
output.
6
Measurement
synchronization
completion
Communications with External Devices
Automatically turns OFF if the measurement
synchronization signal (SYNC signal) from the user
(Controller) turns OFF.
READY
READY
Ready
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor cannot execute
control commands or measurement synchronization
processing.
Turns ON when the displacement sensor can execute
control commands or measurement synchronization
processing.
RUN
RUN
Run screen
Turns ON when the displacement sensor is in the RUN
mode.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor is in the FUN
mode.
ERR
ERR
Error
Turns ON when a displacement sensor error is detected.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor is normal.
After it turns ON, it never turns OFF until the error clear
signal (ERCLR signal) from the user (Controller) turns ON.
BANKOUT1_A to E
ZW User's Manual
BANKOUT1_A to E
Current bank number
This outputs the currently specified bank number.
It expresses the bank number in combinations of
BANKOUTx_A to E.
(For details of combinations, see Note .)
EtherCAT Connection
167
I/O port name
Signal
Sensor Head1
Status Flag
HOLDSTAT1
Signal name
Function
Sensor head 1 status
signal
HOLDSTAT1
Hold execution status
Turns ON when the displacement sensor is in the hold
sampling period.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor is outside the
hold sampling period.
RESETSTAT1
RESETSTAT1
Reset execution state
Turns ON when the displacement sensor is in the reset
execution state.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor is in the reset
non-execution state.
LIGHT1
LIGHT1
Logical beam lighting
state
STABILITY1
STABILITY1
Measurement position
Turns ON when the logical beam is lit.
Turns OFF when the logical beam is out.
Turns ON when the measured value is in the measuring
range.
Turns OFF when the measured value is outside the
measuring range.
ENABLE1
ENABLE1
Measurement state
Turns ON when the displacement sensor is ready for
measurement.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor cannot measure
(excessive or insufficient received light, outside measuring
range, Calibration ROM not mounted, during FUN mode
non-measurement).
GATE1
GATE1
Data output completed
Turns ON when the displacement sensor completes
control data output when hold is set.
The displacement sensor automatically turns OFF one
Gate period after turning ON.
OR1
OR1
Overall judgment result
Turns ON when even one of the judgment result of the
displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is other than PASS.
Turns OFF when all of the judgment result of the
displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is PASS.
HIGH1_T1 to 4
HIGH1_T1-4
HIGH output
Turns ON when the judgment result of the displacement
sensor TASK1 to 4 is HIGH (HIGH threshold < measured
value).
Turns OFF when the judgment result of the displacement
sensor TASK1 to 4 is other than HIGH.
PASS1_T1 to 4
PASS1_T1-4
PASS Output
Turns ON when the judgment result of the displacement
sensor TASK1 to 4 is PASS (LOW threshold  measured
value HIGH threshold).
Turns OFF when the judgment result of the displacement
sensor TASK1 to 4 is other than PASS.
LOW1_T1 to 4
LOW1_T1-4
LOW output
Turns ON when the judgment result of the displacement
sensor TASK1 to 4 is LOW (LOW threshold > measured
value).
Turns OFF when the judgment result of the displacement
sensor TASK1 to 4 is other than LOW.
ZEROSTAT1_T1 to
4
ZEROSTAT1_T1-4
Zero reset state
Turns ON when the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is in
the zero reset execution state.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is in
the zero reset non-execution state.
168
Response
Command code
Command code
The executed command code is returned.
Response Code
Response code
Response code
The response code of the executed command is stored.
Response Data
Response data
Response data
The response data of the executed command is stored.
EtherCAT Connection
ZW User's Manual
Note
• The results of processing execution by parallel I/O also are reflected in the status signals.
• The table below shows the combinations of bank numbers and BANKOUTx_A to E.
(BANK9 to 32 are used only in the judgment value mode. In the normal mode, BANKOUTx_D to E are OFF at all
times.)
Bank number
BANKOUTx_A
BANKOUTx_B
BANKOUTx_C
BANKOUTx_D
BANKOUTx_E
BANK1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK2
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK3
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK5
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
BANK6
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
BANK7
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
BANK10
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
BANK11
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
BANK12
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
BANK13
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
BANK14
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
BANK15
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
BANK16
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
BANK17
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
BANK18
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
BANK19
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
BANK20
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
BANK21
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
BANK22
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
BANK23
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
BANK24
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
BANK25
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
BANK26
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
BANK27
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
BANK28
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
BANK29
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
BANK30
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
BANK31
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
BANK32
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ZW User's Manual
Communications with External Devices
ON
BANK9
6
BANK8
EtherCAT Connection
169
● I/O ports of output area
Displacement sensor (slave)  Controller (master)
I/O port name
Signal
Signal name
Size of output data
Function
Measurement Value
of Task1
Measurement Value
of Task1
TASK1 measured
value
4 bytes
The measured value of TASK1 is output.
Measurement Value
of Task2
Measurement Value
of Task2
TASK2 measured
value
4 bytes
The measured value of TASK2 is output.
Measurement Value
of Task3
Measurement Value
of Task3
TASK3 measured
value
4 bytes
The measured value of TASK3 is output.
Measurement Value
of Task4
Measurement Value
of Task4
TASK4 measured
value
4 bytes
The measured value of TASK4 is output.
● I/O ports of sysmac error status area
Displacement sensor (slave)  Controller (master)
The Sysmac error status is mapped only when the connection destination is the NJ series.
170
I/O port name
Signal
Signal name
Function
Sysmac Error Status
Sysmac Error
Status
Sysmac error status
Indicates the Sysmac error status.
Observation
Observation
Monitor error
Turns ON when a monitor error occurs on the
displacement sensor.
Minor Fault
Minor Fault
Light fault level error
Turns ON when a light fault level error occurs on the
displacement sensor.
EtherCAT Connection
ZW User's Manual
Assigning Device Variables to I/O Ports (PDO Mapping)
When connected to an NJ-series CPU Unit, the data for PDO communications in the Vision Sensor is displayed
with I/O port names on the Sysmac Studio. You can assign device variables to the I/O ports in the Sysmac
Studio I/O map to perform programming and monitoring.
 Explorer pane (Connected to NJ-series CPU Unit): [Configurations and Setup] |
[I/O Map] (Double-click)
6
Right-click a slave or I/O port in the I/O map and select [Create Device Variable]. The device variable name is
automatically created as a combination of the device name and the I/O port name. You can also select an I/O
port and enter a variable name in the [Variable] column.
Communications with External Devices
You can also select a registered variable from the variable table to use as a device variable. Refer to the
Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (Cat. No. W504) for details on registering device variables.
ZW User's Manual
EtherCAT Connection
171
When the connection destination is a CJ series PLC
This section describes the respective area assignments of the instruction area, response area and output area.
● Instruction area
PLC (master)  Displacement sensor (slave)
Top
channel
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
+0
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved SYNC
+1
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved ERCLR
+2
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved LIGHT RESET TIMING Sensor head
OFF1
1
1
1 control
+3
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO1 ZERO1 ZERO1 ZERO1 signal(32bit)
CLR_T4 CLR_T3 CLR_T2 CLR1_T1 _T4
_T3
_T1
_T1
+4
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Extended
+5
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
+6
Command code
Command
code (32bit)
+8
Parameter 1
Parameter 1
(16bit)
+9
Parameter 2
Parameter 2
(16bit)
+10
Parameter 3
Parameter 3
(32bit)
+7
+11
EXE Sensor head
common control
signal (32bit)
area (32bit)
Signal
Signal name
Function
EXE
Control command execution
Turns ON when the user (PLC) instructs execution of control commands to the
displacement sensor.
(Turns ON after the control command code and parameters are set.)
Is returned to OFF on condition (input condition) that the user (PLC) turns the
control command completion signal (FLG signal) from the displacement
sensor ON.
SYNC
Measurement synchronous
start
Turns ON when the user (Controller) instructs measurement synchronization
to the displacement sensor.
Is returned to OFF on condition (input condition) that the user (Controller)
turns the measurement synchronization completion signal (SYNCFLG signal)
ON.
ERCLR
Error clear
Turns ON when the displacement sensor error signal (ERR signal) turns OFF.
Is returned to OFF on condition (input condition) that the user (PLC) turns the
error signal (ERR signal) OFF.
TIMING1
Timing
Turns ON when the user (PLC) instructs start of hold sampling to the
displacement sensor.
Turns OFF when the user (PLC) instructs end of hold sampling to the
displacement sensor.
RESET1
Reset
Turns ON when the user (PLC) instructs judgment processing and output
reset to the displacement sensor.
If the hold function is used, the state in effect before the hold function was set
will be restored.
Turns OFF when the user (PLC) ends judgment processing and output reset
to the displacement sensor.
172
EtherCAT Connection
ZW User's Manual
Signal
Signal name
Function
LIGHTOFF1
Light metering OFF
Turns ON when the user (PLC) instructs logical beam OFF to the
displacement sensor.
Turns OFF when the user (PLC) instructs logical beam ON to the
displacement sensor.
ZERO1_T1 to 4
Zero reset execution
Turns ON when the user (PLC) instructs execution of zero reset of TASK1 to 4
to the displacement sensor.
Is returned to OFF on condition (input condition) that the user (PLC) turns the
zero reset completion signal (ZEROSTAT signal) from the displacement
sensor ON.
ZEROCLR1_T1 to 4
Zero reset cancel
Turns ON when the user (PLC) instructs zero reset cancel of TASK1 to 4 to
the displacement sensor.
Is returned to OFF on condition (input condition) that the user (PLC) turns the
zero reset completion signal (ZEROSTAT signal) from the displacement
sensor OFF.
Command code
Command code
Stores the command code.
Parameter 1-3
Command parameter
Stores the command parameter.
Note
• In the FUN mode, control signals other than ERCLR and LIGHTOFFx cannot be executed.
• Multiple control signals cannot be executed in the same cycle. Note, however, that when zero reset execution/
cancellation are performed simultaneously on multiple tasks, ZEROx_T1 to 4 and ZEROCLRx_T1 to 4 can be
executed in the same cycle.
• When the status of control signals differs from that of the input status of parallel I/O, processing is executed of one
of the statuses is ON.
● Response area
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FLG Sensor head
+0
BANK1 BANK1 BANK1 BANK1 BANK1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved RUN Reserved READY SYNC
_E
_D
_C
_B
_A
FLG
+1
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved ERR signal (32bit)
+2
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved OR1 GATE1 ENABLE STABIL LIGHT RESET HOLD Sensor head
1
ITY1
1
STAT1 STAT1 1 control
+3
LOW1_T PASS1_T HIGH1_T LOW1_T PASS1_T HIGH1_T LOW1_T PASS1_T HIGH1_T LOW1_T PASS1_T HIGH1_T ZERO
ZERO
ZERO
ZERO signal (32bit)
4
4
4
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
STAT1_T4 STAT1_T3 STAT1_T2 STAT1_T1
+4
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Extended
+5
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
+6
Command code
Command
code (32bit)
Response code
Response
code (32bit)
Response data
Response
data (32bit)
+7
+8
+9
+10
+11
Communications with External Devices
Top
channel
6
Displacement sensor (slave)  PLC (master)
common control
area (32bit)
Signal
Signal name
Function
FLG
Control command completion Turns ON when the displacement sensor completes control command
execution.
(Turns ON after the control command code, response code and response
status are stored.)
Automatically turns OFF if the control command execution signal (EXE signal)
from the user (PLC) turns OFF.
ZW User's Manual
EtherCAT Connection
173
Signal
Signal name
Function
SYNCFLG
Measurement
synchronization completion
Turns ON when the displacement sensor executes measurement
synchronization processing and the state changes to one where normal
measured values can be output.
Automatically turns OFF if the measurement synchronization signal (SYNC
signal) from the user (Controller) turns OFF.
READY
Ready
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor cannot execute control commands
or measurement synchronization processing.
Turns ON when the displacement sensor can execute control commands or
measurement synchronization processing.
RUN
Run screen
Turns ON when the displacement sensor is in the RUN mode.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor is in the FUN mode.
ERR
Error
Turns ON when a displacement sensor error is detected.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor is normal.
After it turns ON, it never turns OFF until the error clear signal (ERCLR signal)
from the user (Controller) turns ON.
BANKOUT1_A to E
Current bank number
This outputs the currently specified bank number.
It expresses the bank number in combinations of BANKOUTx_A to E.
(For details of combinations, see Reference.)
HOLDSTAT1
Hold execution status
Turns ON when the displacement sensor is in the hold sampling period.
RESETSTAT1
Reset execution state
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor is outside the hold sampling period.
Turns ON when the displacement sensor is in the reset execution state.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor is in the reset non-execution state.
LIGHT1
Logical beam lighting state
STABILITY1
Measurement position
Turns ON when the logical beam is lit.
Turns OFF when the logical beam is out.
Turns ON when the measured value is in the measuring range.
Turns OFF when the measured value is outside the measuring range.
ENABLE1
Measurement state
Turns ON when the displacement sensor is ready for measurement.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor cannot measure (excessive or
insufficient received light, outside measuring range, Calibration ROM not
mounted, during FUN mode non-measurement).
GATE1
Data output completed
Turns ON when the displacement sensor completes control data output when
hold is set.
The displacement sensor automatically turns OFF one Gate period after
turning ON.
OR1
Overall judgment result
Turns ON when even one of the judgment result of the displacement sensor
TASK1 to 4 is other than PASS.
Turns OFF when all of the judgment result of the displacement sensor TASK1
to 4 is PASS.
HIGH1_T1-4
HIGH output
Turns ON when the judgment result of the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is
HIGH (HIGH threshold < measured value).
Turns OFF when the judgment result of the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4
is other than HIGH.
PASS1_T1-4
PASS Output
Turns ON when the judgment result of the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is
PASS (LOW threshold  measured value  HIGH threshold).
Turns OFF when the judgment result of the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4
is other than PASS.
LOW1_T1-4
LOW output
Turns ON when the judgment result of the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is
LOW (LOW threshold > measured value).
Turns OFF when the judgment result of the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4
is other than LOW.
174
EtherCAT Connection
ZW User's Manual
Signal
Signal name
Function
ZEROSTAT1_T1-4
Zero reset state
Turns ON when the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is in the zero reset
execution state.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is in the zero reset nonexecution state.
Command code
Command code
The executed command code is returned.
Response code
Response code
The response code of the executed command is stored.
Response data
Response data
The response data of the executed command is stored.
6
Communications with External Devices
ZW User's Manual
EtherCAT Connection
175
Note
• The results of processing execution by parallel I/O also are reflected in the status signals.
• The table below shows the combinations of bank numbers and BANKOUTx_A to E.
(BANK9 to 32 are used only in the judgment value mode. In the normal mode, BANKOUTx_D to E are OFF at all times.)
176
Bank number
BANKOUTx_A
BANKOUTx_B
BANKOUTx_C
BANKOUTx_D
BANKOUTx_E
BANK1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK2
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK3
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK5
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
BANK6
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
BANK7
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
BANK8
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
BANK9
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
BANK10
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
BANK11
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
BANK12
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
BANK13
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
BANK14
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
BANK15
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
BANK16
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
BANK17
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
BANK18
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK19
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
BANK20
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
BANK21
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
BANK22
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
BANK23
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
BANK24
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
BANK25
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
BANK26
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
BANK27
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
BANK28
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
BANK29
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
BANK30
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
BANK31
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
BANK32
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
EtherCAT Connection
ZW User's Manual
● Output area
Displacement sensor (slave)  PLC (master)
Top
channel
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
+0
10
9
8
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Measurement Value of Task1
Output data 0
(32bit)
Measurement Value of Task2
Output data 1
(32bit)
Measurement Value of Task3
Output data 2
(32bit)
Measurement Value of Task4
Output data 3
(32bit)
Reserved
Output data 4
(32bit)
Reserved
Output data 5
(32bit)
Reserved
Output data 6
(32bit)
Reserved
Output data 7
(32bit)
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
Function
Measurement Value of
Task1
Measurement Value of
Task1
The measured value of TASK1 is output.
Measurement Value of
Task2
Measurement Value of
Task2
The measured value of TASK2 is output.
Measurement Value of
Task3
Measurement Value of
Task3
The measured value of TASK3 is output.
Measurement Value of
Task4
Measurement Value of
Task4
The measured value of TASK4 is output.
ZW User's Manual
Communications with External Devices
Signal name
6
Signal
EtherCAT Connection
177
I/O Memory Assignment Method (PDO Mapping)
If you connect the Displacement Sensor to a CJ-series PLC, the OMRON [email protected] Position Control Unit
is used as the EtherCAT master. This section describes the assignments in the I/O memory of the PLC for the
Command, Response, and Data Output Areas for the Vision Sensor.
The areas for the Vision Sensor correspond to the areas for the Position Control Unit as shown in the following
table.
Vision Sensor area
Position Control Unit area
Maximum number of words
Command area
Remote I/O Output Memory Area
12
Response area
Remote I/O Input Memory Area
12
Output area
Remote I/O Input Memory Area
8
The I/O memory assignment method is described below.
1. Network Settings
Double-click I/O Table and Unit Setup in the CX-Programmer, right-click [email protected], and select Edit SIO
Unit Parameters.
2. Setting Common Parameters
The Support Software for Position Control Units will start. Set the areas and the first words for the Remote I/O
Output Memory Area, the Axis Status Memory Area, and the Remote I/O Input Memory Area.
3. Checking the Remote I/O Area
Select [Network] and then click the [Remote I/O Assignment] Tab to check the I/O addresses that are set for
remote I/O. (You can manually change the input offset and output offset.) In the following example, CIO 3800 is
set as the first word of the remote I/O output area and CIO 3900 is set as the first word of the remote
I/O input area.
First address in the response
and data output areas of the ZW
178
EtherCAT Connection
First address of the command
area of the ZW
ZW User's Manual
In the case in the figure above, the memory map will be as follows.
Position Control Unit to ZW
CIO3800
ZW to Position Control Unit
CIO3900
Node 17
ZW response area (10 words)
Node 17
ZW command area (10 words)
CIO3811
CIO3812
CIO3911
Node 18
ZW command area (10 words)
Node 17
ZW data output area (16 words)
CIO3823
CIO3927
CIO3928
Node 18
ZW command area (10 words)
CIO3940
Node 18
ZW data output area (16 words)
CIO3955
Refer to the CJ-series Position Control Units Operation Manual (Cat. No. W487) for details on I/O memory
assignment methods.
6
If you connect more than one ZW Sensor to an OMRON Position Control Unit, the following addresses in the
memory map are assigned in order for the I/O areas.
Set the node address setting switches on the Sensors to 0 to automatically set up the network. Node
addresses 17 and higher will be automatically set for the remote I/O.
Communications with External Devices
For the Position Control Unit, the areas are set only for node 17 (which has the first area for each of the three
memory areas).
To access data from another node from a ladder program, add the correct offset from the first word of the first
area for node 17 and access the resulting address.
ZW User's Manual
EtherCAT Connection
179
Command List
This list explains each of the commands used by EtherCAT.
● Utility commands
Command area
Top channel (Hex)
+7
Command name
Function
Reference
(Pages)
+6
0010
3011
Data save
Saves the current system data and bank
data to the main unit.
p.181
0010
E000
Sensor Head calibration
Calibrate the Sensor Head.
p.182
0010
F010
Restart
Restarts the displacement sensor.
p.182
● Bank control command
Command area
Top channel (Hex)
+7
0030
Command name
Function
Reference
(Pages)
+6
8000
Current bank settings
Replace the current bank number by the
specified bank number.
p.183
● Data acquisition/setting commands
Command area
Top channel (Hex)
+7
180
Command name
Function
Reference
(Pages)
+6
0040
1000
Processing unit data acquisition
Acquires the measurement data and
setting data of the processing unit.
0050
1000
Processing unit data setting
Change the setting data of the processing p.186
unit.
0040
4000
System data acquisition
Acquires the system data.
p.187
0050
4000
System data settings
Sets the system data.
p.188
EtherCAT Connection
p.185
ZW User's Manual
Command details
● Data save (command code: 3011 0010)
Command (Controller  displacement sensor)
Command area
Top channel
Bit
15-12
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
+6
0011
0000
0001
0001
+7
0000
0000
0001
0000
Command code (32-bit)
Response (Controller  displacement sensor)
Response area
Top channel
Bit
15-12
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
+6
0011
0000
0001
0001
+7
0000
0000
0001
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0000
+9
0000
0000
0000
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0001
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
0000
0000
0010
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
0100
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
1000
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
ZW User's Manual
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (no
corresponding command)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (wrong
parameter)
Communications with External Devices
0000
+9
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result OK
6
+8
Command code (32-bit)
Stores the command code targeted for a
response.
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG
(processing execution error)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (mode
error)
EtherCAT Connection
181
● Sensor head calibration (command code: E000 0010)
Command (Controller  displacement sensor)
Command area
Top channel
Bit
15-12
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
+6
1110
0000
0000
0000
+7
0000
0000
0001
0000
Command code (32-bit)
Response (Controller  displacement sensor)
Response area
top channel
Bit
15-12
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
+6
1110
0000
0000
0000
+7
0000
0000
0001
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0000
+9
0000
0000
0000
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0001
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
0010
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
0100
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
1000
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
Command code (32-bit)
Stores the command code targeted for a
response.
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result OK
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (no
corresponding command)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (wrong
parameter)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG
(processing execution error)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (mode
error)
● Restart (command code: F010 0010)
Command (Controller  displacement sensor)
Command area
Top channel
Bit
15-12
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
+6
1111
0000
0001
0000
+7
0000
0000
0001
0000
Command code (32-bit)
Response (Controller  displacement sensor)
Response area
Top channel
Bit
15-12
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
There is no response since the Controller is restarted.
182
EtherCAT Connection
ZW User's Manual
● Current bank setting (command code: 8000 0030)
Command (Controller  displacement sensor)
Command area
Top channel
Bit
15-12
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
+6
1000
0000
0000
0000
+7
0000
0000
0011
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0000
Command code (32-bit)
Bank number (16-bit: value obtained by
subtracting 1 from bank number)
Note
This is set to 0 when bank 1 is
switched to.
Response (Controller  displacement sensor)
Response area
Top channel
Bit
15-12
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
1000
0000
0000
0000
+7
0000
0000
0011
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0000
+9
0000
0000
0000
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0001
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
0010
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
0100
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
1000
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
Command code (32-bit)
Stores the command code targeted for a
response.
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result OK
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (no
corresponding command)
6
+6
Communications with External Devices
ZW User's Manual
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (wrong
parameter)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG
(processing execution error)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (mode
error)
EtherCAT Connection
183
Response (Controller  displacement sensor)
Response area
Top channel
Bit
15-12
184
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
+6
1000
0000
0000
0000
+7
0000
0000
0011
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0000
+9
0000
0000
0000
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0001
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
0010
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
0100
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
1000
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
EtherCAT Connection
Command code (32-bit)
Stores the command code targeted for a
response.
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result OK
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (no
corresponding command)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (wrong
parameter)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG
(processing execution error)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (mode
error)
ZW User's Manual
● Processing unit data acquisition (command code: 1000 0040)
Command (Controller  displacement sensor)
Command area
Top channel
Bit
15-12
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
+6
0001
0000
0000
0000
+7
0000
0000
01000
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0000
Command code (32-bit)
Unit number (16-bit)
10-3 Processing Item
Data List p.384
+9
0000
0000
0000
0000
Data number (16-bit)
10-3 Processing Item
Data List p.384
Response (Controller  displacement sensor)
Response area
Top channel
Bit
15-12
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
+6
0001
0000
0000
0000
+7
0000
0000
0100
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0000
+9
0000
0000
0000
0000
+10
0000
0000
0000
0000
+11
0000
0000
0000
0000
Command code (32-bit)
Stores the command code targeted for a
response.
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result OK
Response data (32-bit)
Acquired data
6
0000
0000
0000
0001
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
0010
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
0100
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
1000
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
ZW User's Manual
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (no
corresponding command)
Communications with External Devices
+8
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (wrong
parameter)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG
(processing execution error)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (mode
error)
EtherCAT Connection
185
● Processing unit data setting (command code: 1000 0050)
Command (Controller  displacement sensor)
Command area
Top channel
Bit
15-12
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
+6
0001
0000
0000
0000
+7
0000
0000
0101
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0000
Command code (32-bit)
Unit number (16-bit)
10-3 Processing Item
Data List p.384
+9
0000
0000
0000
0000
Data number (16-bit)
10-3 Processing Item
Data List p.384
+10
0000
0000
0000
0000
+11
0000
0000
0000
0000
Setting data (UDINT)
Response (Controller  displacement sensor)
Response area
Top channel
Bit
15-12
186
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
+6
0001
0000
0000
0000
+7
0000
0000
0101
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0000
+9
0000
0000
0000
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0001
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
0010
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
0100
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
1000
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
EtherCAT Connection
Command code (32-bit)
Stores the command code targeted for a
response.
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result OK
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (no
corresponding command)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (wrong
parameter)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG
(processing execution error)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (mode
error)
ZW User's Manual
● System data acquisition (command code: 4000 0040)
Command (Controller  displacement sensor)
Command area
Top channel
Bit
15-12
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
+6
0100
0000
0000
0000
+7
0000
0000
0100
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0000
Command code (32-bit)
See data number (16-bit).
10-3 Processing Item
Data List p.384
Response (Controller  displacement sensor)
Response area
Top channel
Bit
15-12
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
+6
0100
0000
0000
0000
+7
0000
0000
0100
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0000
+9
0000
0000
0000
0000
+10
0000
0000
0000
0000
+11
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0001
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
0010
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
0100
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
1000
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result OK
Response data (32-bit)
Acquired data
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (no
corresponding command)
6
+8
Command code (32-bit)
Stores the command code targeted for a
response.
Communications with External Devices
ZW User's Manual
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (wrong
parameter)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG
(processing execution error)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (mode
error)
EtherCAT Connection
187
● System data setting (command code: 4000 0050)
Command (Controller  displacement sensor)
Command area
Top channel
Bit
15-12
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
+6
0100
0000
0000
0000
+7
0000
0000
0101
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0000
Command code (32-bit)
Data number (16-bit)
10-4 System data list
p.388
+9
0000
0000
0000
0000
Fixed at "0"
+10
0000
0000
0000
0000
Setting data (32-bit)
+11
0000
0000
0000
0000
Response (Controller  displacement sensor)
Response area
Top channel
Bit
15-12
188
11-8
Description
7-4
3-0
+6
0100
0000
0000
0000
+7
0000
0000
0101
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0000
+9
0000
0000
0000
0000
+8
0000
0000
0000
0001
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
0010
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
0100
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
+8
0000
0000
0000
1000
+9
1111
1111
1111
1111
EtherCAT Connection
Command code (32-bit)
Stores the command code targeted for a
response.
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result OK
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (no
corresponding command)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (wrong
parameter)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG
(processing execution error)
Response code (32-bit)
Command execution result NG (mode
error)
ZW User's Manual
Timing Chart (EtherCAT)
● Control command execution
Command Code
ON
OFF
Command
Area
Command
Parameter
EXE input
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Command Code
OFF
ON
READY output
OFF
ON
Response
Area
Response Code
Response Data
OFF
ON
OFF
FLG output
ON
OFF
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
(5) (6) (7)
EtherCAT Connection
Communications with External Devices
ZW User's Manual
6
(1) The command code and command parameter are set from the Controller.
(2) The EXE input signal state is changed from OFF to ON. Execution is instructed to the displacement sensor.
(3) When the displacement sensor receives the execution instruction, the READY output signal turns OFF and
the command is executed.
(4) When the displacement sensor completes execution, the command code, response code and response
data are set.
(5) The FLG output signal turns ON.
(6) The Controller makes sure that the FLG output signal has turned ON, and then returns the EXE input signal
to OFF.
(7) The displacement sensor makes sure that the EXE input signal has turned OFF, and the FLG and READY
output signals automatically turn OFF and ON, respectively.
189
● Measurement synchronization
Command
Area
ON
SYNC input
OFF
ON
Displacement
sensor 1
OFF
Displacement
Sensor 2
OFF
Exposure
timing
ON
ON
SYNCFLG output
OFF
Response
Area
ON
READY output
OFF
(1) (2)
(3)
(4) (5) (6)
(1) The Controller changes the state of the SYNC input signal from OFF to ON.
(2) When receives the SYNC input signal, the displacement sensor turns off the READY output signal, and
starts the measurement synchronization processing.
(3) All displacement sensors that have received the SYNC input signal are synchronized with the end of
exposure and measurement is resumed.
(4) After the end of synchronization, the displacement sensor changes the state of the SYNCFLG output signal
from OFF to ON.
(5) The Controller makes sure that the SYNCFLG output signal has turned ON, and then changes the state of
the SYNC input signal from ON to OFF.
(6) The displacement sensor makes sure that the SYNC input signal has turned OFF, and the SYNCFLG and
READY output signals automatically turn OFF and ON, respectively.
Important
• Be particularly careful of the following points when synchronizing measurement.
- When the exposure time control mode is automatic: Set the exposure time upper limit the same for all
displacement sensors for which measurement is to be synchronized.
- When the exposure time control mode is fixed: Set the exposure time the same for all displacement sensors for
which measurement is to be synchronized.
• By way of reference, the time from acceptance of the SYNC input up to when SYNCFLG output turns ON becomes
"currently set exposure time upper limit + 720 s".
• After multiple displacement sensors are synchronized, they gradually go out of sync. At most 1 s of difference
generates EtherCAT communication between the slave. Input SYNC input signals periodically. The maximum
deviation time can be calculated with the following formula.
Difference in EtherCAT + Exposure time (maximum) × 2 × Average number of repetitions × 24 ppm
Example: Exposure time (maximum): 1 ms, average number of repetitions: 64
1 s + 1 ms × 2 × 64 × 24/1000000 = 4.072 s
The maximum deviation time will be 4.072 s.
• The displacement sensor starts resetting the filtering process after receiving a SYNC signal. If the average number
is set to 128 times, please note that the measurement value will not be finalized until the measurement is done 128
times. You can check whether the measurement value is finalized if either of HIGH, PASS or LOW signal turns on in
the response area.
190
EtherCAT Connection
ZW User's Manual
● Execution of hold (peak/bottom/peak to peak/average) and reset of hold value
TIMINGx input
Command
Area
RESETx input
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
HOLDSTATx
output
OFF
RESETSTATx
output
OFF
Output
area
ON
ON
ON
GATEx output
Measurement
Value of Task
OFF
ON
OFF
(1) (2)
(3) (4) (5) (6)
(7) (8)
(9) (10) (11) (12)
6
(1) The Controller changes the state of the TIMINGx input signal from OFF to ON. At the rising edge of the
TIMINGx input signal, the displacement sensor starts sampling.
(2) At start of sampling, the displacement sensor changes the state of the HOLDSTATx output signal from OFF
to ON.
(3) The Controller turns the state of the TIMINGx input signal from ON to OFF. At the falling edge of the
TIMINGx input signal, the displacement sensor end sampling.
(4) At end of sampling, the displacement sensor changes the state of the HOLDSTATx output signal from ON to
OFF.
(5) When the hold value is applied, the displacement sensor changes the state of the GATEx output signal from
OFF to ON. The Controller makes sure that the GATEx output signal has turned ON, and then captures the
output data.
(6) The displacement sensor turns OFF after the GATE signal ON duration has elapsed since the GATEx
output signal turned ON.
(7) The Controller changes the state of the RESETx input signal from OFF to ON. At the rising edge of the
RESETx input signal, the displacement sensor starts the measured value reset period.
(8) At the start of the measured value reset period, the displacement sensor changes the state of the
RESETSTATx output signal from OFF to ON.
(9) At completion of the measured value reset, the displacement sensor changes the state of the GATEx output
signal from OFF to ON.
(10) The displacement sensor turns OFF after the GATE signal ON duration has elapsed since the GATEx
output signal turned ON.
(11) The Controller changes the state of the RESETx input signal from ON to OFF. At the falling edge of the
RESETx input signal, the displacement sensor end the measured value reset period.
(12) At the end of the measured value reset period, the displacement sensor changes the state of the
RESETSTATx output signal from ON to OFF.
Communications with External Devices
Important
When hold is being performed by multiple tasks, HOLDSTATx output signal turns ON when even one task enters the
sampling period and GATEx output signal turns ON when the measured value is applied.
ZW User's Manual
EtherCAT Connection
191
● Execution of hold (auto peak, auto bottom, auto peak to peak) and reset of hold value
Command
Area
RESETx input
ON
OFF
ON
HOLDSTATx
output
OFF
RESETSTATx
output
OFF
ON
Output
area
ON
GATEx output
Measurement
Value of Task
OFF
ON
OFF
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
(5) (6) (7) (8)
(1) When the peak value is applied, the displacement sensor changes the state of the GATEx output signal
from OFF to ON. The Controller makes sure that the GATEx output signal has turned ON, and then
captures the output data.
(2) The displacement sensor turns OFF after the GATE signal ON duration has elapsed since the GATEx
output signal turned ON.
(3) The Controller turns the state of the RESETx input signal from OFF to ON. At the rising edge of the
RESETx input signal, the displacement sensor starts the measured value reset period.
(4) At the start of the measured value reset period, the displacement sensor changes the state of the
HOLDSTATx output signal from ON to OFF and the RESETSTATx from OFF to ON.
(5) At completion of the measured value reset, the displacement sensor changes the state of the GATEx output
signal from OFF to ON.
(6) The displacement sensor turns OFF after the GATE signal ON duration has elapsed since the GATEx
output signal turned ON.
(7) The Controller changes the state of the RESETx input signal from ON to OFF. At the falling edge of the
RESETx input signal, the displacement sensor end the measured value reset period.
(8) At the end of the measured value reset period, the displacement sensor changes the state of the
HOLDSTATx output signal from OFF to ON and the RESETSTATx from ON to OFF.
Important
When hold is being performed by multiple tasks, HOLDSTATx output signal turns ON when even one task enters the
sampling period and GATEx output signal turns ON when the measured value is applied.
192
EtherCAT Connection
ZW User's Manual
● Execution of hold (sample) and reset of hold value
TIMINGx input
Command
Area
ON
OFF
ON
RESETx input
OFF
ON
HOLDSTATx
output
OFF
RESETSTATx
output
OFF
Output
area
ON
ON
GATEx output
Measurement
Value of Task
OFF
ON
OFF
(1) (2)
(3) (4) (5) (6)
(7) (8)
(9) (10)(11) (12)
6
(1) The Controller changes the state of the TIMINGx input signal from OFF to ON. At the rising edge of the
TIMINGx input signal, the displacement sensor starts sampling.
(2) At start of sampling, the displacement sensor changes the state of the HOLDSTATx output signal from OFF
to ON.
(3) When the hold value is applied, the displacement sensor changes the state of the GATEx output signal from
OFF to ON. The Controller makes sure that the GATEx output signal has turned ON, and then captures the
output data.
(4) The displacement sensor turns OFF after the GATE signal ON duration has elapsed since the GATEx
output signal turned ON.
(5) The Controller turns the state of the TIMINGx input signal from ON to OFF. At the falling edge of the
TIMINGx input signal, the displacement sensor end sampling.
(6) At end of sampling, the displacement sensor changes the state of the HOLDSTATx output signal from ON to
OFF.
(7) The Controller changes the state of the RESETx input signal from OFF to ON. At the rising edge of the
RESETx input signal, the displacement sensor starts the measured value reset period.
(8) At the start of the measured value reset period, the displacement sensor changes the state of the
RESETSTATx output signal from OFF to ON.
(9) At completion of the measured value reset, the displacement sensor changes the state of the GATEx output
signal from OFF to ON.
(10) The displacement sensor turns OFF after the GATE signal ON duration has elapsed since the GATEx
output signal turned ON.
(11) The Controller changes the state of the RESETx input signal from ON to OFF. At the falling edge of the
RESETx input signal, the displacement sensor end the measured value reset period.
(12) At the end of the measured value reset period, the displacement sensor changes the state of the
RESETSTATx output signal from ON to OFF.
Communications with External Devices
Important
When hold is being performed by multiple tasks, HOLDSTATx output signal turns ON when even one task enters the
sampling period and GATEx output signal turns ON when the measured value is applied.
ZW User's Manual
EtherCAT Connection
193
● Measurement LED out
Command
Area
LIGHTOFFx input
Response
area
LIGHTx output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) The Controller changes the state of the LIGHTOFFx input signal from OFF to ON. At the rising edge of the
LIGHTOFFx input signal, the displacement sensor turns the measurement LED out.
(2) At measurement LED out, the displacement sensor changes the state of the LIGHTx output signal from ON
to OFF.
(3) The Controller turns the state of the LIGHTOFFx input signal from ON to OFF. At the falling edge of the
LIGHTOFFx input signal, the displacement sensor lights the measurement LED.
(4) At measurement LED on, the displacement sensor returns the LIGHTx output signal to ON.
● Zero reset execution/zero reset cancel
ON
ZEROx input
OFF
Command
Area
Response
area
ZEROCLRx input
ZEROSTATx
output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) The Controller changes the state of the ZEROx_T1 to 4 input signals from OFF to ON. The displacement
sensor makes sure that ZEROx_T1 to 4 input signals have turned ON, and then executes the zero reset.
(2) At execution of zero reset, the displacement sensor changes the state of the ZEROSTATx_T1 to 4 output
signal from OFF to ON.
(3) The Controller makes sure that the ZEROSTATx_T1 to 4 output signals have turned ON, and then returns
the ZEROx_T1 to 4 input signals to OFF.
(4) The Controller changes the state of the ZEROCLRx_T1 to 4 input signals from OFF to ON. The
displacement sensor makes sure that ZEROCLRx_T1 to 4 input signals have turned ON, and then executes
the zero reset cancel.
(5) At the zero reset cancel, the displacement sensor returns the ZEROSTATx_T1 to 4 output signals to ON.
(6) The Controller makes sure that the ZEROSTATx_T1 to 4 output signals have turned OFF, and then returns
the ZEROCLRx_T1 to 4 input signals to OFF.
194
EtherCAT Connection
ZW User's Manual
Sample Ladder Program (EtherCAT)
● Command/Response Communications
The following sample program is used to perform replacement the current bank number.
The replacement the current bank number command (lower bytes: #8000, upper bytes: #0030) is sent to the
Displacement Sensor.
First RUN
Period Flag
MOVE
DINT#16#00308000
Execution
condition
Control Command
Completed
(E001_FLG)
EN
ENO
In
Out
Command
Execution Ready
(E001_READY)
Sets the replacement the
current bank number command.
E001_Command
Command Execution Bit
(E001_EXE)
S
Control Command
Completed
(E001_FLG)
Turns ON Command Execution Bit.
Command Execution Bit
(E001_EXE)
R
When the control command
is completed, the Command
Execution Bit is turned OFF.
Important
Create the ladder program to control the EXE signal so that it does not turn ON while the READY signal is ON.
If not, a EXE input error will occur and the ERR signal will turn ON.
6
Communications with External Devices
ZW User's Manual
EtherCAT Connection
195
Sysmac Device Features
The control device product designed according to standardized communications and user interface
specifications for OMRON control devices are called a Sysmac Device.
And the features available with such a Device is called Sysmac Device Features.
This section describes the features the ZW series Displacement Sensor provides when combined with a
Machine Automation Controller such as NJ series and automation software.
Sysmac Error Status
Because, in Sysmac Devices, errors that may occur in slaves are systematized, you can check the causes and
remedies for errors with a common procedure.
The status of an error can be monitored in the Sysmac Error Status (2002-01 hex). To display the error status
detected by the FQ-M series Vision Sensor in Sysmac Studio, the Sysmac Error Status (2002-01 hex) must be
mapped to the PDO. Sysmac Studio, by default, uses the 512th transmit PDO Mapping assignment to map the
Sysmac Error Status (2002-01 hex) automatically to the PDO.
Note
• For the Sysmac Error status (2002-01 hex), refer to 10-5 Object Dictionary p.390.
• For errors displayed in Sysmac Studio, refer to NJ-series Troubleshooting Manual (Cat. No. W503).
Saving the Node Address Setting
When the node address switch setting is “00” (Software Setup mode), the node address value you set in Sysmac
Studio is enabled. If the node address switches are set to any other value, the value that is set on the switches is used
as the node address.
In the Software Setup mode, in Sysmac Studio, execute [Write Slave Node Address] on the [EtherCAT Edit] screen to
save the slave node address setting in the nonvolatile memory of the ZW series Displacement Sensor.
● Software Setting
The set value saved as Slave Information Interface (SII) information in the nonvolatile memory of the slave is the node
address.
EtherCAT master
(4)
(5)
EtherCAT
Slave Controller
Nonvolatile
memory
SII
(2)
Register : 0010h
Register : 0012h
(3)
(1) Node Address
Switch
EtherCAT Slave
196
EtherCAT Connection
(1) The Node Address Switch is set to “00” at
power OFF.
(2) Write a node address set value to Slave SII
from the master.
(3) The value of the node address setting is applied
to Register: 0012 hex by the software, when the
slave power is ON.
(4) EtherCAT master reads the set value of
Register: 0012 hex.
(5) EtherCAT master writes the value of 0012 hex
address to 0010 hex address as the node
address value.
ZW User's Manual
● Node Address Switch Setting
The value set on the node address switches is the node address.
EtherCAT master
(3)
(4)
Nonvolatile
memory
SII
EtherCAT
Slave Controller
Register : 0010h
Register : 0012h
(2)
(1) Node Address
Switch
(1) The Node Address Switch is set at power OFF.
(2) The value of Node Address Switch is applied to
Register: 0012 hex, when the slave power is
ON.
(3) EtherCAT master reads the set value of
Register: 0012 hex.
(4) EtherCAT master writes the value of 0012 hex
address to 0010 hex address as the node
address value.
EtherCAT Slave
Serial Number Display
The serial number saved in the nonvolatile memory of the Displacement Sensor is displayed in the Serial
Number (1018-04 hex). Controllers that support Sysmac Device Features can use this serial number to check
the network configuration. To enable this check, in Sysmac Studio, set [Serial No. Check Condition] to [Set
Value = Actual Unit] on the [EtherCAT Edit] screen. If the set condition is not met, a Network Configuration
Check Error will occur.
Note
6
Communications with External Devices
This network configuration check detects any slave devices that have been replaced, which prevents you from
forgetting to set parameters on those slaves.
Compliance with ESI Specification (ETG.2000 S (R) V1.0.1)
The ESI Specification is a set of specifications that define the entries required in an EtherCAT Slave
Information (ESI) file.
SII Data Check
The Slave Information Interface (SII) is an interface area in the nonvolatile memory of an EtherCAT slave that
stores the configuration information specific to that EtherCAT slave.
Sysmac Device EtherCAT slaves check the SII information from the slave side.
If one of these slaves finds that SII information with which it cannot operate was written, it generates an SII
Check Error (Error No. 88.3).If this error persists even after turning OFF and then ON the power again, contact
your OMRON sales representative.
Important
Do not use third-party or any other configuration tools to edit the SII information.
ZW User's Manual
EtherCAT Connection
197
6-3 EtherNet/IP Connection
Introduction to EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP is an industrial multi-vendor network that uses Ethernet.
The EtherNet/IP specifications are open standards managed by the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor
Association). EtherNet/IP is used by a wide range of industrial devices.
Because EtherNet/IP uses standard Ethernet technology, various general-purpose Ethernet devices can be
used in the network.
EtherNet/IP has mainly the following features.
● High-speed, High-capacity Data Exchange through Tag Data Links
The EtherNet/IP protocol supports implicit communications, which allows cyclic communications called tag
data links with EtherNet/IP devices.
● Tag Data Links at Specified Communications Cycle for Each Application Regardless of the Number
of Nodes
Tag data links (cyclic communications) operate at the cyclic period that is specified for each application,
regardless of the number of nodes. Data is exchanged over the network at the refresh cycle that is set for each
connection. The communications refresh cycle will not increase even if the number of nodes is increased, i.e.,
the concurrency of the connection’s data is maintained.
Because the refresh cycle can be set for each connection, each application can communicate at its ideal
refresh cycle. For example, interprocess interlocks can be transferred at high speed, while the production
commands and the status monitor information are transferred at low speed.
Important
On a network to which many devices are connected, performance may drop (e.g., responses may be delayed or
packets lost) or communications errors may occur when there is temporarily high traffic on the network. Test the
operation under actual conditions before you start actual operation of the system.
198
EtherNet/IP Connection
ZW User's Manual
Data Exchange with EtherNet/IP
Data is exchanged cyclically between Ethernet devices on the EtherNet/IP network using tag data links as
shown below.
Connection from
ZW to PLC
Originator
Target
PLC
Displacement Sensor
Input tag set name: A
Connection
Tag: D0
Output tag set name: B
Connection from
ZW to FQ2
Output tag set name:
Input_101
Tag: Input_101
Connection
Tag: D100
Input tag set name:
Output_100
Tag:
Output_100
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
● Data Exchange Method
6
To exchange data, a connection is opened between two EtherNet/IP devices.
One of the nodes requests the connection to open a connection with a remote node.
The node that requests the connection is called the originator, and the node that receives the request is called
the target.
Communications with External Devices
● Data Exchange Memory Locations
The memory locations that are used to exchange data across a connection are specified as tags.
You can specify memory addresses or variables for tags.
A group of tags consists of an output tag set and an input tag set.
ZW User's Manual
EtherNet/IP Connection
199
ZW Communications for EtherNet/IP Connections
You can use EtherNet/IP tag data links to communicate between the PLC and the Displacement Sensor to
perform control via command/response communications or to output data after measurements.
The ZW complies with EtherNet/IP conformance test version A9.
To connect to OMRON Controllers and communicate through EtherNet/IP, you use the Network Configurator to
set up tag data links (i.e., tags, tag sets, and connection settings).
Refer to the following manuals for details on the tag data link settings that are made with the Network
Configurator.
• NJ-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherNet/IP Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W506)
• CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units Operation Manual (Cat. No. W465)
• CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units Operation Manual for NJ-series CPU Unit (Cat. No. W495)
Types of Communications
● Command/Response Communications
With EtherNet/IP communications, cyclic tag data link communications are performed with the connections that
are set between the PLC and Displacement Sensor.
Command/response control signals are handled by storing control commands from the PLC to the
Displacement Sensor and responses from the Displacement Sensor to the PLC in the I/O memory of the PLC.
This allows you to control the operation of the Displacement Sensor (e.g., perform continuous measurements
or change the scene) without using special communications instructions.
• Input Connection to Sensor (PLC to Displacement Sensor)
The commands that are stored in the I/O memory of the PLC are sent to the Displacement Sensor.
• Output Connection to PLC (Displacement Sensor to PLC)
Responses from the Displacement Sensor to the control commands are stored in the PLC I/O memory addresses
or variables that are specified for the response area.
PLC
CPU Unit
Displacement Sensor
I/O memory or variables
(communications areas)
• TIMING input
• Bank number switching, etc.
Input connection to Sensor
Command
Command area
Response area
Response
Output connection to PLC
OK, etc.
EtherNet/IP (tag data links)
To send a control command, you write a control command to the command area (i.e., a variable or I/O memory
address in the PLC) that is specified for the output tag, and then turn ON the Command Execution (EXE) Bit.
As a result, the control command is sent through the input connection from the PLC to the Displacement
Sensor.
A control command does not need to be sent to execute measurements for the TRIG bit.
The measurement is executed simply by turning ON the TRIG bit.
The Displacement Sensor executes the control command and sends a response back to the PLC through the
output connection from the Displacement Sensor to the PLC.
The PLC stores the response in the response area (i.e., I/O memory addresses or variable) that is specified for
the input tag in the PLC.
200
EtherNet/IP Connection
ZW User's Manual
● Data Output after Measurements
Immediately after the measured value has been applied, the measured value data of each task is output
automatically to the specified I/O memory of the PLC specified to the input tag.
PLC
EtherNet/IP built-in unit
Displacement Sensor
I/O memory or variables
(communications areas)
Output connection to PLC
Output area
Data
Automatic output of measured
value data of each task
EtherNet/IP (tag data links)
To output data, specify the I/O memory area or a variable (output area) on the PLC for storing that data in
advance to the input tag.
6
Communications with External Devices
ZW User's Manual
EtherNet/IP Connection
201
Types of Communications Areas
For EtherNet/IP communications, the following three communications areas are used in the PLC to perform
communications.
Areas Used for the Different Control Methods
Command/
response communications
(1) Command area
This is the area to which you write control commands for the
Displacement Sensor to execute.
(2) Response area
This is the area to which the Displacement Sensor writes the
results of control commands executed from the command area.
Data output method after
(3) Output area
application of measured value
The area to which the displacement sensor writes the measured
value data of each task after application of the measured value.
PLC
Displacement Sensor
Input Tag Set
Output Tag Set
Output Tags
(1) Command area
Input
connection
to Sensor
The following control
commands are written to the
Displacement Sensor.
Command
The control commands that are
written to the Command Area
are executed.
• Control inputs
• Command code
• Command parameters
24 bytes
Execution
Input Tag Set
Output Tag Set
Input Tags*1
(2) Response area
Output
connection
to PLC
The execution results
from the Displacement
Sensor are written here.
(3) Output area
Output data from the
Displacement Sensor is
written here.
*1
202
Response
Measurement results are
written to the response area
in the PLC.
• Control outputs
• Command code
• Response code
• Response data
24bytes
After applying measured value
Measurement results are
written to the output area.
32bytes
The response area (2) and output area (3) are assigned to continuous memory addresses or to a variable.
EtherNet/IP Connection
ZW User's Manual
Connectable Controller Models
Series
CPU Unit
Interface
Built-in port in CPU Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit
SYSMAC NJ
NJ501 or NJ301
Compatible
CJ1W-EIP21
SYSMAC CJ2
CJ2H or CJ2M
Compatible (model with built-in
port only)
CJ1W-EIP21
SYSMAC CJ1
CJ1H or CJ1G
---
CJ1W-EIP21
CJ1M
---
CJ1W-EIP21
CS1H, CS1D, or CS1G
---
CS1W-EIP21
SYSMAC CS
Setting Communications Specifications (EtherNet/IP)
Network Settings of the Sensor
This section describes how to set the network settings in the Displacement Sensor.
 Explorer pane
 Edit Pane
: [Device group] | Sensor name | [System] | [System data] (Double-click)
: [Ethernet communication settings] Icon | [Ethernet settings]
6
Communications with External Devices
The following items can be set.
Item
Description
Setting range
IP address
Set the IP address of the Displacement Sensor.
a.b.c.d
a: 1 to 223, b: 0 to 255,
c: 0 to 255, d: to 254
(Default: 192.168.250.50)
Subnet mask
Set the subnet mask.
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
Default Gateway
Sets the default gateway.
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
ZW User's Manual
EtherNet/IP Connection
203
Note
The network settings of the sensor can also be set with key operations on the Sensor Controller.
Network Settings of the Sensor p.350
Switch to EtherNet/IP communication
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
1
: [Device group] | Sensor name | [System] |
[System data] (Double-click)
: [Ethernet Communications Settings] icon (
)
Select [Ethernet/IP] at [Fieldbus].
Important
To enable the settings, restart the Controller.
Note
The setting of default settings for EtherNet/IP communications can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor
Controller.
Network Settings of the Sensor p.350
204
EtherNet/IP Connection
ZW User's Manual
Tag Data Link Setting Methods
This section describes how to set data links for EtherNet/IP.
The communications areas in the PLC for which data links are created to the Sensor are specified as tags and
tag sets, and the connections are set for tag data link communications.
Tags, tag sets, and connections are set from the Network Configurator.
Refer to the following manuals for details on the tag data link settings that are made with the Network
Configurator.
• NJ-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherNet/IP Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W506)
• CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units Operation Manual (Cat. No. W465)
• CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units Operation Manual for NJ-series CPU Unit (Cat. No. W495)
Important
• To connect the ZW to an NJ/CJ-series CPU Unit, install the EDS file that defines the connection information for the
ZW in the Network Configurator. Download the EDS file from the OMRON website.
• After tag data links are set, the Displacement Sensor will automatically be restarted to enable the settings.
Tags, Tag Sets, and Connection Settings
The communications areas in the PLC are set as tag data link connections as shown in the following table.
• Tag and Tag Set Settings in the PLC
Parameter
Settings
Type of tags and tag set
Output tag set
Input tag set
Tag and tag set names
I/O memory addresses or variable names
I/O memory addresses or variable names*1
Data size
24 bytes
56 bytes (total size of response area and output area)
*1
Communications with External Devices
Response area and output area
6
Command area
Specify the I/O memory address of the first word in the response area.
The output area is assigned immediately after the response area.
If you specify a variable name, the variable is assigned for both the response area and output area.
Refer to Accessing Communications Areas Using Variables with NJ-series Controllers on p. 213 for information on how to access the
signals in the communications areas from the user program when variables are assigned.
ZW User's Manual
EtherNet/IP Connection
205
● Settings in the ZW (Device Parameter Settings)
Parameter name
Value
Setting range
001 Input Size
The total size of response area and output area
56
002 Output Size
The data size of command area
24
The requested packet interval
10000
003
RPI*
* The packet interval (RPI) is set in the connection settings between the PLC and the Sensor. No setting is required here.
1
2
206
Right-click the ZW in the network on the Network Configurator and select [Parameter] - [Edit].
The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed. Make the required settings.
EtherNet/IP Connection
ZW User's Manual
● Connection Settings
Parameter
Originator device (PLC)
Setting
Input tag set
Connection type
Target device (Displacement
Sensor)
*2
Any (default: multi-cast connection)*1
Output tag set
PLC_tag_set_name-[20Byte]
Output tag set
Input_101-[**Byte]
**: This is the total size of the response area and output area
that you set.
Input tag set
Output_100-[20Byte]
Any (default: 20.0)*2
Packet interval (RPI)
*1
PLC_tag_set_name-[**Byte]
**: This is the total size of the response area and output area
that you set.
If multi-cast connections are used, however, use an Ethernet switch that has multi-cast filtering, unless the tag set is received by all nodes
in the network.
Set the same value as you set for the refreshing task period in the EtherNet/IP communications settings.
Important
• If I/O memory addresses are specified for the communications areas, the information in the communications areas
will be cleared when the operating mode of the PLC changes unless addresses in the CIO Area, which are
maintained, are specified.
• The following assembly object is required to specify instances when the EDS file is not used.
Assembly Object Settings
Parameter name
Setting
Remarks
Instance ID
100
Output connection
101
Input connection
6
Communications with External Devices
ZW User's Manual
EtherNet/IP Connection
207
Memory Assignments and Commands
Memory assignments
The following describes assignment of input connection instruction area to the sensor, output connection
response area to the PLC and the output area.
● Input connection (PLC (originator)) to sensor  Displacement sensor (target)
• Instruction area
Top
channel
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
+0
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved EXE Sensor head
+1
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved ERCLR
+2
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved LIGHT RESET1 TIMING1 Sensor head
OFF1
1 control
+3
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO1 ZERO1 ZERO1 ZERO1 signal(32bit)
CLR_T4 CLR_T3 CLR_T2 CLR1_T1 _T4
_T3
_T2
_T1
+4
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Extended
+5
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
+6
Command code
Command
code (32bit)
+8
Parameter 1
Parameter 1
(16bit)
+9
Parameter 2
Parameter 2
(16bit)
+10
Parameter 3
Parameter 3
(32bit)
+7
+11
common control
signal (32bit)
area (32bit)
Signal
Signal name
Function
EXE
Control command execution
Turns ON when the user (PLC) instructs execution of control commands to the
displacement sensor.
(Turns ON after the control command code and parameters are set.)
Is returned to OFF on condition (input condition) that the user (PLC) turns the
control command completion signal (FLG signal) from the displacement
sensor ON.
ERCLR
Error clear
Turns ON when the displacement sensor error signal (ERR signal) turns OFF.
Is returned to OFF on condition (input condition) that the user (PLC) turns the
error signal (ERR signal) OFF.
TIMING1
Timing
Turns ON when the user (PLC) instructs start of hold sampling to the
displacement sensor.
Turns OFF when the user (PLC) instructs end of hold sampling to the
displacement sensor.
RESET1
Reset
Turns ON when the user (PLC) instructs judgment processing and output
reset to the displacement sensor.
If the hold function is used, the state in effect before the hold function was set
will be restored.
Turns OFF when the user (PLC) ends judgment processing and output reset
to the displacement sensor.
208
EtherNet/IP Connection
ZW User's Manual
Signal
Signal name
Function
LIGHTOFF1
Light metering OFF
Turns ON when the user (PLC) instructs logical beam OFF to the
displacement sensor.
Turns OFF when the user (PLC) instructs logical beam ON to the
displacement sensor.
ZERO1_T1 to 4
Zero reset execution
Turns ON when the user (PLC) instructs execution of zero reset of TASK1 to 4
to the displacement sensor.
Is returned to OFF on condition (input condition) that the user (PLC) turns the
zero reset completion signal (ZEROSTAT signal) from the displacement
sensor ON.
ZEROCLR1_T1 to 4
Zero reset cancel
Turns ON when the user (PLC) instructs zero reset cancel of TASK1 to 4 to
the displacement sensor.
Is returned to OFF on condition (input condition) that the user (PLC) turns the
zero reset completion signal (ZEROSTAT signal) from the displacement
sensor OFF.
Command code
Command code
Stores the command code.
Parameter 1-3
Command parameter
Stores the command parameter.
Note
• In the FUN mode, control signals other than ERCLR cannot be executed.
• Multiple control signals cannot be executed in the same cycle. Note, however, that when zero reset execution/
cancellation are performed simultaneously on multiple tasks, ZEROx_T1 to 4 and ZEROCLRx_T1 to 4 can be
executed in the same cycle.
• When the status of control signals differs from that of the input status of parallel I/O, processing is executed of one
of the statuses is ON.
● Output connection (displacement sensor (originator)) to PLC  PLC (target)
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
+0
BANK1 BANK1 BANK1 BANK1 BANK1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved RUN Reserved READY Reserved FLG Sensor head
_E
_D
_C
_B
_A
common control
+1
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved ERR signal (32bit)
+2
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved OR1 GATE1 ENABLE STABIL LIGHT1 RESET HOLD Sensor head
1
ITY1
STAT1 STAT1 1 control
+3
LOW1 PASS1 HIGH1 LOW1 PASS1 HIGH1 LOW1 PASS1 HIGH1 LOW1 PASS1 HIGH1 ZERO
ZERO
ZERO
ZERO signal (32bit)
_T4
_T4
_T4
_T3
_T3
_T3
_T2
_T2
_T2
_T1
_T1
_T1 STAT1_T4 STAT1_T3 STAT1_T2 STAT1_T1
+4
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Extended
+5
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
+6
Command code
Command
code (32bit)
Response code
Response
code (32bit)
Response data
Response
data (32bit)
+7
+8
+9
+10
+11
Communications with External Devices
Top
channel
6
• Response area
area (32bit)
Signal
Signal name
Function
FLG
Control command
completion
Turns ON when the displacement sensor completes control command execution.
(Turns ON after the control command code, response code and response status are
stored.)
Automatically turns OFF if the control command execution signal (EXE signal) from the
user (PLC) turns OFF.
ZW User's Manual
EtherNet/IP Connection
209
Signal
Signal name
Function
READY
Ready
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor cannot execute control commands.
Turns ON when the displacement sensor can execute control commands.
RUN
Run screen
Turns ON when the displacement sensor is in the RUN mode.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor is in the FUN mode.
ERR
Error
Turns ON when a displacement sensor error is detected.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor is normal.
After it turns ON, it never turns OFF until the error clear signal (ERCLR signal) from the
user (Controller) turns ON.
BANKOUT1_A to
E
Current bank number This outputs the currently specified bank number.
It expresses the bank number in combinations of BANKOUTx_A to E.
(For details of combinations, see Reference.)
HOLDSTAT1
Hold execution status Turns ON when the displacement sensor is in the hold sampling period.
RESETSTAT1
Reset execution state Turns ON when the displacement sensor is in the reset execution state.
LIGHT1
Logical beam lighting Turns ON when the logical beam is lit.
state
Turns OFF when the logical beam is out.
STABILITY1
Measurement
position
Turns ON when the measured value is in the measuring range.
ENABLE1
Measurement state
Turns ON when the displacement sensor is ready for measurement.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor is outside the hold sampling period.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor is in the reset non-execution state.
Turns OFF when the measured value is outside the measuring range.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor cannot measure (excessive or insufficient
received light, outside measuring range, Calibration ROM not mounted, during FUN mode
non-measurement).
GATE1
Data output
completed
Turns ON when the displacement sensor completes control data output when hold is set.
OR1
Overall judgment
result
Turns ON when even one of the judgment result of the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is
other than PASS.
The displacement sensor automatically turns OFF one Gate period after turning ON.
Turns OFF when all of the judgment result of the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is
PASS.
HIGH1_T1-4
HIGH output
Turns ON when the judgment result of the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is HIGH
(HIGH threshold < measured value).
Turns OFF when the judgment result of the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is other than
HIGH.
PASS1_T1-4
PASS Output
Turns ON when the judgment result of the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is PASS (LOW
threshold  measured value  HIGH threshold).
Turns OFF when the judgment result of the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is other than
PASS.
LOW1_T1-4
LOW output
Turns ON when the judgment result of the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is LOW (LOW
threshold > measured value).
Turns OFF when the judgment result of the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is other than
LOW.
ZEROSTAT1_T1-4 Zero reset state
Turns ON when the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is in the zero reset execution state.
Turns OFF when the displacement sensor TASK1 to 4 is in the zero reset non-execution
state.
210
Command code
Command code
Response code
Response code
The response code of the executed command is stored.
Response data
Response data
The response data of the executed command is stored.
EtherNet/IP Connection
The executed command code is returned.
ZW User's Manual
Note
• The results of processing execution by parallel I/O also are reflected in the status signals.
• The table below shows the combinations of bank numbers and BANKOUTx_A to E.
(BANK9 to 32 are used only in the judgment value mode. In the normal mode, BANKOUTx_D to E are OFF at all
times.)
Bank number
BANKOUTx_A
BANKOUTx_B
BANKOUTx_C
BANKOUTx_D
BANKOUTx_E
BANK1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK2
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK3
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
BANK5
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
BANK6
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
BANK7
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
BANK10
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
BANK11
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
BANK12
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
BANK13
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
BANK14
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
BANK15
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
BANK16
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
BANK17
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
BANK18
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
BANK19
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
BANK20
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
BANK21
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
BANK22
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
BANK23
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
BANK24
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
BANK25
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
BANK26
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
BANK27
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
BANK28
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
BANK29
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
BANK30
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
BANK31
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
BANK32
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ZW User's Manual
Communications with External Devices
ON
BANK9
6
BANK8
EtherNet/IP Connection
211
• Output area
The output area is assigned to I/O memory area continuously from the response area.
Top
channel
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
+0
10
9
8
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Measurement Value of Task1
Output data 0
(32bit)
Measurement Value of Task2
Output data 1
(32bit)
Measurement Value of Task3
Output data 2
(32bit)
Measurement Value of Task4
Output data 3
(32bit)
Reserved
Output data 4
(32bit)
Reserved
Output data 5
(32bit)
Reserved
Output data 6
(32bit)
Reserved
Output data 7
(32bit)
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
212
Signal
Signal name
Function
Measurement Value of
Task1
Measurement Value of
Task1
The measured value of TASK1 is output.
Measurement Value of
Task2
Measurement Value of
Task2
The measured value of TASK2 is output.
Measurement Value of
Task3
Measurement Value of
Task3
The measured value of TASK3 is output.
Measurement Value of
Task4
Measurement Value of
Task4
The measured value of TASK4 is output.
EtherNet/IP Connection
ZW User's Manual
Accessing Communications Areas Using Variables with NJ-series Controllers
With an NJ-series Controller, only variables can be used to access from the user program the I/O memory
addresses that are assigned to the communications areas.
Use the following settings.
● Using Network Variables for Access
Create user-defined variables that match the structures of the communications areas of the Sensor.
Use the Sysmac Studio to define the variables.
Refer to the Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (Cat. No. W504) for Sysmac Studio operating
procedures.
1
(1)
Defining the Data Types of the Variables
Define data types for variables that match the structures of the communications areas.
Defining a Data Type for Signal Access
First, define a BOOL array data type to access the control signals and status signals.
Here, a data type called “U_EIPFlag” is defined.
Name of data type
: U_EIPFlag
Type of derivative data type : Union
Name of data type
U_EIPFlag
F
W
Data type
UNION
ARRAY[0..31]OF BOOL
DWORD
Specifies an array of
BOOL data from 0 to 31.
32-bit bit string data
6
(2)
Communications with External Devices
Defining Data Types for Communications Area Access
Data types are defined to access the communications areas, with one data type for the command area
and another data type for the response and output areas.
Here, data types called “S_EIPOutput” and “S_EIPInput” are defined.
• Data Type to Access the Command Area
Name of data type
Type of derivative data type
: S_EIPOutput
: Structure
Name of data type
S_EIPOutput
CommonControlFlag
Data type
STRUCT
U_EIPFlag
SensorHead1ControlFlag
SensorHead2ControlReserve
U_EIPFlag
U_EIPFlag
CommandCode
CommandParam1
CommandParam2
CommandParam3
DWORD
UINT
UINT
DINT
ZW User's Manual
The data type that was defined above (1)
The data type that was defined above (1)
The data type that was defined above (1)
(extended area)
32-bit bit string data
16-bit integer data
16-bit integer data
32-bit integer data
EtherNet/IP Connection
213
• Assignment Example for Variable Data Type That Matches the Command Area
Bits (−: Reserved)
CommonControlFlag
SensorHead1ControlFlag
S_EIP
Output
SensorHead2ControlReserve
CommandCode
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
+0
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
EXE
+1
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
ERCLR
+2
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
+3
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
+4
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
+5
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
+6
ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO1 ZERO1 ZERO1 ZERO1
CLR_T4 CLR_T3 CLR_T2 CLR_T1 _T4
_T3
_T2
_T1
Command code
+7
CommandParam1
+8
Parameter 1
CommandParam2
+9
Parameter 2
+10
Parameter 3
CommandParam3
LIGHT RESET TIMING
1
1
OFF1
+11
• Data Type to Access the Response and Output Areas
Name of data type
Type of derivative data type
Name of data type
S_EIPInput
CommonStatusFlag
214
: S_EIPInput
: Structure
Data type
STRUCT
U_EIPFlag
SensorHead1StatusFlag
U_EIPFlag
SensorHead2StatusReserve
U_EIPFlag
CommandCodeEcho
ResponseCode
ResponseData
OutputData
DWORD
UDINT
DINT
ARRAY[0..7]OF DINT
EtherNet/IP Connection
The data type that was defined above (1)
The data type that was defined above (1)
The data type that was defined above (1)
(extended area)
32-bit bit string data
32-bit integer data
32-bit integer data
Specifies an array of DINT
data from 0 to 7.
ZW User's Manual
• Assignment Example for Variable Data Type That Matches the Response and Output Areas
Response Area
Bits (−: Reserved)
15
CommonStatusFlag
SensorHead1StatusFlag
+0
14
13
12
11
BANK1 BANK1 BANK1 BANK1 BANK1
_E
_D
_C
_B
_A
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
−
−
−
−
−
−
RUN
−
READY
−
FLG
−
−
−
−
−
−
ERR
+1
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
+2
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
+3
OR1 GATE1 ENABLE STABIL LIGHT1 RESET HOLD
1
ITY1
STAT1 STAT1
LOW1_ PASS1_ HIGH1_ LOW1_ PASS1_ HIGH1_ LOW1_ PASS1_ HIGH1_ LOW1_ PASS1_ HIGH1_ ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO
T4
T4
T4
T3
T3
T3
T2
T2
T2
T1
T1
T1 STAT1_T4 STAT1_T3 STAT1_T2 STAT1_T1
SensorHead2StatusReserve
+4
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
+5
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CommandCode
Echo
+6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Response Code
Command code
+7
+8
Response code
+9
Response Data
+10
Response data
+11
Output Area
S_EIP
Input
Bits (−: Reserved)
15
14
13
+13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
Measurement Value of Task1
+14
Measurement Value of Task2
+15
+16
+17
Measurement Value of Task3
+18
+19
Measurement Value of Task4
6
Output Data
+20
Communications with External Devices
−
+21
+22
−
+26
+27
2
3
Defining the Variables
Define variables for the data links for the communications area data that is used in EtherNet/IP
communications.
These variables use the data types that were defined above in procedure 1.
Variable
Variable type
Network Publish attribute Data type
Application
EIPOutput
Global variable
Output
S_EIPOutput
For data links to the
command area
EIPInput
Global variable
Input
S_EIPInput
For data links to the
response and output areas
Exporting the Variables That Were Defined on Sysmac Studio
Export the variables that you defined so that you can use them on the Network Configurator.
An exported CSV file is created.
ZW User's Manual
EtherNet/IP Connection
215
4
Network Configurator Settings
(1) Import to the Network Configurator the CSV file that you exported from the Sysmac Studio.
The variables that are imported will automatically be registered as tags.
(2) Set the connections as shown in the following table.
5
Originator device (PLC) settings
Target device (Sensor) settings
Input tag set: EIP Input
Output tag set: Input101
Output tag set: EIP Output
Input tag set: Output100
Accessing the Communications Areas from the User Program
The defined variables are used to access the communications areas for the Sensor using the following
notation.
• Command Area
216
Signal name
Variable name
EXE
EIPOutput.CommonControlFlag.F[0]
ERCLR
EIPOutput.CommonControlFlag.F[16]
TIMING1
EIPOutput.SensorHead1ControlFlag.F[0]
RESET1
EIPOutput.SensorHead1ControlFlag.F[1]
LIGHTOFF1
EIPOutput.SensorHead1ControlFlag.F[2]
ZERO1_T1
EIPOutput.SensorHead1ControlFlag.F[16]
ZERO1_T2
EIPOutput.SensorHead1ControlFlag.F[17]
ZERO1_T3
EIPOutput.SensorHead1ControlFlag.F[18]
ZERO1_T4
EIPOutput.SensorHead1ControlFlag.F[19]
ZEROCLR1_T1
EIPOutput.SensorHead1ControlFlag.F[20]
ZEROCLR1_T2
EIPOutput.SensorHead1ControlFlag.F[21]
ZEROCLR1_T3
EIPOutput.SensorHead1ControlFlag.F[22]
ZEROCLR1_T4
EIPOutput.SensorHead1ControlFlag.F[23]
Command code
EIPOutput.CommandCode
Command parameter 1
EIPOutput.CommandParam1
Command parameter 2
EIPOutput.CommandParam2
Command parameter 3
EIPOutput.CommandParam3
EtherNet/IP Connection
ZW User's Manual
• Response Area
Signal name
Variable name
FLG
EIPInput.CommonStatusFlag.F[0]
READY
EIPInput.CommonStatusFlag.F[2]
RUN
EIPInput.CommonStatusFlag.F[4]
BANK1_A
EIPInput.CommonStatusFlag.F[11]
BANK1_B
EIPInput.CommonStatusFlag.F[12]
BANK1_C
EIPInput.CommonStatusFlag.F[13]
BANK1_D
EIPInput.CommonStatusFlag.F[14]
BANK1_E
EIPInput.CommonStatusFlag.F[15]
ERR
EIPInput.CommonStatusFlag.F[16]
HOLDSTAT1
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[0]
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[2]
STABILITY1
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[3]
ENABLE1
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[4]
GATE1
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[5]
OR1
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[6]
ZEROSTAT1_T1
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[16]
ZEROSTAT1_T2
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[17]
ZEROSTAT1_T3
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[18]
ZEROSTAT1_T4
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[19]
HIGH1_T1
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[20]
PASS1_T1
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[21]
LOW1_T1
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[22]
HIGH1_T2
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[23]
PASS1_T2
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[24]
LOW1_T2
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[25]
HIGH1_T3
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[26]
PASS1_T3
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[27]
LOW1_T3
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[28]
HIGH1_T4
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[29]
PASS1_T4
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[30]
LOW1_T4
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[31]
Command code
EIPInput.CommandCodeEcho
Response code
EIPInput.ResponseCode
Response data
EIPInput.ResponseData
ZW User's Manual
Communications with External Devices
EIPInput.SensorHead1StatusFlag.F[1]
LIGHT1
6
RESETSTAT1
EtherNet/IP Connection
217
• Output Area
Signal name
Variable name
Measurement Value of Task1
EIPInput.OutputData[0]
Measurement Value of Task2
EIPInput.OutputData[1]
Measurement Value of Task3
EIPInput.OutputData[2]
Measurement Value of Task4
EIPInput.OutputData[3]
● Accessing Communications Areas by Specifying I/O Memory Addresses
AT specifications can be set for variables to individually specify the I/O memory addresses that are assigned in
the communications areas.
1
Setting Tag Sets (Network Configurator)
Specify the tag names in the PLC directly by using the I/O memory addresses that are assigned in the
communications areas. (Output tags are specified for the input connections to the Sensor and input tags
are specified for output connections to the PLC.)
Setting Examples
Output tag : D0
Input tag : D100
2
Setting Variables (Sysmac Studio)
Define variables with AT specifications to the I/O memory addresses that are assigned in the
communications areas as shown below.
Setting Examples
Variable: a (AT specification: D0.0)
Variable: b (AT specification: D1.1)
Variable: c (AT specification: D2.0)
Variable: d (AT specification: D2.1)
Variable: e (AT specification: D2.2)
•
•
•
3
Setting Connections
Set the connections as shown in the following table.
Originator device (PLC) settings
Target device (Sensor) settings
Input tag set: D0
Output tag set: Input101
Output tag set: D100
Input tag set: Output100
Example: Setting Example for Variables to Access the Command Area
Variables Used to Access the Command Area
in the PLC from the User Program
Command Area (PLC Output Tag D0)
I/O memory
address
Settings
15
D0
D1
D2
218
EtherNet/IP Connection
2
1
0
Variable name
AT
specification
a (Assigned to the EXE signal.)
D0.0
BOOL
b (Assigned to the ERCLR signal.)
D1.1
BOOL
c (Assigned to the TIMING1 signal.)
D2.0
BOOL
d (Assigned to the RESET1 signal.)
D2.1
BOOL
e (Assigned to the LIGHTOFF1 signal.)
D2.2
BOOL
EXE
ERCLR
LIGHTOFF1 RESET1 TIMING1
Data type
ZW User's Manual
List of Commands (EtherNet/IP)
This list explains each of the commands used by EtherNet/IP.
● Utility commands
Instruction area
Top channel (Hex)
+7
Command name
Function
Reference
(Pages)
+6
0010
3011
Data save
Saves the current system data and bank
data to the main unit.
p.181
0010
E000
Sensor Head calibration
Calibrate the Sensor Head.
p.182
0010
F010
Restart
Restarts the displacement sensor.
p.182
● Bank control command
Instruction area
Top channel (Hex)
+7
0030
Command name
Function
Reference
(Pages)
+6
8000
Current bank settings
Replace the current bank number by the
specified bank number.
p.183
● Data acquisition/setting commands
Instruction area
Top channel (Hex)
+7
Command name
Function
Reference
(Pages)
+6
Processing unit data acquisition
Acquires the measurement data and
setting data of the processing unit.
0050
1000
Processing unit data setting
Change the setting data of the processing p.186
unit.
0040
4000
System data acquisition
Acquires the system data.
p.187
0050
4000
System data settings
Sets the system data.
p.188
ZW User's Manual
p.185
EtherNet/IP Connection
Communications with External Devices
1000
6
0040
219
Timing Chart (EtherNet/IP)
● Control command execution
Command Code
ON
OFF
Command
Area
Command
Parameter
EXE input
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Command Code
OFF
ON
READY output
OFF
ON
Response
Area
Response Code
Response Data
OFF
ON
OFF
FLG output
ON
OFF
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
(5) (6) (7)
(1) The command code and command parameter are set from the Controller.
(2) The EXE input signal state is changed from OFF to ON. Execution is instructed to the displacement sensor.
(3) When the displacement sensor receives the execution instruction, the READY output signal turns OFF and
the command is executed.
(4) When the displacement sensor completes execution, the command code, response code and response
data are set.
(5) The FLG output signal turns ON.
(6) The Controller makes sure that the FLG output signal has turned ON, and then returns the EXE input signal
to OFF.
(7) The displacement sensor makes sure that the EXE input signal has turned OFF, and the FLG and READY
output signals automatically turn OFF and ON, respectively.
220
EtherNet/IP Connection
ZW User's Manual
● Execution of hold (peak/bottom/peak to peak/average) and reset of hold value
TIMINGx input
Command
Area
RESETx input
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
HOLDSTATx
output
OFF
RESETSTATx
output
OFF
Output
area
ON
ON
ON
GATEx output
Measurement
Value of Task
OFF
ON
OFF
(1) (2)
(3) (4) (5) (6)
(7) (8)
(9) (10) (11) (12)
6
(1) The Controller changes the state of the TIMINGx input signal from OFF to ON. At the rising edge of the
TIMINGx input signal, the displacement sensor starts sampling.
(2) At start of sampling, the displacement sensor changes the state of the HOLDSTATx output signal from OFF
to ON.
(3) The Controller turns the state of the TIMINGx input signal from ON to OFF. At the falling edge of the
TIMINGx input signal, the displacement sensor end sampling.
(4) At end of sampling, the displacement sensor changes the state of the HOLDSTATx output signal from ON to
OFF.
(5) When the hold value is applied, the displacement sensor changes the state of the GATEx output signal from
OFF to ON. The Controller makes sure that the GATEx output signal has turned ON, and then captures the
output data.
(6) The displacement sensor turns OFF after the GATE signal ON duration has elapsed since the GATEx
output signal turned ON.
(7) The Controller changes the state of the RESETx input signal from OFF to ON. At the rising edge of the
RESETx input signal, the displacement sensor starts the measured value reset period.
(8) At the start of the measured value reset period, the displacement sensor changes the state of the
RESETSTATx output signal from OFF to ON.
(9) At completion of the measured value reset, the displacement sensor changes the state of the GATEx output
signal from OFF to ON.
(10) The displacement sensor turns OFF after the GATE signal ON duration has elapsed since the GATEx
output signal turned ON.
(11) The Controller changes the state of the RESETx input signal from ON to OFF. At the falling edge of the
RESETx input signal, the displacement sensor end the measured value reset period.
(12) At the end of the measured value reset period, the displacement sensor changes the state of the
RESETSTATx output signal from ON to OFF.
Communications with External Devices
Important
When hold is being performed by multiple tasks, HOLDSTATx output signal turns ON when even one task enters the
sampling period and GATEx output signal turns ON when the measured value is applied.
ZW User's Manual
EtherNet/IP Connection
221
● Execution of hold (auto peak, auto bottom, auto peak to peak) and reset of hold value
Command
Area
RESETx input
ON
OFF
ON
HOLDSTATx
output
OFF
RESETSTATx
output
OFF
ON
Output
area
ON
GATEx output
Measurement
Value of Task
OFF
ON
OFF
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
(5) (6) (7) (8)
(1) When the peak value is applied, the displacement sensor changes the state of the GATEx output signal
from OFF to ON. The Controller makes sure that the GATEx output signal has turned ON, and then
captures the output data.
(2) The displacement sensor turns OFF after the GATE signal ON duration has elapsed since the GATEx
output signal turned ON.
(3) The Controller turns the state of the RESETx input signal from OFF to ON. At the rising edge of the
RESETx input signal, the displacement sensor starts the measured value reset period.
(4) At the start of the measured value reset period, the displacement sensor changes the state of the
HOLDSTATx output signal from ON to OFF and the RESETSTATx from OFF to ON.
(5) At completion of the measured value reset, the displacement sensor changes the state of the GATEx output
signal from OFF to ON.
(6) The displacement sensor turns OFF after the GATE signal ON duration has elapsed since the GATEx
output signal turned ON.
(7) The Controller changes the state of the RESETx input signal from ON to OFF. At the falling edge of the
RESETx input signal, the displacement sensor end the measured value reset period.
(8) At the end of the measured value reset period, the displacement sensor changes the state of the
HOLDSTATx output signal from OFF to ON and the RESETSTATx from ON to OFF.
Important
When hold is being performed by multiple tasks, HOLDSTATx output signal turns ON when even one task enters the
sampling period and GATEx output signal turns ON when the measured value is applied.
222
EtherNet/IP Connection
ZW User's Manual
● Execution of hold (sample) and reset of hold value
TIMINGx input
Command
Area
ON
OFF
ON
RESETx input
OFF
ON
HOLDSTATx
output
OFF
RESETSTATx
output
OFF
Output
area
ON
ON
GATEx output
Measurement
Value of Task
OFF
ON
OFF
(1) (2)
(3) (4) (5) (6)
(7) (8)
(9) (10)(11) (12)
6
(1) The Controller changes the state of the TIMINGx input signal from OFF to ON. At the rising edge of the
TIMINGx input signal, the displacement sensor starts sampling.
(2) At start of sampling, the displacement sensor changes the state of the HOLDSTATx output signal from OFF
to ON.
(3) When the hold value is applied, the displacement sensor changes the state of the GATEx output signal from
OFF to ON. The Controller makes sure that the GATEx output signal has turned ON, and then captures the
output data.
(4) The displacement sensor turns OFF after the GATE signal ON duration has elapsed since the GATEx
output signal turned ON.
(5) The Controller turns the state of the TIMINGx input signal from ON to OFF. At the falling edge of the
TIMINGx input signal, the displacement sensor end sampling.
(6) At end of sampling, the displacement sensor changes the state of the HOLDSTATx output signal from ON to
OFF.
(7) The Controller changes the state of the RESETx input signal from OFF to ON. At the rising edge of the
RESETx input signal, the displacement sensor starts the measured value reset period.
(8) At the start of the measured value reset period, the displacement sensor changes the state of the
RESETSTATx output signal from OFF to ON.
(9) At completion of the measured value reset, the displacement sensor changes the state of the GATEx output
signal from OFF to ON.
(10) The displacement sensor turns OFF after the GATE signal ON duration has elapsed since the GATEx
output signal turned ON.
(11) The Controller changes the state of the RESETx input signal from ON to OFF. At the falling edge of the
RESETx input signal, the displacement sensor end the measured value reset period.
(12) At the end of the measured value reset period, the displacement sensor changes the state of the
RESETSTATx output signal from ON to OFF.
Communications with External Devices
Important
When hold is being performed by multiple tasks, HOLDSTATx output signal turns ON when even one task enters the
sampling period and GATEx output signal turns ON when the measured value is applied.
ZW User's Manual
EtherNet/IP Connection
223
● Measurement LED out
Command
Area
LIGHTOFFx input
Response
area
LIGHTx output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) The Controller changes the state of the LIGHTOFFx input signal from OFF to ON. At the rising edge of the
LIGHTOFFx input signal, the displacement sensor turns the measurement LED out.
(2) At measurement LED out, the displacement sensor changes the state of the LIGHTx output signal from ON
to OFF.
(3) The Controller turns the state of the LIGHTOFFx input signal from ON to OFF. At the falling edge of the
LIGHTOFFx input signal, the displacement sensor lights the measurement LED.
(4) At measurement LED on, the displacement sensor returns the LIGHTx output signal to ON.
● Zero reset execution/zero reset cancel
ZEROx input
ON
OFF
Command
Area
Response
area
ZEROCLRx input
ZEROSTATx
output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) The Controller changes the state of the ZEROx_T1 to 4 input signals from OFF to ON. The displacement
sensor makes sure that ZEROx_T1 to 4 input signals have turned ON, and then executes the zero reset.
(2) At execution of zero reset, the displacement sensor changes the state of the ZEROSTATx_T1 to 4 output
signal from OFF to ON.
(3) The Controller makes sure that the ZEROSTATx_T1 to 4 output signals have turned ON, and then returns
the ZEROx_T1 to 4 input signals to OFF.
(4) The Controller changes the state of the ZEROCLRx_T1 to 4 input signals from OFF to ON. The
displacement sensor makes sure that ZEROCLRx_T1 to 4 input signals have turned ON, and then executes
the zero reset cancel.
(5) At the zero reset cancel, the displacement sensor returns the ZEROSTATx_T1 to 4 output signals to ON.
(6) The Controller makes sure that the ZEROSTATx_T1 to 4 output signals have turned OFF, and then returns
the ZEROCLRx_T1 to 4 input signals to OFF.
224
EtherNet/IP Connection
ZW User's Manual
Sample Ladder Program (EtherNet/IP)
● Command/Response Communications
The following sample program is used to perform replacement the current bank number.
The replacement the current bank number command (lower bytes: #8000, upper bytes: #0030) is sent to the
Displacement Sensor.
First RUN
Period Flag
MOV
#8000
Sets the lower word of the
replacement the current bank
number command.
+6 word
MOV
#0030
Sets the upper word of the
replacement the current bank
number command.
+7 word
Execution
condition
Control Command Command Execution
Completed (FLG) Ready (READY)
SET
Turns ON Command Execution Bit.
Command Execution Bit
Control Command
Completed (FLG)
RSET
When the control command is completed,
the Command Execution Bit is turned OFF.
Command Execution Bit
6
Important
Communications with External Devices
Create the ladder program to control the EXE signal so that it does not turn ON while the READY signal is ON.
If not, a EXE input error will occur and the ERR signal will turn ON.
ZW User's Manual
EtherNet/IP Connection
225
6-4 No-protocol Connection
Outline of No-protocol Communications
A system is possible where no-protocol communications is performed between the displacement sensor and
an external device (e.g. PLC) and control from the external device (e.g. PLC) is performed by commands/
responses.
Communications with the external device is possible over Ethernet or the RS-232C interface. This control
system functions in the RUN mode. Communications is not possible in the FUN mode. Also, when a system
error occurs, commands from the external device are accepted, though setting commands are not executed.
● Command/response system
With no-protocol communications, a control command is sent to the displacement sensor from the external
device (e.g. PLC) and the response is sent from the displacement sensor is received by the external device
(e.g. PLC). By this, the measured value is acquired from the displacement value, and bank switch and various
other controls are performed.
External device
(Example: TCP client)
Displacement Sensor
(Example: TCP server
Command
• Measured value acquisition
• Bank Switching
Response
OK, etc.
In actual terms, an ASCII character command (e.g. "MS" for acquiring the measured value) is issued from the
external device (e.g. PLC). The displacement sensor returns responses such as "OK", "NG" or a value.
● Serial data output method after application of measured value
When hold is set, immediately after the measured value has been applied, the measured value data from the
displacement sensor is output automatically to the output device (e.g. PLC).
This enables the measurement value data for all tasks to be easily handed over to an external device (e.g.
PLC).
External device
(Example: TCP server)
Displacement Sensor
(Example: TCP client)
Data
Automatic output of
measured value data of four tasks.
Data can be output with Ethernet or with RS-232C. Measured value data can be sent to an external device
(e.g. PLC) serially (continuously) in ASCII format or binary format. External device
There is no handshaking for whether or not an external device (e.g. PLC) can receive data.
226
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
Setting Up No-protocol Communications
Setting Network Settings in the Sensor
This section describes how to set the network settings in the Displacement Sensor.
 Explorer pane
 Edit Pane
: [Device group] | Sensor name | [System] | [System data] (Double-click)
: [Ethernet communication settings] icon ( ) | [Ethernet settings]
The following items can be set.
Setting range
Set the IP address of the Displacement Sensor.
a.b.c.d
a: 1 to 223, b: 0 to 255,
c: 0 to 255, d: to 254
(Default: 192.168.250.50)
Subnet mask
Set the subnet mask.
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
Default Gateway
Sets the default gateway.
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
ZW User's Manual
No-protocol Connection
Communications with External Devices
Description
IP address
6
Item
227
Initial Settings for No-protocol Communications
You must set the communications method, destination IP address, and I/O port number of the destination
external device to perform no-protocol communications.
 Explorer pane
 Edit Pane
: [Device group] | Sensor name | [System] | [System data] (Double-click)
: [Ethernet communication settings] icon ( ) |
[No-Protocol data communication setting]
Item
Description
Setting range
Communication type
Select the communications method.
• OFF
• TCP server
• TCP client
• UDP
(Default: TCP server)
Port No. In
Sets the ZW port number when the UDP or TCP server is 0 to 65,535
selected.
(Default: 9601)
• The following port number is reserved
and cannot be used: 9600
IP address
Set the IP address of the external device at the connection a: 1 to 223, b: 0 to 255,
destination when the UDP or TCP client is selected.
c: 0 to 255, d: to 254
Set it in the form a.b.c.d.
(Default: 192.168.250.100)
Note
If you connect an external OMRON CS/CJseries PLC to Ethernet, the following default IP
address is assigned to the PLC.
• IP address: 192.168.250.node_address
Port No. Out
Set the I/O port number of the external device at the
connection destination when the UDP or TCP client is
selected.
Set the value to between 0 and 65,535.
0 to 65,535
Default: 9,600
(Default: 9,601)
Important
If set Communication type to TCP client, please start a ZW after make sure the external device to be TCP
server is ready to communicate. In addition, the communication is interrupted for reasons such as the ethernet
cable is disconnected, please restart the ZW If you can not reconnect.
228
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
Note
The initial setting for No-protocol Communications can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Initial Settings for No-protocol Communications p.352
6
Communications with External Devices
ZW User's Manual
No-protocol Connection
229
Setting Communications Specifications (RS-232C Communications)
Setting RS-232C communications on the sensor body
Set RS-232C communications on the displacement sensor body.
 Explorer pane
: [Device Group] | [(Sensor Name)] | [System] |
[System Data] (double-click)
: [RS-232C Communications Settings] icon ( )
 Edit pane
Item
Description
Range
Baud rate
Sets the data transfer speed.
9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps (default value),
57600bps, 115200bps
Data length
Sets the data length.
8 bits (default value), 7 bits
Parity
Sets the parity bit (error detection sign).
None (default value), odd, even
Stop bit
Sets the stop bit.
1bit (default), 2bit
Delimiter
Sets the delimiter (data delimiter).
CR (default), LF, CR+LF
CS/RS
Sets the flow control.
OFF(default value)/ON
Note
• With the ZW series, communication cannot be established under the following condition.
Data length: 7-bit and Parity: None
• The RS-232C communication specifications can also be set with key operations on the Sensor Controller.
9-15 Connecting by No-protocol Communications p.352
230
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
Setting for serial data output after application of measured value
When hold is set, the applied measured data can be output automatically.
Data that can be output
The data to be output is measured values applied at the time that the output cause occurs.
The data to be output is fixed to four tasks, TASK1 to TASK4, and can not be set individually.
Timing for outputting data
When hold (peak, bottom, peak-to-peak, average, sampling) is set, the measured value data is output when a
measured value is applied for even one of the four tasks. For the trigger method, both timing input from the
outside and self-triggering are supported.
Setting the data output destination
Serial data can be output from Ethernet or RS-232C. This section describes the procedure for the setting.
Item
Setting item
Description
Range
Data output settings
Data output
destination
Sets the interface for serial data output.
OFF (default value)/Ethernet/RS-232C
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
: [System] (double-click)
: [Data output settings] icon (
)
6
Communications with External Devices
ZW User's Manual
No-protocol Connection
231
Note
• When the output timing is such that multiple records are buffered, data for up to 10 records is output together.
• When output data is buffered faster than it is output, the outputting can not keep up and an overflow occurs in the
ZW. If this happens, "OUT.OVR" appears on the main segment. You can recover from the error display by pressing
the ESC/ZERORST key.
• Up to 128 records of output can be buffered.
• Data output destination can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Setting Serial Data Output p.354
232
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
Setting the output format
Item
Setting item
Description
Range
Data output settings
Output data type
Select the output format.
ASCII, Binary
(default value: ASCII)
Digits of integer
Select the number of digits in the integer
part.
1 to 5 [digits]
(default value: 5 digits)
Digits of decimal
Select the number of digits in the fractional
part.
0 to 6 [digits]
(default value: 6 digits)
Zero suprression
Select whether or not to suppress leading
zeros.
ON/OFF
(default value: ON)
Field separator
Select the type of field separator.
OFF, comma, tab, space, CR, LF, CR+LF,
semicolon
(default value: OFF)
Record separator
Select the type of record separator.
OFF, comma, tab, space, CR, LF, CR+LF,
semicolon
(default value: OFF)
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
: [System] (double-click)
: [Data output setting] icon (
)
6
Communications with External Devices
Note
The output format can also be set by the operating keys on the Sensor Controller.
Setting Serial Data Output p.354
ZW User's Manual
No-protocol Connection
233
• When the output format is ASCII
Set the number of digits in the integer section, number of digits in the fraction section, negative number
expression, zero suppression, field separator, and record separator items.
• Output Format
TASK1 measured
value
,
TASK2 measured
value
,
TASK4 measured
value
• • •
CR
Note
The output format, number of digits and the data separator, etc. can be changed if necessary.
Example) Integer digits: "2 digits", fractional digits: "3 digits", zero suppression: "No", field separator: "comma",
record separator: "CR"
Measured value of TASK3
(Measurement error)
1 2
.
1 2 3 ,
2
.
1 2 3
, 9 9
Measured value of
Measured value of
TASK2
TASK1
Field separator
.
9 9 9
Field separator
, −
2
. 1 2
3 CR
Measured value of
TASK4
Record separator
Note
If the measurement result is an abnormal value, the maximum value that can be expressed with the number of
integer and fractional digits is output.
If the measurement result can not be expressed because of the number of digits, the maximum value or minimum
value that can be expressed is output.
• When the output format is binary
Set the numeric expression.
Select whether fixed decimal point or floating decimal point.
• Output Format
<Measured value of TASK1><Measured value of TASK2>
4 bytes
4 bytes
<Measured value of TASK4> CR
4 bytes
Delimiter
Measurement values expressed in mm are output continuously with 4 bytes per each data item.
Negative numbers are output in 2's complement format.
(Example) When Task 1 is "37.385762 mm", Task 2 is "40.673256 mm", Task 3 is "Measurement value
error", and Task 4 is "39.554658 mm".
$02 $3A $76 $22 $02 $6C $9F $E8 $7F $FF $FF $FF $02 $5B $8E $62 $0D
Task1: 37385762
Task2: 40673256
Task3: Error
Task4: 39554658
A delimiter will be
attached to the end.
Note
• If the measurement result is an abnormal value, HEX7FFFFFFF is output.
• Unlike ASCII output, binary output has no separators between data such as field separators or record separators,
etc.
234
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
Command List
This table lists no-protocol communications commands.
The available commands are listed as follows.
Format
Return value *1
Description
Pages
MS
MS <Task number>
<Delimiter>
<Measured value>
<Delimiter>
Acquires the current measured value.
If the <task number> is omitted, the
measured value displayed is acquired.
If "4" is set for the <task number>, the
measured values for all tasks are obtained.
p.237
JG
JG <Task number>
<Delimiter>
<Judgment result>
<Delimiter>
Acquires the judgment result of the specified p.238
task.
If the <task number> is omitted, the result of
the task of which the result is currently
displayed is acquired.
If "4" is set for the <task number>, the
judgment results for all tasks are obtained.
DG
DG <unit number>
<Data number>
<Delimiter>
<Data>
<Delimiter>
Acquires the measurement data and setting p.239
data of the processing unit.
DS
DS <unit number>
<Data number>
<Measured value> <Delimiter>
OK <Delimiter>
Change the setting data of the processing
unit.
p.240
BG
BG <Delimiter>
<Bank number>
<Delimiter>
Acquire the current bank number.
p.241
BS
BS <Bank number>
<Delimiter>
OK <Delimiter>
Replace the current bank number by the
specified bank number.
p.242
ZR
ZR <Task number>
<Delimiter>
OK <Delimiter>
Execute a zero reset for the specified task.
If the <task number> is omitted, the zero
reset is executed for the task of which the
result is currently displayed.
If "4" is set for the <task number>, this is
executed for all tasks.
p.243
ZC
ZC <Task number>
<Delimiter>
OK <Delimiter>
Cancel the zero reset of the specified task.
If the <task number> is omitted, the zero
reset is executed for the task of which the
result is currently displayed.
If "4" is set for the <task number>, this is
executed for all tasks.
p.244
TM
TM <0:OFF/ 1:ON>
0<Delimiter>
OK <Delimiter>
Executes TIMING input.
* Calculates OR with the parallel input.
p.245
RT
RT <0:OFF/ 1:ON>
0<Delimiter>
OK <Delimiter>
Executes RESET input.
* Calculates OR with the parallel input.
p.245
LD
LD <0: Lit/ 1: Out>
0<Delimiter>
OK <Delimiter>
Turns the logical beam ON/OFF.
p.246
VR
VR <Delimiter>
<Model/Version>
<Delimiter>
Acquire the system version information.
(Example) ZW-CE10T 1.100 <Delimiter>
p.246
CA
CA 0 <Delimiter>
OK <Delimiter>
Calibrate the Sensor Head.
p.247
LS
LS <Save intervals>
<Number of saves> <Delimiter>
OK <Delimiter>
Start the internal logging of the data.
p.247
LE
LE <Delimiter>
OK <Delimiter>
End the internal logging of the data.
p.248
No-protocol Connection
Communications with External Devices
ZW User's Manual
6
Command
name
235
Command
name
Format
Return value *1
LO
LO <Task number> <First data
number> <Output data count>
<Delimiter>
<Internal logging data > Acquires the internal logging data.
p.248
<Delimiter>
If the <task number> is omitted, internal
logging data acquisition is executed for the
task of which the result is currently
displayed.
If the <first data number> is omitted, internal
logging data acquisition is executed from
first data number “0”.
If the <output data count> is omitted, all
internal logging data acquisition is executed.
LC
LC <Delimiter>
OK <Delimiter>
Clear the internal logging data.
p.249
LI
LI <Delimiter>
<Operation status>
<Saved data count>
<Delimiter>
Acquire the internal logging information.
p.250
DV
DV <Delimiter>
OK <Delimiter>
Save all bank data and system settings to
EEPROM.
p.250
YG
YG <Data number>
<Numerical value data> Acquires the system data.
<Delimiter>
YS
YS <Data number> <Setting value> OK <Delimiter>
Sets the system data.
p.252
IG
IG
<IP address>
<Delimiter>
Acquires the Ethernet IP address.
p.253
IS
IS <IP address>
OK <Delimiter>
Sets the Ethernet IP address.
p.253
KG
KG <delimiter>
<Subnet mask>
<Delimiter>
Acquires the subnet mask.
p.254
KS
KS <subnet mask >
OK <Delimiter>
Sets the subnet mask.
p.254
GG
GG <delimiter>
<Default gateway>
<Delimiter>
Acquires the default gateway.
p.255
GS
GS <default gateway>
OK <Delimiter>
Sets the default gateway.
p.255
OG
OG <Socket No.>
<OUT IP address>
<Delimiter>
Acquires the OUT IP address of the
specified socket number.
p.256
OS
OS <Socket No.>
<OUT IP address>
OK <Delimiter>
Sets the OUT IP address of the specified
socket number.
p.257
MI
MI
<MAC ADDRESS>
<Delimiter>
Acquires the MAC address.
p.258
HS
HS 0 <Delimiter>
<Head serial
information>
<Delimiter>
Acquires the head serial information.
p.258
RS
RS
OK <Delimiter>
Restarts
p.259
*1:
236
Description
Pages
p.251
If the command was not successfully processed, "ER <delimiter>" is returned.
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
Command Format
Measurement command <MS command>
Acquires the current measured value.
* The same can be processed with the M, MEASURE command, which is in a ZS series format.
<Command format>
M
∗
S
CR
↑ Space
↑ Task number
<Response format>
Normal measurement (Task numbers 0 to 3)
(Example) -30.719923mm
−
3
0
7
1
9
9
2
3 CR
• The return value is right-aligned and 11 characters + delimiter.
• The unit of the measured values is nm.
• Spaces will fill any missing portion from the left.
• If the task number is omitted, the measured value displayed is acquired.
6
Normal measurement (Task number 4)
Communications with External Devices
(Example) TASK1 -3.071992mm, TASK2 -2.998122mm, TASK3 2.345678mm, and TASK4 2.471249mm
−
3
0
7
1
9
9
2
,
−
2
9
9
8
1
2
2
,
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
,
2
4
7
1
2
4
9 CR
When measurement is not possible
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
ZW User's Manual
No-protocol Connection
237
<Parameter explanation>
Parameter
Description
Task number
Specifies the number of the task of which the measurement result is to be output.
0: TASK1
1: TASK2
2: TASK3
3: TASK4
4: TASK1 to 4
Judgment result acquisition command <JG command>
Acquires the judgment result of the specified task.
<Command format>
J
∗
G
CR
↑ Space
↑ Task number
<Response format>
Normal processing (Task numbers 0 to 3)
(Example) When the judgment result is "HIGH"
1 CR
↑ Judgment result
Normal processing (Task number 4)
(Example) TASK1 judgment result "HIGH", TASK2/TASK3 judgment result "PASS", TASK4 judgment result
"LOW"
1
,
,
0
0
,
2 CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
<Parameter explanation>
238
Parameter
Description
Task number
Specifies the number of the task of which the judgment result is to be output.
0: TASK1
1: TASK2
2: TASK3
3: TASK4
4: TASK1 to 4
Judgment result
Displays the judgment result.
PASS: 0
HIGH: 1
LOW: 2
ERROR: 3
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
Processing unit data acquisition command <DG command>
Acquires the measurement data and setting data of the processing unit.
<Command format>
D
G
CR
↑ Space
↑ Unit number
↑ Space
↑ Data number
<Response format>
Normal processing
CR
↑ Data (N letter)
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
<Parameter explanation>
Unit number
Specifies the unit number (0 to 255) to be acquired.
Data number
Specifies the data number (0 to 255) to be acquired.
Communications with External Devices
Description
6
Parameter
Important
For unit numbers and data numbers, refer to "10-3 Processing Item Data List" (p.384).
ZW User's Manual
No-protocol Connection
239
Processing unit data setting command <DS command>
Change the setting data of the processing unit.
<Command format>
D
CR
S
↑ Space
↑ Unit number
↑ Space
↑ Data number
↑ Space
↑ Setting value (N letter)
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
<Parameter explanation>
Parameter
Description
Unit number
Specifies the unit number (0 to 255) to be acquired.
Data number
Specifies the data number (0 to 255) to be acquired.
Setting value
This is the setting value of the specified data.
Important
For unit numbers and data numbers, refer to "10-3 Processing Item Data List" (p.384).
240
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
Current bank data acquisition command <BG command>
Acquire the current bank number.
<Command format>
B
G
CR
<Response format>
Normal processing
CR
↑ Bank number
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
<Parameter explanation>
Bank number
Displays the current bank number.
0: BANK1
1: BANK2
2: BANK3
3: BANK4
4: BANK5
5: BANK6
6: BANK7
7: BANK8
ZW User's Manual
Communications with External Devices
Description
6
Parameter
No-protocol Connection
241
Current bank data setting command <BS command>
Replace the current bank number by the specified bank number.
<Command format>
B
S
CR
↑ Space
↑ Bank number
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
<Parameter explanation>
242
Parameter
Description
Bank number
Specifies the bank number to switch to.
0: BANK1
1: BANK2
2: BANK3
3: BANK4
4: BANK5
5: BANK6
6: BANK7
7: BANK8
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
Zero reset execution command <ZR command>
Execute a zero reset for the specified task.
<Command format>
Z
R
CR
↑ Space
↑ Task number
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
• If the task number is omitted, the zero reset is executed for the task of which the result is currently displayed.
• If "4" is set for the task number, the zero reset is executed for all tasks.
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
<Parameter explanation>
Description
Task number
Specifies the number of the task for which the zero reset is to be executed.
0: TASK1
1: TASK2
2: TASK3
3: TASK4
4: TASK1 to 4
No-protocol Connection
Communications with External Devices
ZW User's Manual
6
Parameter
243
Zero reset cancel command <ZC command>
Cancel the zero reset of the specified task.
<Command format>
Z
C
CR
↑ Space
↑ Task number
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
• If the task number is omitted, the zero reset is canceled for the task of which the result is currently displayed.
• If "4" is set for the task number, the zero reset is canceled for all tasks.
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
<Parameter explanation>
244
Parameter
Description
Task number
Specifies the number of the task for which the zero reset is to be cancelled.
0: TASK1
1: TASK2
2: TASK3
3: TASK4
4: TASK1 to 4
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
TIMING input command <TM command>
Executes TIMING input.
<Command format>
T
M
0 CR
↑ Space
↑ Space
OFF:
0/ON: 1
↑
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
RESET input command <RT command>
Executes RESET input.
T
Communications with External Devices
R
6
<Command format>
0 CR
↑ Space ↑ Space
↑ OFF: 0/ON: 1
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
ZW User's Manual
No-protocol Connection
245
White LED OFF input command <LD command>
Turns the logical beam ON/OFF.
<Command format>
L
D
0 CR
↑ Space
↑ Space
↑ON: 0/OFF: 1
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
Version information acquisition command <VR command>
Acquire the system version information.
<Command format>
V
R
CR
<Response format>
Normal processing
Z
W
−
C
1
0
1
0
0
0 CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
246
R
CR
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
Sensor head calibration command <CA command>
Calibrate the Sensor Head.
<Command format>
C
0 CR
A
↑ Space
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
Internal logging start command <LS command>
Start the internal logging of the data.
S
CR
Communications with External Devices
L
6
<Command format>
↑ Space
↑ Save intervals
↑ Space
↑ Save count
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
ZW User's Manual
No-protocol Connection
247
<Parameter explanation>
Parameter
Description
Save intervals
Sets the intervals(0 to 1000) to be internally logged.
If “1” is set , all measured data is stored, and “2” is set, one measured data is stored every two
measurement.
If “0” is set, only the applied measured data is stored when hold is set.
Save count
Sets the maximum data count (1 to 12,800) to be internally logged.
The internal logging process ends when the number of internal logging data reaches the maximum.
Internal logging end command <LE command>
End the internal logging of the data.
<Command format>
L
E
CR
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
When a command was not successfully processed/When internal logging is not started
E
R
CR
• The internal logging process ends without sending LE command when the number of internal logging data
reaches the maximum.
Internal logging data acquisition command <LO command>
Acquires the internal logging data.
<Command format>
L
CR
O
↑ Space ↑ Space ↑ Output data count
↑ Space
Task
number ↑ First data number
↑
• If the <task number> is omitted, internal logging data acquisition is executed for the task of which the result is
currently displayed.
• If the <first data number> is omitted, internal logging data acquisition is executed from first data number “0”.
• If the <output data count> is omitted, all internal logging data acquisition is executed.
248
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
<Response format>
Normal processing
The internal logging data is output.
(Example) TASK1 -3.071992mm, TASK2 -2.998122mm, TASK3 2.345678mm, and TASK4 2.471249mm
3
0
7
1
9
9
2
,
2
9
9
8
1
2
2
,
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
,
2
4
7
1
2
4
9
CR
• The character format is ASCII.
• The return value is right-aligned and 11 characters + delimiter.
• The unit of the measured values is nm.
• Spaces will fill any missing portion from the left.
When a command was not successfully processed/When internal logging is not stopped
E
R
CR
<Parameter explanation>
Description
Task number
Sets the task number under which to obtain internal log data.
0: TASK1
1: TASK2
2: TASK3
3: TASK4
First data number
Sets the first logging data number (0 to 12800) that is acquired from beggining.
Beginning data number is “0”.
Output data count
Sets the logging data count (0 to 12800) that is acquired.
If stored internal logging data count is lower than setting, all logging data is acquired.
If nothing is stored, command response is ER.
6
Parameter
Communications with External Devices
Internal logging data clear command <LC command>
Clear the internal logging data.
<Command format>
L
C
CR
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
ZW User's Manual
No-protocol Connection
249
When a command was not successfully processed/When internal logging is not stopped
E
R
CR
• If internal logging is started without clearing logging data, data is saved end of last logging data.
• When ZW internal memory size is not enough, internal logging is automatically ended. Overwrite is not
executed.
Internal logging data information acquisition command <LI command>
Acquire the internal logging information.
<Command format>
L
I
CR
<Response format>
Normal processing
CR
↑ Operation status
↑ Space
↑ Saved data count
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
<Parameter explanation>
Parameter
Description
Operation status
Displays the internal logging process status.
0: Internal logging stopped state
1: Internal logging in progress
Saved data count
Displays the number of saved logging data (0 and more).
Data save command <DV command>
Save all bank data and system settings to EEPROM.
<Command format>
D
250
V
CR
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
System data acquisition <YG command>
Acquires the system data.
<Command format>
Y
CR
G
↑ Space
↑ Data number
<Response format>
Normal processing
CR
6
↑ Data (N letter)
↑ Space
Communications with External Devices
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
<Parameter explanation>
Parameter
Description
Data number
Specifies the data number (0 to 255) to be acquired.
Note
For data numbers, refer to "10-4 System data list."
ZW User's Manual
No-protocol Connection
251
System data setting <YS command>
Sets the system data.
<Command format>
Y
S
CR
↑ Space
↑ Data number
↑ Space
↑ Setting value
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
<Parameter explanation>
Parameter
Description
Data number
Specifies the data number to be acquired.
Setting value
This is the setting value of the specified data.
Note
For data numbers, refer to "10-4 System data list."
252
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
IP address acquisition <IG command>
Acquires the IP address.
<Command format>
I
G
CR
<Response format>
Normal processing
(Example) When the IP address of the ZW is 192.168.250.50
1
9
2
.
1
6
8
.
2
5
0
.
5
0
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
IP address setting <IS command>
Sets the IP address.
<Command format>
S
1
9
2
.
1
6
8
.
2
5
0
.
5
0
6
I
CR
Communications with External Devices
↑ Space
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
ZW User's Manual
No-protocol Connection
253
Subnet mask acquisition <KG command>
Acquires the subnet mask.
<Command format>
K
G
CR
<Response format>
Normal processing
(Example) When the ZW subnet mask is 255.255.255.0
2
5
5
.
2
5
5
.
2
5
5
.
0
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
Subnet mask setting <KS command>
Sets the subnet mask.
<Command format>
(Example) When setting subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the ZW
K
S
2
5
5
.
2
5
5
.
2
5
5
.
0
CR
↑ Space
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
254
R
CR
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
Default gateway acquisition <GG command>
Acquires the default gateway.
<Command format>
G
G
CR
<Response format>
Normal processing
(Example) When the ZW default gateway is 0.0.0.0
0
.
0
.
0
.
0
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
Default gateway setting <GS command>
Sets the default gateway.
<Command format>
6
(Example) When setting the default gateway 0.0.0.0 for the ZW
S
0
.
0
.
0
.
0
Communications with External Devices
G
CR
↑ Space
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
ZW User's Manual
No-protocol Connection
255
OUT IP address acquisition of the specified socket number <OG command>
Acquires the OUT IP address.
<Command format>
O
CR
G
↑ Space
↑ Socket number
<Response format>
Normal processing
(Example) When the OUT IP address of the ZW is 192.168.250.100
1
9
2
.
1
6
8
.
2
5
0
.
1
0
0
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
<Parameter explanation>
256
Parameter
Description
Socket number
Specifies the socket number of which the serial data is to be output.
1: Socket 1 (fixed at 192.168.250.100)
2: Socket 2
3: Socket 3 (fixed at 192.168.250.100)
4: Socket 4 (fixed at 192.168.250.100)
(*) Sockets 3 and 4 are not used for serial data output.
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
OUT IP address setting of the specified socket number <OS command>
Sets the OUT IP address.
<Command format>
O
S
1
9
2
.
1
6
8
.
2
5
0
.
1
0
0
CR
↑ Space ↑ Space
↑ Socket number
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
<Parameter explanation>
Socket number
Specifies the socket number of which the serial data is to be output.
1: Socket 1 (fixed at 192.168.250.100)
2: Socket 2
3: Socket 3 (fixed at 192.168.250.100)
4: Socket 4 (fixed at 192.168.250.100)
(*1) Sockets 3 and 4 are not used for serial data output.
(*2) Sockets 1, 3 and 4 are fixed and cannot be set by this command. Note, however, that
OK is returned as the response.
ZW User's Manual
No-protocol Connection
Communications with External Devices
Description
6
Parameter
257
MAC address acquisition <MI command>
Acquires the MAC address.
<Command format>
M
I
CR
<Response format>
(Example) When the MAC address of the ZW is 00.00.0A.75.00.00
Normal processing
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
A
.
7
5
.
0
0
.
0
0
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
Head serial information acquisition <HS command>
Acquires the head serial information.
<Command format>
H
S
0
CR
↑ Space
<Response format>
Normal processing
(Example) When the head serial information is 1234567
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
258
R
CR
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
Restart <RS command>
Restarts the Sensor Controller
<Command format>
R
S
CR
<Response format>
Normal processing
O
K
CR
When a command was not successfully processed
E
R
CR
6
Communications with External Devices
ZW User's Manual
No-protocol Connection
259
MEMO
260
No-protocol Connection
ZW User's Manual
Offline Settings
7-1 Performing Settings Offline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
7-2 Starting a Project in Offline Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
7-3 Changing between Online and Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
7-4 Offline Debugging of the Sensor Control Program and Sensor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
7
Offline Settings
7-1 Performing Settings Offline
The personal computer tools set enables the user to perform settings offline without connecting an actual
sensor.
Parameters set offline can be saved as project data just like parameters set online, and conditions set offline
can be transferred to the sensor as desired.
The following functions are disabled during offline setting.
Item
Main screen
Bank data edit pane
Reference (Pages)
Online
Internal logging
p.129
Trend monitor
p.120
Tool
Sensor setup
p.116
p.133
p.380
Monitor
Measurement value monitor
p.58
Line bright monitor
LED light
I/O input
262
Task
Filer
Scaling (automatic setting)
p.88
I/O
Analog output
Analog output correction
p.143
Performing Settings Offline
ZW User's Manual
7-2 Starting a Project in Offline Mode
To start a project in Offline Mode, select [Enter the type] on the Select Sensor Dialog Box after you create a
project, then select the sensor type and version.
You cannot change the sensor type and version after you select them.
7
Offline Settings
ZW User's Manual
Starting a Project in Offline Mode
263
7-3 Changing between Online and Offline
Before you go offline, save all settings and parameter changes to the Sensor's internal memory. Saving your
project does not save the data in the Sensor.
You can use the following two methods to change between offline and online.
 Explorer pane
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
: Right-click the Sensor model | [Offline/Disconnect] or [Online/Connect]
: [Device group] | [(Sensor model)] (Double-click)
: [Online] Icon | [Sensor connection] | [Connect] or [Disconnect]
1
To go offline, click [Disconnect]. To go
online, click [Connect].
2
When you click [Connect], the Connect to
Sensor Dialog Box is displayed.
3
When you click [Connect], you must
synchronize the data between the Sensor
and the project.
Follow the guidance and synchronize the data.
Note
Saving the Bank/System Settings p.112, p.329
Saving a project p.70
264
Changing between Online and Offline
ZW User's Manual
7-4 Offline Debugging of the Sensor Control Program and Sensor Operation
If an EtherCAT system is configured, you can perform a linked simulation between the sequence control of an
NJ-series Controller and the operation of an ZW Sensor.
The sensor control program can be debugged offline using measurement results saved by the data trace
function.
NJ-series Controller Simulator (virtual Controller)
Sysmac
Studio
Sysmac Studio
Simulator
connection
User
program
ZW Sensor Simulator
(1) TIMING input and control
command
Measurement result file
saved by data trace function
EtherCAT online connection
(2) Acquisition of measured value
from file
(3) Outputting measurement results to the
storage area in the NJ-series Controller
Computer
Operations That Are Possible with Simulation
Note
Sensor measurement and other operation cannot be simulated. The measurement result acquired previously by the
data trace function is output.
Important
Simulation is possible only on the Standard Edition of the Sysmac Studio.
7
Registering the ZW as an EtherCAT Slave
Offline Settings
You use the Sysmac Studio (Standard Edition) to add the ZW to the EtherCAT slave configuration.
Refer to the Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (Cat. No. W504) for details on registering slaves.
Only simplified procedures are provided here.
• Opening the Edit EtherCAT Configuration Tab Page
 Explorer pane
: [Configurations and Setup] | [EtherCAT] (Double-click)
• Registering a Slave Offline (Building the Network Configuration)
1
Use either of the following methods to add an ZW slave to the master.
• Drag [ZW-CE1x] from the [Toolbox] to the master in the Edit Network Configuration Tab Page.
• Select the master in the Edit Network Configuration Dialog Box and then double-click [ZW-CE1x] in the
[Toolbox].
ZW User's Manual
Offline Debugging of the Sensor Control Program and Sensor Operation
265
2
Select the ZW that was added to the Edit Network Configuration Tab Page and change the node
address of the ZW to the node address that is set on the ZW hardware switches.
Setting Up the ZW
Set up the inspections in the ZW, e.g., set the inspection items.
1
Double-click the ZW that was added to the
Edit Network Configuration Tab Page.
The ZW Setup Pane is displayed for the Edit
Pane. Make all of the required settings.
Executing the Simulation
266
1
Write and build the user program that will
operate the machine.
Refer to the Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation
Manual (Cat. No. W504) for details on
programming.
2
Open the Edit screen.
Right-click [(Sensor model)] in the Edit network
configuration Tab page and select [Edit].
Offline Debugging of the Sensor Control Program and Sensor Operation
ZW User's Manual
3
Specify the measurement result file for
performing offline debugging.
Edit pane: [Tools] - [Simulation data] - [Specify a
file]
Select the CSV file that is written in the following
format.
You can also import files saved in the internal
logging and trend graphs.
index, Task1, Task2, Task3, Task4
0,MV, MV, MV, MV
1,MV, MV, MV, MV
2,MV, MV, MV, MV
:
(MV: Measurement Value)
4
Select [Simulation] - [Execute].
The simulation will start.
After the Simulator is connected, the NJ-series Controller and ZW Simulator will be internally connected online
via EtherCAT and the NJ-series Controller will enter RUN mode.
Refer to the Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (Cat. No. W504) for the operating procedures for the
Simulator.
7
Offline Settings
ZW User's Manual
Offline Debugging of the Sensor Control Program and Sensor Operation
267
MEMO
268
Offline Debugging of the Sensor Control Program and Sensor Operation
ZW User's Manual
Troubleshooting
8-1 Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
8-2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
8
Troubleshooting
8-1 Error Messages
Errors for EtherCAT Connection (Sysmac Error Status)
The Sysmac Studio Standard Version displays errors that occur in the EtherCAT system (including Sensor
errors) as Sysmac error status.
Sysmac Error Status Table
This section provides a table of Sysmac error status that is related to the Sensor and describes the event
codes.
Event levels are given as following in the tables.
Abbreviation
Name
Maj
Major fault level
Prt
Partial fault level
Min
Minor fault level
Obs
Observation
Info
Information
A version in parentheses in the Event code column is the unit version of the CPU Unit when the event was
added.
Refer to the NJ-series Troubleshooting Manual (Cat. No. W503) for all NJ-series event codes.
Level (*1)
Event Code
Event name
Meaning
Assumed cause
Maj
270
Prt
Min
Obs
Info
Reference
(Pages)
04D00000Hex
ALARM
Hardware error Some abnormality
occurred on the
displacement sensor
hardware.
• Hardware damage

p.274
14B00000 Hex
ALARM
Linearity
The linearity
correction data correction data of the
error
displacement sensor
is damaged.
• Calibration ROM damage

p.274
14B10000 Hex
ALARM
Linearity
Reading of the
correction data displacement sensor
read error
linearity correction
data was not executed
correctly.
• Calibration ROM not inserted
• Calibration ROM damage

p.275
14B20000 Hex
ALARM
System setting The system settings
error
saved to the
displacement sensor
are corrupt.
• The displacement sensor
power was turned OFF during saving/loading of system
settings.

p.275
14B30000 Hex
ALARM
Bank data error The bank data saved
to the displacement
sensor is corrupt.
• The displacement sensor
power was turned OFF during saving/loading of bank
data.

p.276
24810000 Hex
ALARM
Ethernet
An invalid IP address
communication is set for the
parameter
displacement sensor.
error
• Invalid IP address setting

p.276
74900000 Hex
Multiple control Multiple control
signal input
signals turned ON in
error
the same cycle.
Multiple control signals turned
ON in the same cycle.

p.277
Error Messages
ZW User's Manual
Level (*1)
Event Code
Event name
Meaning
Assumed cause
Maj
Prt
Min
Obs
Info
Reference
(Pages)
74910000 Hex
EXE input error EXE input processing
was not executed
correctly.
• EXE input turned ON in the
FUN mode.
• EXE input turned ON with
READY output OFF.

p.277
74920000 Hex
SYNC input
error
SYNC input
processing was not
executed correctly.
• SYNC input turned ON in the
FUN mode.

p.278
74930000 Hex
TIMING input
error
TIMING input
processing was not
executed correctly.
• TIMINGx input turned ON in
the FUN mode.
• TIMINGx input turned ON or
OFF while RESETx input
was ON.
• TIMINGx input turned ON in
a non-measurement state.
• TIMINGx input turned ON
before the "delay time + sampling time" elapsed.

p.278
74940000 Hex
RESET input
error
RESET input
processing was not
executed correctly.
RESETx input turned ON in the
FUN mode.

p.279
74950000 Hex
ZERO input
error
ZERO input
processing was not
executed correctly.
• ZEROx input turned ON in
the FUN mode.
• ZEROx input turned ON in a
non-measurement state.
• ZEROx input turned ON for a
task whose status is OFF.

p.279
74960000 Hex
ZEROCLR
input error
ZEROCLR input
processing was not
executed correctly.
ZEROCLRx input turned ON in
the FUN mode.

p.280
Note When error marked by ALARM occur, the ALARM output of parallel I/O turns ON, and "SYSERR" and error code are displayed on the
main and sub-displays, respectively.
*1:
Error Messages
Troubleshooting
ZW User's Manual
8
Fault Levels
• Major Fault Level
These errors prevent control operations for the entire Controller. If a major fault level error is detected, user program execution is stopped
immediately and the loads for all slaves (including remote I/O) are turned OFF. You cannot reset major fault level errors from the user program, the Sysmac Studio, or an NS-series PT. To recover from a major fault level error, remove the cause of the error, and either cycle the
power supply to the Controller or reset the Controller from the Sysmac Studio.
• Partial Fault Level
These errors prevent control operations in a certain function module in the Controller. The NJ-series CPU Unit continues to execute the
user program even after a partial fault level error occurs. After you remove the cause of the error, execute one of the following to return to
normal status.
• Reset the error from the user program, the Sysmac Studio, or an NS-series PT.
• Cycle the power supply to the Controller.
• Reset the Controller from the Sysmac Studio.
• Minor Fault Level
These errors prevent part of the control operations in a certain function module in the Controller. The troubleshooting for minor fault level
errors is the same as the processing for partial fault level errors.
• Observations
These errors do not affect the control operations of the Controller. Observations serve as warnings to the user so that the error does not
develop into an error at a higher level.
• Information
Events that are classified as information do not indicate errors.
271
Checking Sysmac Error Status
You can use the troubleshooting functions of the Sysmac Studio Standard Version to check the Sysmac error
status. Refer to the NJ-series Troubleshooting Manual (Cat. No. W503) for information on troubleshooting
functions.
1
Select [Troubleshooting] from the Tools Menu while online. You can also click the
[Troubleshooting] Button in the toolbar.
The Troubleshooting Dialog Box is displayed.
2
Click the [Controller Errors] Tab.
A list of the current Sysmac error status and corresponding event codes will be displayed.
Clearing the Sysmac Error Status
1
Remove the cause of the error and then click the [Reset All] Button on the [Controller Errors] Tab
Page of the [Troubleshooting] Pane.
Note
Even if you reset the Sysmac error status, the errors will remain on the [Controller Event Log] Tab Page.
272
Error Messages
ZW User's Manual
Error Descriptions
The items that are used to describe individual errors (events) are described in the following copy of an error
table.
Event name
Gives the name of the error.
Meaning
Gives a short description of the error.
Source
Gives the source of the error.
Error attributes
Level
Effects
User program
Indicators
This is the status of the indicators for the EtherCAT port that is built into the NJ-series Controller. Indicator status
is given only for errors in the EtherCAT Master Function Module and the EtherNet/IP Function Module.
System-defined
variables
Cause and
correction
Event code
Gives the code of the error.
Source details
Gives details on
the source of
the error.
Detection
timing
Tells when the
error is
detected.
Tells the level of
influence on
control.*1
Recovery
Gives the
recovery
method.*2
Log category
Tells which log
the error is
saved in.*3
Tells what will
happen to
execution of the
user program.*4
Operation
Provides special information on the operation that
results from the error.
Variable
Data type
Name
Lists the variable names, data types, and meanings for system-defined variables that provide direct error
notification, that are directly affected by the error, or that contain settings that cause the error.
Assumed cause
Correction
Prevention
Lists the possible causes, corrections, and preventive measures for the error.
Attached
information
This is the attached information that is displayed by the Sysmac Studio or an NS-series PT.
Precautions/
Remarks
Provides precautions, restrictions, and supplemental information.
One of the following:
Major fault: Major fault level
Partial fault: Partial fault level
Minor fault: Minor fault level
Observation
Information
*2
One of the following:
Automatic recovery: Normal status is restored automatically when the cause of the error is removed.
Error reset: Normal status is restored when the error is reset after the cause of the error is removed.
Cycle the power supply: Normal status is restored when the power supply to the Controller is turned OFF and then back ON after the
cause of the error is removed.
Controller reset: Normal status is restored when the Controller is reset after the cause of the error is removed.
Depends on cause: The recovery method depends on the cause of the error.
*3
One of the following:
System: System event log
Access: Access event log
*4
One of the following:
Continues: Execution of the user program will continue.
Stops: Execution of the user program stops.
Starts: Execution of the user program starts.
8
*1:
Troubleshooting
ZW User's Manual
Error Messages
273
Event name
Hardware error
Meaning
Some abnormality occurred on the displacement sensor hardware.
Source
EtherCAT master function module
Source details
Slave
Detection timing
At generation of
hardware error
Error attributes
Level
Minor fault
Recovery
Error reset
(cancellation of
slave error)
Log category
System
Effects
User program
Continues
Operation
An error message is displayed on the displacement
sensor's digital display, and the ALARM output of
parallel I/O turns ON. The displacement sensor is in a
stopped state until it is restarted.
Indicators
System-defined
variables
Cause and
correction
04D0 0000 Hex
EtherCAT NET RUN
EtherCAT NET ERR


EtherCAT LINK/ACT

Variable
Data type
Name
None


Assumed cause
Correction
Prevention
Hardware damage
Displacement sensor may be
broken. Please contact an OMRON
branch or sales office.

Attached
information
None
Precautions/
Remarks
None
Event name
Linearity correction data error
Meaning
The linearity correction data of the displacement sensor is damaged.
Source
EtherCAT master function module
Source details
Slave
Detection timing
At displacement
sensor startup
Error attributes
Level
Minor fault
Recovery
Error reset
(after
cancellation of
slave error)
Log category
System
Effects
User program
Continues
Operation
An error message is displayed on the displacement
sensor's digital display, and the ALARM output of
parallel I/O turns ON. The displacement sensor is in a
stopped state until it is restarted.
Indicators
System-defined
variables
Cause and
correction
274
Event code
Event code
14B00000Hex
EtherCAT NET RUN
EtherCAT NET ERR


EtherCAT LINK/ACT

Variable
Data type
Name
None


Assumed cause
Correction
Prevention
Calibration ROM damage
Calibration ROM may be broken.
Please contact an OMRON branch
or sales office.

Attached
information
None
Precautions/
Remarks
As a provisional measure, the measurement can be resumed using the data of the previously read Calibration
ROM.
<Operation method>
With error code 3 displayed on the sub-display, hold down the Mode switching key, then when [OK/CAN] is
displayed, press the ZERO/SET key.
<Cautions>
• When using this method, always check the serial number of the previously read Calibration ROM in "controller
information," then check that it matches the Sensor Head side serial number. Measurement will not be correct
unless they match.
• When restarting the main unit, perform the same operations again.
• This operation is disabled for a displacement sensor into which no Calibration ROM has ever been inserted
and started up.
Error Messages
ZW User's Manual
Event name
Linearity correction data read error
Meaning
Reading of the displacement sensor linearity correction data was not executed correctly.
Source
EtherCAT master function module
Source details
Slave
Detection
timing
At displacement
sensor startup
Error attributes
Level
Minor fault
Recovery
Error reset
(after
cancellation of
slave error)
Log category
System
Effects
User program
Continues
Operation
An error message is displayed on the displacement
sensor's digital display, and the ALARM output of
parallel I/O turns ON. The displacement sensor is in a
stopped state until it is restarted.
Indicators
System-defined
variables
Cause and
correction
Event code
14B10000Hex
EtherCAT NET RUN
EtherCAT NET ERR


EtherCAT LINK/ACT

Variable
Data type
Name
None


Assumed cause
Correction
Prevention
Calibration ROM not inserted
Turn the displacement sensor OFF,
insert the Calibration ROM and turn
the sensor ON again.

Calibration ROM damage
Calibration ROM may be broken.
Please contact an OMRON branch
or sales office.

Attached
information
None
Precautions/
Remarks
As a provisional measure, the measurement can be resumed using the data of the previously read Calibration
ROM.
<Operation method>
With error code 3 displayed on the sub-display, hold down the Mode switching key, then when [OK/CAN] is
displayed, press the ZERO/SET key.
<Cautions>
• When using this method, always check the serial number of the previously read Calibration ROM in "controller
information," then check that it matches the Sensor Head side serial number. Measurement will not be correct
unless they match.
• When restarting the main unit, perform the same operations again.
• This operation is disabled for a displacement sensor into which no Calibration ROM has ever been inserted
and started up.
Event name
System setting error
Meaning
The system settings saved to the displacement sensor are corrupt.
Source
EtherCAT master function module
Source details
Slave
Detection
timing
At displacement
sensor startup
Error attributes
Level
Minor fault
Recovery
Error reset
(after
cancellation of
slave error)
Log category
System
Effects
User program
Continues
Operation
An error message is displayed on the displacement
sensor's digital display, and the ALARM output of
parallel I/O turns ON. The displacement sensor is in a
stopped state until it is restarted.
Cause and
correction
EtherCAT NET RUN
EtherCAT NET ERR



Variable
Data type
Name
None


Assumed cause
Correction
Prevention
The displacement sensor power
was turned OFF during saving/
loading of system settings.
After holding down the Mode
switching key, press the ZERO/SET
key to clear the system settings and
the bank data, then resume the
starting process.
Do not turn the displacement
sensor OFF during saving/loading
of system settings.
Attached
information
None
Precautions/
Remarks
None
ZW User's Manual
Troubleshooting
System-defined
variables
14B20000Hex
8
Indicators
Event code
EtherCAT LINK/ACT
Error Messages
275
Event name
Bank data error
Meaning
The bank data saved to the displacement sensor is corrupt.
Source
EtherCAT master function module
Source details
Slave
Detection
timing
At displacement
sensor startup
Error attributes
Level
Minor fault
Recovery
Error reset
(after
cancellation of
slave error)
Log category
System
Effects
User program
Continues
Operation
An error message is displayed on the displacement
sensor's digital display, and the ALARM output of
parallel I/O turns ON. The displacement sensor is in a
stopped state until it is restarted.
Indicators
System-defined
variables
Cause and
correction
EtherCAT NET RUN
EtherCAT NET ERR


Variable
Data type
Name
None


Assumed cause
Correction
Prevention
The displacement sensor power
was turned OFF during saving/
loading of bank data.
After holding down the Mode
switching key, press the ZERO/SET
key to clear the system settings and
the bank data, then resume the
starting process.
Do not turn the displacement
sensor OFF during saving/loading
of bank data.
None
Precautions/
Remarks
None
Event name
Ethernet communication parameter error
Meaning
An invalid IP address is set for the displacement sensor.
Source
EtherCAT master function module
Error attributes
Level
Effects
User program
System-defined
variables
Cause and
correction
14B30000Hex

Attached
information
Indicators
276
Event code
EtherCAT LINK/ACT
Event code
2481 0000Hex
Source details
Slave
Detection
timing
All times
Minor fault
Recovery
Error reset
(after
cancellation of
slave error)
Log category
System
Continues
Operation
An error message is displayed on the displacement
sensor's digital display, and the ALARM output of
parallel I/O turns ON. The displacement sensor is in a
stopped state until it is restarted.
EtherCAT NET RUN
EtherCAT NET ERR



Variable
Data type
Name
None


Assumed cause
Correction
Prevention
Invalid IP address setting
Change to the correct IP address.
Do not set an invalid IP address
such as "0.0.0.0".
Attached
information
None
Precautions/
Remarks
None
Error Messages
EtherCAT LINK/ACT
ZW User's Manual
Event name
Multiple control signal input error
Meaning
Multiple control signals turned ON in the same cycle.
Source
EtherCAT master function module
Error attributes
Level
Effects
User program
Indicators
System-defined
variables
Cause and
correction
Event code
7490 0000 Hex
Source details
Slave
Detection
timing
When instructed
by the user
Minor fault
Recovery
Error reset
(after
cancellation of
slave error)
Log category
System
Continues
Operation
Control signal ON is disabled, and the instruction is not
executed.
EtherCAT NET RUN
EtherCAT NET ERR


EtherCAT LINK/ACT

Variable
Data type
Name
None


Assumed cause
Correction
Prevention
Multiple control signals turned ON
in the same cycle.
Modify the program so that multiple
control signals do not turn ON in a
single cycle.
Program so that multiple control
signals do not turn ON in a single
cycle.
Attached
information
None
Precautions/
Remarks
The following cases are not judged to be errors:
• ZEROx_T1 to 4 multiple signals turn ON in the same cycle.
• ZEROCLRx_T1 to 4 multiple signals turn ON in the same cycle.
• ERCLR and LIGHTOFFx turn ON in the same cycle as other signals.
Event name
EXE input error
Meaning
EXE input processing was not executed correctly.
Source
EtherCAT master function module
Error attributes
Level
Effects
User program
Indicators
EtherCAT NET RUN
EtherCAT NET ERR



Variable
Data type
Name
None


Assumed cause
Correction
Prevention
EXE input turned ON in the FUN
mode.
Switch to the RUN mode, and turn
EXE input ON.

EXE input turned ON with READY
output OFF.
Modify the program so that EXE
input does not turn ON when the
READY signal is OFF.
Program so that EXE input does not
turn ON when the READY signal is
OFF.
System-defined
variables
Cause and
correction
Attached
information
Event code
7491 0000Hex
Source details
Slave
Detection
timing
When instructed
by the user
Minor fault
Recovery
Error reset
(after
cancellation of
slave error)
Log category
System
Continues
Operation
EXE input processing is not executed.
EtherCAT LINK/ACT
8
None
ZW User's Manual
None
Troubleshooting
Precautions/
Remarks
Error Messages
277
Event name
SYNC input error
Meaning
SYNC input processing was not executed correctly.
Source
EtherCAT master function module
Slave
When instructed
by the user
Error attributes
Level
Minor fault
Error reset
(after
cancellation of
slave error)
System
Effects
User program
Continues
Indicators
EtherCAT NET RUN
EtherCAT NET ERR



Variable
Data type
Name
None


Assumed cause
Correction
Prevention
SYNC input turned ON in the FUN
mode.
Switch to the RUN mode, and turn
SYNC input ON.

System-defined
variables
Cause and
correction
7492 0000Hex
SYNC input processing is not executed.
EtherCAT LINK/ACT
Attached
information
None
Precautions/
Remarks
None
Event name
TIMING input error
Meaning
TIMING input processing was not executed correctly.
Source
EtherCAT master function module
Error attributes
Level
Effects
User program
Indicators
EtherCAT NET RUN
EtherCAT NET ERR



Variable
Data type
Name
None


Assumed cause
Correction
Prevention
TIMINGx input turned ON in the
FUN mode.
Switch to the RUN mode, and turn
TIMINGx input ON.

TIMINGx input turned ON or OFF
while RESETx input was ON.
Modify the program so that
TIMINGx input turns ON or OFF
when RESETx input is OFF.
Program so that TIMINGx input
turns ON or OFF when RESETx
input is OFF.
TIMINGx input turned ON in a nonmeasurement state.
Modify the program so that
TIMINGx input turns ON when the
sensor is ready for measurement.
Program so that TIMINGx input
turns ON when the sensor is ready
for measurement.
TIMINGx input turned ON before
the "delay time + sampling time"
elapsed.
Modify the program so that the
"delay time + sampling time" is
shorter than the TIMING input
interval.
Program so that the "delay time +
sampling time" is shorter than the
TIMING input interval.
System-defined
variables
Cause and
correction
278
Event code
Attached
information
None
Precautions/
Remarks
None
Error Messages
Event code
7493 0000Hex
Source details
Slave
Detection
timing
When instructed
by the user
Minor fault
Recovery
Error reset
(after
cancellation of
slave error)
Log category
System
Continues
Operation
TIMING input processing is not executed.
EtherCAT LINK/ACT
ZW User's Manual
Event name
RESET input error
Meaning
RESET input processing was not executed correctly.
Source
EtherCAT master function module
Error attributes
Level
Effects
User program
Indicators
EtherCAT NET RUN
EtherCAT NET ERR



Variable
Data type
Name
None


Assumed cause
Correction
Prevention
RESETx input turned ON in the
FUN mode.
Switch to the RUN mode, and turn
RESETx input ON.

System-defined
variables
Cause and
correction
Event code
7494 0000Hex
Source details
Slave
Detection
timing
When instructed
by the user
Minor fault
Recovery
Error reset
(after
cancellation of
slave error)
Log category
System
Continues
Operation
RESET input processing is not executed.
EtherCAT LINK/ACT
Attached
information
None
Precautions/
Remarks
None
Event name
ZERO input error
Meaning
ZERO input processing was not executed correctly.
Source
EtherCAT master function module
Error attributes
Level
Effects
User program
Indicators
EtherCAT NET RUN
EtherCAT NET ERR



Variable
Data type
Name
None


Assumed cause
Correction
Prevention
ZEROx input turned ON in the FUN
mode.
Switch to the RUN mode, and turn
ZEROx input ON.

ZEROx input turned ON in a nonmeasurement state.
Modify the program so that ZEROx
input turns ON when the sensor is
ready for measurement.
Program so that ZEROx input turns
ON when the sensor is ready for
measurement.
ZEROx input turned ON for a task
whose status is OFF.
Modify the program so that the task
that turns ZEROx input ON turns
the status ON.
Program so that the task that turns
ZEROx input ON turns the status
ON.
System-defined
variables
Cause and
correction
Precautions/
Remarks
None
ZW User's Manual
Source details
Slave
Detection
timing
When instructed
by the user
Minor fault
Recovery
Error reset
(after
cancellation of
slave error)
Log category
System
Continues
Operation
ZERO input processing is not executed.
EtherCAT LINK/ACT
Troubleshooting
None
7495 0000Hex
8
Attached
information
Event code
Error Messages
279
Event name
ZEROCLR input error
Meaning
ZEROCLR input processing was not executed correctly.
Source
EtherCAT master function module
Error attributes
Level
Effects
User program
Indicators
EtherCAT NET RUN
EtherCAT NET ERR



Variable
Data type
Name
None


Assumed cause
Correction
Prevention
ZEROCLRx input turned ON in the
FUN mode.
Switch to the RUN mode, and turn
ZEROCLRx input ON.

System-defined
variables
Cause and
correction
280
Attached
information
None
Precautions/
Remarks
None
Error Messages
Event code
7496 0000Hex
Source details
Slave
Detection
timing
When instructed
by the user
Minor fault
Recovery
Error reset
(after
cancellation of
slave error)
Log category
System
Continues
Operation
ZEROCLR input processing is not executed.
EtherCAT LINK/ACT
ZW User's Manual
Errors for EtherCAT Connection (SDO)
Abort Codes
The following table lists the abort codes for SDO communication error occurs.
Code
Meaning
05030000 h
Toggle bit not changed.
05040000 h
SDO protocol timeout.
05040001 h
Client/Server command specified not valid or unknown.
05040005 h
Out of memory.
06010000 h
Unsupported access to an object.
06010001 h
Attempt to read a write only object.
06010002 h
Attempt to write to a read only object.
06020000 h
The object does not exist in the object dictionary.
06040041 h
The object can not be mapped into the PDO.
06040042 h
The number and length of the objects to be mapped would exceed the PDO length.
06040043 h
General parameter incompatibility reason.
06040047 h
General internal incompatibility in the device.
06060000 h
Access failed due to a hardware error.
06070010 h
Data type does not match, length of service parameter does not match.
06070012 h
Data type does not match, length of service parameter too high.
06070013 h
Data type does not match, length of service parameter too low.
Subindex does not exist
06090030 h
Value range of parameter exceeded (only for write access).
06090031 h
Value of parameter written too high.
06090032 h
Value of parameter written too low.
06090036 h
Maximum value is less than minimum value.
08000000 h
General error.
08000020 h
Data cannot be transferred or stored to the application.
08000021 h
Data cannot be transferred or stored to the application because of local control.
8
06090011 h
Data cannot be transferred or stored to the application because of the present device state.
08000023 h
Object dictionary dynamic generation fails or no object dictionary is present.
ZW User's Manual
Troubleshooting
08000022 h
Error Messages
281
Errors for Ethernet or EtherNet/IP Connection
The error log for the following errors that occur in Ethernet or EtherNet/IP communications can be checked on
the digital displays.
Also, when the same error as "Sysmac error status" occurs during EtherNet/IP communications, the ERR
output signal of the corresponding area turns ON. (Note, however, that the error code cannot be checked.)
Error Code
Name
Description
Cause
Remedy
03D0 Hex
ALARM
Ethernet
communication
parameter error
An invalid IP address is
set.
Invalid IP address
setting
Change to the correct IP address.
03D3 Hex
Ethernet link not
detected
The Ethernet link cannot
be detected.
Link with switching
hub not detected
Inspect the following items:
• Are cables connected?
• Are cables disconnected or loose?
• Is there a lot of noise?
03D5 Hex
Tag data link error
Tag data link
communications cannot
be executed correctly.
Timeout occurred on Inspect the following items:
the tag data link
• Are connection-registered nodes
turned ON?
• Are cables connected?
• Are cables disconnected or loose?
• Is there a lot of noise?
Note When error marked by ALARM occur, the ALARM output of parallel I/O turns ON, and "SYSERR" and error code are displayed on the
main and sub-displays, respectively.
If an error code other than the one listed above is displayed, the displacement sensor may be broken. Please
contact an OMRON branch or sales office.
282
Error Messages
ZW User's Manual
Errors Common to All Communication States
These errors occur in common regardless of communication state. When these errors occur, the ALARM
output of parallel I/O turns ON, and "SYSERR" and error code "CODE.XX" are displayed on the main and subdisplays, respectively.
Error Code
Name
Description
Cause
Remedy
02
Linearity correction
data error
The linearity correction
data is corrupted.
03
Linearity correction
data read error
Reading of the linearity
correction data was not
executed correctly.
Calibration ROM damage Check to make sure that the
Calibration ROM is correctly
inserted. If correctly inserted, the
Calibration ROM not
Calibration ROM or displacement
inserted
sensor may be broken.
Please contact an OMRON branch
or sales office. (*1)
07
System setting error
The system settings
saved to the Sensor
Controller are corrupt.
The displacement sensor
power was turned OFF
during saving/loading of
system settings.
08
Bank data error
The bank data saved to
the Sensor Controller is
corrupt.
The displacement sensor
power was turned OFF
during saving/loading of
bank data.
11
Firmware update
error
Failed to update the
firmware by
WarpEngineZW.
WarpEngineZW was
interrupted during an
update.
Do not operate WarpEngineZW
during an update.
If this error occurs, turn the
displacement sensor ON again and
retry the update.
25
Ethernet
communication
parameter error
An invalid IP address is
set.
Invalid IP address setting
Change to the correct IP address.
After holding down the Mode
switching key, press the ZERO/SET
key to clear the system settings and
the bank data, then resume the
starting process.
If an error code other than the one listed above is displayed, the displacement sensor may be broken. Please
contact an OMRON branch or sales office.
*1:
As a provisional measure, the measurement can be resumed using the data of the previously read Calibration ROM.
<Operation method>
With error code 3 displayed on the sub-display, hold down the Mode switching key, then when [OK/CAN] is displayed, press the ZERO/SET
key.
<Cautions>
- When using this method, always check the serial number of the previously read Calibration ROM in "controller information," then check
that it matches the Sensor Head side serial number. Measurement will not be correct unless they match.
- When restarting the main unit, perform the same operations again.
This operation is disabled for a displacement sensor into which no Calibration ROM has ever been inserted and started up.
8
Troubleshooting
ZW User's Manual
Error Messages
283
8-2 Troubleshooting
This section describes how to temporarily remedy hardware-related trouble.
Check the items below before sending the hardware for repair.
Error type
Phenomenon
Cause
Countermeasure
Pages
Startup error
Device restarts during
operation.
The power supply device is not
connected correctly.
Check if the power supply device
conforms to the power supply
specifications.
p.4
The power supply capacity is
insufficient.
Display error
The main display remains The target to measure is not in the Set the target to measure in the
on "- - - - - -."
measuring range.
measuring range.
p.31
p.360
TIMING input is not ON.
Turn the TIMING input ON.
p.44
The trigger level is not
appropriately set for self-trigger.
Set the self-trigger level to an
appropriate value.
p.101
p.319
Refer to the "The measured values fluctuate." and "The logical beam does 
not come out of the Sensor Head." items below.
The main display
becomes "SYSERR."
Measurement
error
Abnormal distances are
Such phenomena are characteristic
displayed in areas clearly of the sensor.
outside the measuring
range.
The measured values
fluctuate.
284
A system error has occurred.
Troubleshooting
Identify the cause of the error based
on the error code displayed on the
sub-display and take an appropriate
action.
p.283
• Check the target to measure and
the measuring distance.
• Lowering the exposure time setting value may improve the situation.
p.79
p.304
The average count is not set
correctly.
Set the average count correctly.
p.95
p.311
The target to measure or the
Sensor Head is vibrating.
Implement a vibration-control
countermeasure.

The fiber cable end surface or the Clean the surface.
lens surface of the Sensor Head is
dirty.
p.7
p.38
The connection between the
Sensor Head and the Sensor
Controller or the connection with
the extension fiber cable is not
normal.
Check the fiber cable connections.
p.38
The fiber cable is disconnected.
Replace the fiber cable.

The Sensor Head lens is broken.
The Sensor Head needs to be

repaired.
Please contact an OMRON branch or
sales office.
For Sensor Head repair, return as a
set with the Calibration ROM.
Water and/or oil droplets are
attached.
Perform air purging and so forth to
remove the droplets.

ZW User's Manual
Error type
Phenomenon
Cause
Measurement
error
The measured values
fluctuate.
Intense ambient light is present.
Mutual interference is occurring.
The measured values
fluctuate gradually.
The operating ambient temperature
is fluctuating.
The warm-up time is inadequate.
The measured values
differ from the intended
values.
• Shield the ambient light.
• Increase the background removal
level.
Check the Sensor Head installation
position.
Smart
Monitor ZW
Operation
Manual
p.33
• Maintain a certain operating ambi- p.65
ent temperature.
p.139
• Execute zero reset periodically
using the standard object.
Wait 30 minutes after switching ON
the power before using.
p.6
Check the scaling setting.
p.87
p.314
The zero reset value is not correct. Set the zero reset correctly.
p.105
p.322
The Sensor Head has not been
calibrated correctly.
p.42
Recalibrate the Sensor Head.
The fiber cable end surface or the Clean the surface.
lens surface of the Sensor Head is
dirty.
p.38
The connection between the
Sensor Head and the Sensor
Controller or the connection with
the extension fiber cable is not
normal.
p.38
Intense ambient light is present.
Check the fiber cable connections.
• Shield the ambient light.
• Increase the background removal
level.
Smart
Monitor ZW
Operation
Manual
Mutual interference is occurring.
Check the Sensor Head installation
position.
p.33
Measurement values are
output even though the
sensor head's fiber cable
is not connected to the
Sensor Controller.
The Sensor Controller side fiber
connector is dirty.
Clean the surface.
p.38
The logical beam is not
emitted from the Sensor
Head.
The connection between the
Sensor Head and the Sensor
Controller or the connection with
the extension fiber cable is not
normal.
Check the fiber cable connections.
p.38
ZW User's Manual
The fiber cable end surface or the Clean the surface.
lens surface of the Sensor Head is
dirty.
p.38
The fiber cable is disconnected.
Replace the fiber cable.
p.38
The LED_OFF input line is shortcircuited.
Check the wiring.
p.44
Troubleshooting
No input signal received.
8
Input error
Pages
The target to measure is inclined or Place the target to measure correctly p.31
the position is offset.
in the measuring range.
The scaling has not been done
correctly.
Measured values are
output even though there
is no target.
Countermeasure
Cables are not connected correctly. Check the input circuit and the wiring p.44
for proper connection.
The signal line is disconnected.
Troubleshooting
285
Error type
Phenomenon
Cause
Countermeasure
Pages
Output error
The judgment result
cannot be output to an
external device.
Cables are not connected correctly. Check the output circuit and the
wiring for proper connection.
The signal line is disconnected.
p.44
The signal logic is not correct.
Check the logic of the signal.

The RESET input line is shortcircuited.
Check the input circuit and the wiring p.44
for proper connection.
The non-measurement setting is
Set the non-measurement setting
p.148
set to "CLAMP", and measurement correctly. By selecting the noncannot be performed.
measurement setting to "KEEP", the
judgment result before measurement
is disabled can be output.
The analog output is not
correct.
Cables are not connected correctly. Check the output circuit and the
wiring for proper connection.
The signal line is disconnected.
p.46
The voltage and current values are Set the correct monitor focus based
off the meter.
on the measured value.
p.142
An oscilloscope or a high-speed A/ Use of these devices may reduce the p.142
D board is being used.
resolution. Change the monitor focus
to minimize the affect.
Communication RS-232C communication
error
cannot be established.
Cable wirings are wrong.
Check the wiring to ensure proper
Cables are not connected correctly. connection.

Communication settings are wrong. Set the same communication setting p.230
for both the Sensor Controller and
the external devices.
Ethernet communication
cannot be established.
Use a cross cable when connecting
the controller directly with the
personal computer.
The IP address and subnet mask
are not set correctly.
Set the IP address and subnet mask p.227
correctly.
* To enable the settings, restart the
Controller.
The Sensor Controller and an
external device are not connected
at a 1:1 ratio.
Connect the Sensor Controller and
an external device at a 1:1 ratio.
286
Key input is not allowed.
Troubleshooting

The Ethernet cable is disconnected Check if the Ethernet cable is
or about to be disconnected.
disconnected.

The industrial switching hub is
faulty (when the switching hub is
used).
Check if the industrial switching hub
is faulty.

The security setting is not
appropriate.
Check if the communication is

blocked due to the firewall setting on
the external device.
Communication cannot be The node address setting switch is Check to make sure that the node
established by EtherCAT. not set correctly.
address setting switch is set
correctly.
Other

The Ethernet cable is not
connected correctly.
p.27
Devices are not connected
correctly to the EtherCAT
connector (input/output).
Check to make sure that devices are p.28
connected correctly to the EtherCAT
connector (input/output).
The key lock setting is turned ON.
Turn OFF the key lock setting.
p.115
p.335
ZW User's Manual
Sensor controller operations
9-1 Search from Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
9-2 Functions of Operating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
9-3 Digital Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
9-4 Switching operation modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
9-5 Functions and Operations during Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
9-6 Setting Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
9-7 Setting Measurement Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
9-8 Setting the Output Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
9-9 Setting the Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
9-11 Setting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
9-12 Connecting Parallel I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
9-14 Connecting with EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
9-15 Connecting by No-protocol Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Sensor controller operations
9-10 Setting Threshold Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
9
9-1 Search from Menu Tree
FUN Mode Menu
* - default value
Setting
Sensing
setting
[SENS]
Pages
*
Material
[OBJECT]
Exposure time
control mode
[EXPOSE]
Auto*
[AUTO]
Manual
[MANUAL]
Start direction of count
measurement surfaces
[SUR, DIR]
Measurement
setting
[MEAS]
Option/Setting Range
TASK1
[TASK1]
Measurement
item
[ITEM]
Height
[HEIGHT]
Thick
[THICK]
Material
[OBJECT]
Normal [NORMAL] /
Mirror surface [MIRROR]/
Diffusion surface [DIFF]
p.302
Upper limit
[UPPER]
1 to 5000 s (default value: 1000)
p.304
Fixed exposure time
1 to 5000 s (default value: 1000)
[TIME]
p.304
Start direction
of count
measurement NEAR [NEAR]*/FAR[FAR]
surfaces
[SUR, DIR]
p.304
Measurement Edge 1st [EDGE1]/Edge 2nd
surface
[EDGE2]/Edge 3rd [EDGE3]/Edge
[SUR]
4th [EDGE4]/Light Peak [PEAK] *
p.305
Edge 1st [EDGE1]/Edge 2nd
[EDGE2]/Edge 3rd [EDGE3]/Edge
4th [EDGE4]/Light Peak [PEAK] *
Edge 1st [EDGE1]/Edge 2nd
[EDGE2]/Edge 3rd [EDGE3]/Edge
4th [EDGE4]/Light Peak [PEAK] *
p.306
Surface 1
[TOP]
Surface 2
[END]
Calculation
[CALC]
Parameter K
[PARAM.K]
Parameter m
[PARAM.M]
Parameter n
[PARAM.N]
-999.999999 to 999.999999 mm
(default value: 0)
-10.0 to 10.0 (default value: 0)
-10.0 to 10.0 (default value: 0)
*
/TASK1 [TASK1]/
Parameter X None [OFF]
TASK2 [TASK2]/TASK3 [TASK3]/
[PARAM.X] TASK4 [TASK4]
*
/TASK1 [TASK1]/
Parameter Y None [OFF]
TASK2 [TASK2]/TASK3 [TASK3]/
[PARAM.Y] TASK4 [TASK4]
None
[NONE]
Filer
[FILTER]

Median
[MEDIAN]
Average
[AVE]
Differential
[DIFFER]
Differential
cycle
[CYCLE]

p.307

Off [OFF]*/Low [LOW]/Mid [MID]/
High [HIGH]
1/2/4/8/16/32/64/128/256*/512/1024/
2048/4096
p.310
p.311
*
Off [OFF] /On [ON]
p.313
1 to 5000 ms (default value: 1)
Off [OFF]*/Lowpass [LOPASS]/
Highpass [HIPASS]/
Bandpass [BDPASS]
Lowpass/highpass:
p.312
0.001 to 999.999Hz (default value:
Cutoff
0.001)
frequency Bandpass:
[CUTOFF] 0.001 to 999.999Hz (default value:
upper limit 999.999/lower limit 0.001)
Frequency
[FREQ]
288
Search from Menu Tree
ZW User's Manual
Measurement
setting
[MEAS]
TASK1
[TASK1]
(cont'd)
(cont'd)
Output
[OUTPUT]
Scaling
[SCALE]
Option/Setting Range
Auto
[AUTO]

One-point
scaling
[1PT]
Direction
[DIR]
Two-point
scaling
[2PT]
Manual
[MANUAL]
Span
[SPAN]
Offset
[OFFSET]
Thick
[THICK]
Off
[OFF]*
Hold
[HOLD]
Zero reset
[ZERO]
Teaching
[TEACH]
Direct
[DIRECT]
(Same content as TASK1)
TASK3
[TASK3]
(Same content as TASK1)
TASK4
[TASK4]
(Same content as TASK1)

Forward [FWD]*/Reverse [REV]

p.314

-2.0000 to 2.0000 (default value:
1.0000)
-999.999999 to 999.999999 mm
(default value: 0)


Off [OFF]*/Peak [PEAK]/
Bottom [BOTTOM]/Peak to peak[P-P]/
Auto peak [A.PEAK]/
Type
p.318
Auto bottom [A.BOTTM]/
[TYPE]
Auto peak to peak [A.P-P]/
Average [AVE]/Sampling [SAMPLE]
Trigger
Timing [TIMING]*/Self up trigger
[TRIG]
[SELF-U]/Self down trigger [SELF-D]
Trigger level -999.999999 to 999.999999 mm
[LEVEL] (default value: 0)
p.319
Trigger 0 to 999.999999 mm
Hysteresis (default value: 0.05% of measuring
[HYS]
range)
Delay
Off [OFF]*/On [ON]
[DELAY]
Delay time 1 to 5000 ms (default value: 1 ms)
p.321
[DLY.TIM]
Sampling time 1 to 5000 ms (default value: 100 ms)
[SMP.TIM]
Type
[TYPE]
Offset
[OFFSET]
Status
[STATUS]
Real value [REAL]*/
Hold value [HOLD]
-999.999999 to 999.999999 mm
(default value: 0)
Off [OFF]/On [ON]
*
High
threshold
[H.JUDGE]
-999.999999 to 999.999999 mm
(default value: +25% of measuring
range)
to 999.999999 mm
Low threshold -999.999999
(default value: -25% of measuring
[L.JUDGE] range)
High
threshold
[H.JUDGE]
-999.999999 to 999.999999 mm
(default value: +25% of measuring
range)
to 999.999999 mm
Low threshold -999.999999
(default value: -25% of measuring
[L.JUDGE] range)
p.324
p.323
p.322
p.331
p.333
Search from Menu Tree
9
TASK2
[TASK2]
Pages
Sensor controller operations
Threshold
[JUDGE]
ZW User's Manual
Setting
289
Setting
I/O setting
[I/O]
Non-measurement
setting
[HLD.RST]
Judgment
[JUDGE]
Output target
[OUTPUT]
Hysteresis
[HYS]
Timer
[TIMER]
Analog output
[ANALOG]
Output
destination*
[V OR C]
Output target
[OUTPUT]
Monitor focus
[FOCUS]
Calibration
[CALIB]
*
290
Option/Setting Range
Pages
Non-measurement
Keep [KEEP]/Clamp [CLAMP]*
p.344
setting
[HLD.RST]
Current output: MIN [MIN]
(approx. 3.4 mA)/4mA/5mA/..../19mA/
20mA/MAX [MAX]
Analog
output (approx. 21mA) (default value: MAX) p.345
[ANALOG] Voltage output: MIN [MIN]
(approx. -10.8V)/-10V/-9V/.../9V/10V/
MAX [MAX] (approx. 10.8V)
(default value: MAX)
Output target TASK1 [TASK1]*/TASK2 [TASK2]/
[OUTPUT] TASK3 [TASK3]/TASK4 [TASK4]
Hysteresis
[HYS]
0 to 99.9999 mm
(default value: 0.05% of measuring
range)
p.342
p.343
TIMER
Off* [OFF]/Off delay [OFF.DLY]/
On delay [ONDLY]/One shot [1SHOT]
[TIMER]
p.343
Timer time
1 to 5000 ms (default value: 1)
[TIME]
Output
destination
[V OR C]
Voltage output*/Current output
*
/
Output target Off [OFF]/TASK1 [TASK1]
TASK2 [TASK2]/TASK3 [TASK3]/
[OUTPUT] TASK4 [TASK4]
Focus
[FOCUS]
Focus
current/
voltage 1
[CUR1]/
[VOLT1]
Measurement
value 1
[MEAS1]
Focus
current/
voltage 2
[CUR2]/
[VOLT2]
Measurement
data2
[MEAS2]
Calibration
[CALIB]
Calibration
current/
voltage 1
[CUR1]/
[VOLT1]
Calibration
value 1
[ADJ1]
Calibration
current/
voltage 2
[CUR2]/
[VOLT2]
Calibration
value 2
[ADJ2]
p.338
p.339
Off [OFF]*/On [ON]
Current: 4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15/
16/17/18/19/20mA (default value: 4mA)
Current: -10/-9/-8/-7/-6/-5/-4/-3/-2/-1/
0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10V
(default value: -10V)
-999.999999 to 999.999999 mm
(default value: -0.5)
p.339
Current: 4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15/
16/17/18/19/20mA (default value: 20mA)
Current: -10/-9/-8/-7/-6/-5/-4/-3/-2/-1/
0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10V
(default value: 10V)
-999.999999 to 999.999999 mm
(default value: 0.5)
Off*/On
Current: 4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15/
16/17/18/19/20mA (default value: 4mA)
Current: -10/-9/-8/-7/-6/-5/-4/-3/-2/-1/
0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10V
(default value: -10V)
-999 to 999 (default value: 0)
p.341
Current: 4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15/
16/17/18/19/20mA (default value: 20mA)
Current: -10/-9/-8/-7/-6/-5/-4/-3/-2/-1/
0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10V
(default value: 10V)
-999 to 999 (default value: 0)
The same "OUTPUT" is set for all banks. The output destination cannot be set separately for individual banks.
Search from Menu Tree
ZW User's Manual
Setting
I/O setting
[I/O]
Data output
setting
[COM.OUT]
Data output
destination
[OUTPUT]*
Output data
format
[FORMAT]
Number of
integer digits
[INT.NUM]
Fractional
digits
[DEC.NUM]
Leading zeros
suppressed.
[ZEROSP]
(cont'd)
Field
separator
[FIELD]
Record
separator
[RECORD]
LOGGING
[PAR.LOG]
Bank setting
[BANK]
Bank change
[BK.CHG]
Bank mode
[BK.MODE]
Bank copy
[BK.COPY]
Bank clear
[BK.CLR]
Option/Setting Range
Pages
Off [OFF]*/Ethernet[ETN]/
RS232C[RS232C]

ASCII[ASCII]*/Binary[BINARY]

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 /5*

0 / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6*

Off* /On

None [NO]*/Comma [COMMA]/
Tab [TAB]/Space [SPACE]/
CR[CR]/LF[LF]/CR+LF[CRLF]/
Semicolon [SEMICO]
None [NO]*/Comma [COMMA]/
Tab [TAB]/Space [SPACE]/
CR[CR]/LF[LF]/CR+LF[CRLF]/
Semicolon [SEMICO]
Save intervals
0 to1000
[INTRVL]
Save count
0 to12800
[COUNT]


p.346
p.346
Bank1 [BANK1] to Bank8 [BANK8]
Bank number (default value: Bank1) Up to Bank32
p.326
[BANK]
can be selected when the bank mode
is "JUDGE".
Bank mode Normal [NORMAL]*/
[BK.MODE] Judgment value [JUDGE]
Copy source Bank1 [BANK1] to Bank8 [BANK8]
[FROM]
Copy destination
Bank1 [BANK1] to Bank8 [BANK8]
[TO]
Bank clear
[BK.CLR]
Ok [OK]/Cancel [CAN]
p.327
p.328
p.330
Sensor controller operations
9
ZW User's Manual
Search from Menu Tree
291
System
setting
[SYSTEM]
(cont'd)
Save
[SAVE]
Initialization
[INIT]
Communications
[COM]
RS-232C
[RS232C]
Ethernet
[ETN]
292
Search from Menu Tree
Setting
Option/Setting Range
Pages
Save
[SAVE]
OK [OK]/Cancel [CAN]
p.329
Initialization
OK [OK]/Cancel [CAN]
[INIT]
p.337
Data length
[DATA]
Parity
[PARITY]
Stop bit
[STOP]
Baud rate
[BAUD.RT]
CS/RS
[CS/RS]
p.353
7bit [7BIT]/8bit [8BIT]*
None [OFF]*/Odd [ODD]/
Even [EVEN]
1bit [1BIT]*/2 bit [2BIT]
9600/19200/38400*/57600/115200
Off [OFF]*/On [ON]
IP address 1
[IPADDR] 1 to 233 (default value: 192)
[IP1]
IP address 2
0 to 255 (default value: 168)
[IP2]
IP address 3 0 to 255 (default value: 250)
[IP3]
IP address 4
1 to 254 (default value: 50)
[IP4]
Subnet mask1
[SUBNET] 0 to 255 (default value: 255)
[SUB1]
Subnet mask2 0 to 255 (default value: 255)
[SUB2]
Subnet mask3 0 to 255 (default value: 255)
[SUB3]
Subnet mask4
0 to 255 (default value: 0)
[SUB4]
Subnet mask4 0 to 255 (default value: 0)
[SUB4]
Protocol
Off [OFF]/ TCP/Server [TCP.SV]*/
selection
[PROTCL] TCP/Client [TCP.CL]/UDP [UDP]
Output IP
address 1 1 to 233 (default value: 192)
[OUTIP]
[IP1]
Output IP
address 2 0 to 255 (default value: 168)
[IP2]
Output IP
address 3 0 to 255 (default value: 250)
[IP3]
Output IP
address 1 1 to 254 (default value: 100)
[IP4]
Port numbers 0 to 65535 (default value: 9601)
[PORT.IN]
Output
destination 0 to 65535 (default value: 9601)
port No.
[PORT.OT]
p.350
ZW User's Manual
Setting
Option/Setting Range
Pages
CR [CR] */LF [LF]/CR+LF [CRLF]
p.355
System
setting
[SYSTEM]
Communications
[COM]
Delimiter
[DELIMI]
(cont'd)
(cont'd)
Fieldbus
[MEMLINK]
Fieldbus
Off [OFF]/ EtherNet/IP [EIP]/
[MEM.LINK] EtherCAT [E-CAT]*
-
GATE signal
ON time
[GATE.TM]
GATE signal
ON
0 to 100 (default value: 1)
[GATE.TM]
-
Sensor head
Calibration
[H.CALIB]
Delimitter
[DELIMI]
Sensor head
calibration OK [OK]/Cancel [CAN]
[H.CALIB]
Key lock
[LOCK]
Key lock
[LOCK]
p.336
Off [OFF]*/On [ON]
p.335
Zero reset
MEMORY
[ZER.MEM]
Zero reset
memory
Off [OFF]*/On [ON]
[ZER.MEM]
p.325
TIMING/
RESET key
input
[KEY.IN]
TIMING/
RESET key
input
[KEY.IN]
OFF [OFF]*/ON [ON]
p.320
Measuring
cycle
[CYCLE]
Measuring
cycle
[CYCLE]
Displays the current measuring cycle. p.334
500 to 10000 s (default value: 2000)
Controller
information
[C.INFO]
Software
version
[VER]
MAC Address
[MAC.ADR]
Error history
[ERR.LOG]
Error history
display
[LOG.DSP]
Error clear
[LOG.CLR]
Sensor head
information
[H.INFO]
Displays the version.
p.334
Displays the current MAC address.
Clears/displays the error history.
-
No.01 to No.64
(default value: No.01)
-
OK [OK]/Cancel [CAN]
-
Model
[MODEL]
Displays the model.
Serial No.
[SER.NO]
Displays the serial No..
p.334
Sensor controller operations
RUN (run) Mode Menu
Setting [DISPLAY]
Option/Setting Range [DISPLAY]
Pages
Task for displayed target [DISP]
TASK1/TASK2/TASK3/TASK4
p.300
p.301
LOW threshold value [L.JUDGE]
Sensor Controller: -999.99 to 999.999
Smart Monitor ZW: -999.999999 to 999.999999
p.301
Decimal point digit [DEC.NUM]
0[0DIG]/1 [1DIG]/2 [2DIG]/3 [3DIG]/4 [4DIG]/5 [5DIG]
p.300
ZW User's Manual
Search from Menu Tree
9
HIGH threshold value [H.JUDGE] Sensor Controller: -999.99 to 999.999
Smart Monitor ZW: -999.999999 to 999.999999
293
9-2 Functions of Operating Keys
The following table lists the names and functions of the operating keys on the Sensor Controller:
Name
 (LEFT) key
 (RIGHT) key
 (UP) key
 (DOWN) key
Function
RUN Mode
FUN Mode
Changes sub-display content.
Functions differently depending on the settings.
• Function display switching
• Numerical value digit selection
• Setting cancellation
key: Executes TIMING input.
key: Executes RESET input.
Functions differently depending on the settings.
• Selection menu switching
• Setting value selection
* These keys are available only if key
inputs for the hold functions have
been enabled in the FUN mode.
Performing Hold with
a Key Input p.103
Mode switching key
Hold down for at least two seconds
to enter the FUN mode.
Hold down for at least two seconds to enter the
RUN mode.
• For operating mode switching, "SWITCH" is
displayed on the main display and "OK/CAN" is
displayed on the sub-display. Press the ZERO/
SET key to switch the mode.
• When the mode is switched from FUN mode to
RUN mode, "SAVE" is displayed on the main
display and "OK/CAN" is displayed on the subdisplay.
Press the ZERO/SET key to save the settings
and switch the operating mode.
Press the ZERORST/ESC key to switch the
operating mode without saving the settings.
If you press for less than 2 seconds, the display
shifts to RUN mode task switching and the
threshold value setting menu.
Also, this starts teaching to set threshold values
when setting a threshold value.
294
ZERO/SET key
Executes a zero reset.
Functions differently depending on the selections.
• Application of selection conditions and numerical values
• Switching to lower menus
ZERORST/ESC key
Hold down for at least two seconds
to cancel a zero reset.
Functions differently depending on the selections.
• Cancellation of selection conditions and numerical values
• Switching to upper menus
Hold down for at least two seconds to jump to the
top menu on the FUN mode.
Functions of Operating Keys
ZW User's Manual
9-3 Digital Displays
The theme displayed on the main or sub-display varies depending on the currently selected operating mode.
The following table lists the theme displayed, when turning the Sensor Controller ON, or in the RUN or FUN
mode.
Operation mode
Main display (upper line, in red)
Sub-display (lower line, in green)
When turning ON The Sensor Controller model name, "[email protected]@"
appears.
During the initialization, "INIT" is displayed.
The system enters the RUN mode after displaying "INIT" for a few seconds.
RUN mode
The task measurement result appears.
The task to display can be toggled.
Changing Display Details p.300
Press and hold the
FUN mode
Press the
/
key to cycle through the sequence
of the HIGH and LOW threshold values, analog output
(voltage/current), judgment result, resolution (the max. and
min. values for 1-min measured value), exposure time,
distance (Sensor Head to the object to measure), effective
bank, and displayed task in descending or ascending
order.
key for two seconds or more to switch between the RUN and FUN modes.
Press the
/
keys to cycle through the
function names in descending or ascending order.
When reaching the lowest layer, the setting value
displayed on the main display appears.
Alphabetical notation
Alphabet characters are displayed on the main and sub-display as follows:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A B C D E F G H I J L M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Sensor controller operations
N 0 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
9
ZW User's Manual
Digital Displays
295
9-4 Switching operation modes
3-3 Switching operation modes p.61
Use
key to switch between the operation modes.
The RUN indicator identifies the current operation mode.
RUN mode: Turned on.
FUN mode: Turned off.
To switch between the RUN
and FUN modes, press and
hold the button for two
seconds.
296
Switching operation modes
ZW User's Manual
Entering Numerical Values
To enter numerical values, including parameters, for the sub-display, follow the steps below:
Sub-display
(Parameter)
Apply
Select
digit
Select
value
(1) When entering numerical values, the sub-display displays the current setting value and its uppermost digit
flashes.
(2) Press the
Press the
Press the
(3) Press the
(4) Press the
/
keys to select a digit to enter a number.
key on the rightmost digit to move blinking to the leftmost digit.
key on the leftmost digit to move blinking to the rightmost digit.
/
keys to select a digit to enter a number.
key to apply the entered value.
Positioning decimal point
To position a decimal point, follow the steps below:
Sub-display
(Parameter)
Apply
Select
position
(1) If a decimal point has been defined, it flashes on the sub-display.
(3) Press the
Sensor controller operations
(2) Press the
/
keys to position the decimal point.
Position the decimal point at the rightmost digit to erase it.
Press the
key on the rightmost digit to move blinking to the leftmost digit.
Press the
key on the leftmost digit to move blinking to the rightmost digit.
key to apply the position of the decimal point.
9
ZW User's Manual
Switching operation modes
297
9-5 Functions and Operations during Measurement
Switching the RUN (Run) Mode Display
In the RUN mode, you can switch the measured value display by pressing the
/
keys during the operation.
You can check the threshold value and analog output value while displaying the measured value on the main display.
HIGH threshold value
H lit
L unlit
Tag link status
H unlit
L unlit
Internal logging status
H unlit
L unlit
LOW threshold value
H unlit
L lit
Online status
H unlit
L unlit
Link status
H unlit
L unlit
Analog voltage
output value
H unlit
L unlit
Displayed Task for
displayed target
H unlit
L unlit
Distance
H unlit
L unlit
Analog current
output value
H unlit
L unlit
Task for
displayed target
H unlit
(Note 1)
H unlit
(Note 2)
L unlit
Distance
H unlit
Judgement result
L unlit
L unlit
Resolution
H unlit
L unlit
Exposure time
H unlit
L unlit
The above display screenshots are only samples and may different from actual displays.
(Note 1) An output item not selected on the analog output (Voltage output/Current output) is displayed as "-----" on the sub-display. For example, if "Voltage output" is selected on the analog output, the analog
current output value is displayed as "------" on the sub-display.
(Note 2) "Displayed task" can be selected from TASK1 to TASK4. "Task for displayed target" is displayed as "[email protected]"
@ indicates the task number. (Refer to p.300 for the task for displayed target.) ) If the task for displayed
target is TASK2, for example, "TASK1, "dTASK2," "TASK3" and "TASK4" will be displayed.
Details Displayed on the Main Display
The measured values always appear on the main display.
The measured values are initialized as follows:
• Reference value "0": Measurement center distance
• + display: NEAR (close range) side
• - display: FAR (far range) side
However, in the following cases, the measurement values are not displayed.
• When the amount of light received is inadequate, "DARK" is displayed; when the sensor is saturated,
"BRIGHT" is displayed.
• When there is no surface present to measure, "NO.SRFC" is displayed.
• When the measurement LED is OFF, "LEDOFF" is displayed.
• When the measurement surface is far outside the measurement range or if no hold value is finalized when
hold is set, then "------" is displayed.
298
Functions and Operations during Measurement
ZW User's Manual
Details Displayed on the Sub-display
The items listed in the following table appears on the sub-display.
Press the
/
keys to toggle the display.
Description
Threshold
Displays the HIGH and LOW threshold values for tasks for displayed target.
THRESHOLD-H indicator lights for the HIGH threshold value. THRESHOLD-L indicator lights for the LOW
threshold value.
Analog output
Displays the voltage or current value output in analog format.
The display details for the output destination setting are different for voltage output and for current output.
(Values displayed here are reference values only. These values differ from actual analog output values.)
Judgment result
The judgment result for each task appears.
The TASK1, 2, 3 and 4 judgment results are displayed starting from the left.
H: HIGH
P: PASS
L: LOW
E: ERROR
Resolution
Displays the fluctuation width (peak to peak) of the measured value over a fixed amount of time.
Exposure time
Displays the current exposure time.
The time is displayed in the range 1 to 5000 s.
Distance
Displays the distance from the Sensor Head to a target to measure.
Effective bank
Displays the current bank number.
Displayed task
Displays the currently selected task number from TASK1 to TASK4.
The measured value for the selected task appears on the main display.
Ethernet communication
status
Whether Ethernet communications are possible is displayed.
ONLINE: Communication possible
OFLINE: Communication not possible
Ethernet link status
Whether the Ethernet connection is enabled is displayed.
LINK.OK: Connection established
LINK.--: Connection not established
Tag link status
The status of EtherNet/IP tag link communication is displayed.
TAG.INI: Initializing
TAG.OK: Tag connection established
TAG.--: Tag connection not established
TAG.ER1: Tag link abnormality
TAG.ER2: Other abnormality
Internal logging status
Displays the status of operation internal logging.
LOG.RDY : Internal logging stopped state (When ZW start, When internal logging data is cleared, When
internal logging stopped)
LOG.RUN : Internal logging in progress
LOG.END : Internal logging ended state(When internal logging is automatically ended)
Sensor controller operations
Display Details
9
ZW User's Manual
Functions and Operations during Measurement
299
Changing Display Details
The measurement result displayed on the main display in RUN mode can be selected from TASK1 to 4.
The number of digits displayed can also be changed.
Setting [DISPLAY]
Option [DISPLAY]
Task for displayed target [DISP]
TASK1/TASK2/TASK3/TASK4
Decimal point digit [DEC.NUM]
0 [0DIG]/1 [1DIG]/2 [2DIG]/3 [3DIG]/4 [4DIG]/5 [5DIG]
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for setting TASK2 as the task to be displayed target.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press the
menu.
2
Press the
3
Select the task to be the displayed target.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
key in the RUN mode to display the setting
/
/
keys to select "DISP" and press the
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select "TASK2" and press the
4
300
Functions and Operations during Measurement
Press the
key.
key.
key to leave the setting menu.
ZW User's Manual
Changing Threshold Values
The threshold value for the task displayed on the main display in the RUN mode can be changed.
Important
To change the target task, change the task displayed on the main display.
Changing Display Details p.300
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for setting the HIGH threshold value by entering
"1.000" directly.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press the
menu.
key in the RUN mode to display the setting
2
Press the
key.
3
Set "1.000" as the HIGH threshold value.
The current measured value is displayed on the main display and the
current set threshold value is displayed on the sub-display. (At this
time, the THRESHOLD-H indicator lights up.)
Press
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display
blinks.
/
key to select H.JUDGE, then press the
To edit numerical values, use the
Input "1.000", then press the
Press the
/
keys.
key to leave the setting menu.
Sensor controller operations
4
/
/
key.
9
ZW User's Manual
Functions and Operations during Measurement
301
9-6 Setting Sensing
Setting the Material of the Target to Measure
Setting the Material of the Target to Measure p.75
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for the "MIRROR" setting as the material.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
2
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "SENS" and press the
3
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "OBJECT" and press the
4
Select the material.
NORMAL: Normal
MIRROR: Mirror
DIFF: Diffusion surface
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "MIRROR" and press the
key.
5
302
Setting Sensing
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
Setting Start Direction of Count Measurement Surfaces
Setting Start Direction of Count Measurement Surfaces p.78
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for setting start direction of count measurement surface
to "NEAR".
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
2
Press the
key.
3
Select the material.
NEAR: NEAR direction
FAR: FAR direction
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
/
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
keys to select "SUR.DUR" and press the
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "NEAR" and press the
key.
4
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Sensor controller operations
9
ZW User's Manual
Setting Sensing
303
Setting Exposure Time Control Mode
Setting Exposure Time Control Mode p.79
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for setting the exposure time control mode to "AUTO"
and the exposure time (maximum) to "500 s".
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
2
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "SENS" and press the
3
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "EXPOSE" and press the
4
Select the exposure time control mode.
AUTO: Automatic
MANUAL: Fixed
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "AUTO" and press the
key.
5
Set the exposure time (maximum) or exposure time (fixed).
In this example, "UPPER" is displayed on the main display, and the
current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display
blinks.
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
In this example, select "500" and press the
6
304
Setting Sensing
Press the
/
keys.
key.
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
9-7 Setting Measurement Items
Measuring the Height
Measuring the Height p.83
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for measuring the height of the surface (2nd surface)
below a transparent object (as shown in the diagram on p.83).
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
2
Press the
/
key to select MEAS, then press the
key.
3
Press the
/
key to select TASK1, then press the
key.
4
Press the
/
keys to select "ITEM" and press the
key.
5
Press the
key.
6
Select the measurement surface.
EDGE1 to EDGE4: 1st surface to 4th surface
PEAK: Peak
"SUR" is displayed on the main display and the current setting value
is displayed on the sub-display.
/
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
keys to select "HEIGHT" and press the
Sensor controller operations
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "EDGE2" and press the
key.
7
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
9
ZW User's Manual
Setting Measurement Items
305
Measuring the Thickness
Measuring the Thickness p.85
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for measuring the thickness from the top surface of
glass on which specular reflection occurs as the 1st surface to the 2nd surface (as shown in the diagram on
p.85).
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
1
2
Description
Press and hold the
mode.
Set the material of the target to "MIRROR."
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
Optional
Setting the Material of the Target to Measure p.302
If the target object is a transparent object, such as glass, on which specular reflection occurs, set the material of the
measurement object to "MIRROR" to obtain more accurate measurement result.
3
Set the surface to "SUR.1ST."
3-1
Press the
/
key to select MEAS, then press the
key.
3-2
Press the
/
key to select TASK1, then press the
key.
3-3
Press the
/
keys to select "ITEM" and press the
key.
3-4
Press the
keys to select "THICK" and press the
key.
3-5
Select "SUR1."
Press the
/
keys to select "TOP" and press the
key.
3-6
/
Select the measurement surface.
EDGE1 to EDGE4: 1st surface to 4th surface
PEAK: Peak
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "EDGE1" and press the
key.
4
306
Set the surface2 to "SUR.2ND."
Setting Measurement Items
ZW User's Manual
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
4-1
Press the
4-2
Select "SUR2."
Press the
/
4-3
key to return to the previous menu.
keys to select "END" and press the
key.
Select the measurement surface.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "EDGE2" and press the
key.
5
Scaling setting
Setting Scaling p.87
6
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Calculating
Performing Calculations p.86
As an example, here is an explanation of the output of the calculation result below.
Sensor controller operations
(Example)
When calculating the amount of convexity and concavity on the object surface from the difference between the
average value and the peaks and outputting this to TASK3
TASK1: Surface peak hold
TASK2: Surface average hold
TASK3: TASK1 - TASK2 setting
• PARAMETER K: 0
• PARAMETER m: 1
• PARAMETER n: -1
• PARAMETERX: TASK1
• PARAMETERY: TASK2
9
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
2
Press the
ZW User's Manual
/
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
key to select MEAS, then press the
key.
Setting Measurement Items
307
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
3
Sets the surface peak hold for TASK1 and the surface average hold for TASK2.
Setting Hold p.98
4
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "TASK3" and press the
5
Press the
/
keys to select "ITEM" and press the
6
Press the
7
Select "PARAM.K" for the parameter type.
Press the
/
keys to select "PARAM.K" and press the
key.
8
Set the parameter to "0".
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display
blinks.
/
keys to select "CALC" and press the
To edit numerical values, use the
Input "0", then press the
9
/
/
key.
keys.
key.
The decimal point is displayed.
Press the
/
key to move the decimal point.
Determine the decimal point and then press the
key.
10
Press the
key to return to the previous menu.
11
Select "PARAMm" for the parameter type.
Press the
/
keys to select "PARAM.M" and press the
key.
12
Set the parameter to "1".
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display
blinks.
To edit numerical values, use the
/
Input "1", then press the
key.
13
308
/
key.
Setting Measurement Items
Press the
/
/
keys.
key to return to the previous menu.
ZW User's Manual
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
14
Select "PARAMn" for the parameter type.
Press the
/
keys to select "PARAM.N" and press the
key.
15
Set the parameter to "-1".
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display
blinks.
To edit numerical values, use the
/
Input "-1", then press the
key.
/
/
keys.
16
Press the
key to return to the previous menu.
17
Select "PARAM.X" for the parameter type.
Press the
/
keys to select "PARAM.X" and press the
key.
18
Set the parameter to "TASK1".
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select "TASK1" and press the
key.
Press the
key to return to the previous menu.
20
Select "PARAMY" for the parameter type.
Press the
/
keys to select "PARAM.Y" and press the
key.
21
Set the parameter to "TASK2".
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Sensor controller operations
19
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select "TASK2" and press the
key.
ZW User's Manual
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Setting Measurement Items
9
22
309
9-8 Setting the Output Conditions
Setting the Filter
Setting Filters p.93
Setting the Median Filter
Setting the Median Filter p.94
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for selecting the "MID" median filter setting.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
2
Press the
/
key to select MEAS, then press the
3
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "TASK1" and press the
4
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "FILTER" and press the
5
Select "MEDIAN" as the filter type.
Press the
/
keys to select "MEDIAN" and press the
key.
6
Select the filter mode from the following:
OFF / LOW / MID / HIGH
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
key.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "MID" and press the
key.
7
310
Setting the Output Conditions
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Average Filter
Setting the Average Filter p.95
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for selecting the "128" average count setting.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
1 to 4
For moving to "FILTER", see steps 1 to 4 on p.310.
5
6
Display
Description
Select "AVE" as the filter type.
Press the
/
keys to select "AVE" and press the
key.
Select the average count.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "128" and press the
key.
7
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Sensor controller operations
9
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
311
Setting the Frequency Filter
Setting the Frequency Filter p.96
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for selecting the "LOPASS" setting for the frequency
filter type, and the "1Hz" cut-off frequency filter setting.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
1 to 4
For moving to "FILTER", see steps 1 to 4 in p.310.
Display
Description
5
Select "FRQNCY" as the filter type.
Press the
/
keys to select "FREQ" and press the
key.
6
Select the frequency filter type.
LO.PASS: LOWPASS FILTER
HIPASS: HIGHPASS FILTER
BD.PASS: BANDPASS FILTER
Select "LOPASS" as the frequency filter type.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "LO.PASS" and press the
key.
7
Set the cut-off frequency.
"CUTOFF" is displayed on the main display and the current setting
value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display
blinks.
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
In this example, input "1", then press the
8
312
Setting the Output Conditions
Press the
/
keys.
key.
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Differentiation Filter
Setting the Differentiation Filter p.97
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for selecting the "10ms" number of differential cycles.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
1 to 4
For moving to "FILTER", see steps 1 to 4 in p.310.
Display
Description
5
Select "DIFFER" as the filter type.
Press the
/
keys to select "DIFFER" and press the
key.
6
Enable the differentiation filter.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select "ON", then press the
key.
7
Set the number of differential cycles.
"CYCLE" is displayed on the main display and the current setting
value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display
blinks.
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
In this example, input "10", then press the
8
Press the
/
keys.
key.
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Sensor controller operations
9
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
313
Setting Scaling
Performing Manual Scaling
Performing Manual Scaling p.87
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for setting the manual scaling type to "SPAN" and the
inclination coefficient to "1.2".
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the FUN mode.
2
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "MEAS" and press the
3
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "TASK 1" and press the
4
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "OUTPUT" and press the
5
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "SCALE" and press the
6
Select "MANUAL" as the scaling type.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press the
/
keys to enter the editing mode, and the subdisplay blinks.
Select "MANUAL" and press the
key.
7
8
Set the manual scaling type.
SPAN: Span
OFFSET: Offset
In this example, press the
the
key.
/
keys, select "SPAN" and press
Set the inclination coefficient.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press the
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display
blinks.
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
In this example, select "1.2" and press the
9
314
Setting the Output Conditions
Press the
/
keys.
key.
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
Automatically Setting Scaling
Performing 1-point Scaling
Performing 1-point Scaling p.88
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
1 to 5
For moving to "SCALE", see steps 1 to 5 in p.314.
6
Display
Description
Select "AUTO" as the scaling type.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select "AUTO" and press the
key.
7
Select "1POINT".
Press the
/
keys to select "1PT" and press the
key.
8
Press the
key when the main display shows "POINT1".
9
The current measured value is displayed on the main display and the
current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
Enter the setting value and then press the
keys.
key.
Sensor controller operations
10
/
Set the increment/decrement direction.
"DIRECT" is displayed on the main display and the incremental/
decremental directions ("FWD": the NEAR side as + and "REV": the
FAR side as +) are displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Enter the setting value and then press the
key.
11
"OK/CAN" is displayed on the sub-display.
Press the
key to execute scaling or
key to cancel.
9
12
ZW User's Manual
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Setting the Output Conditions
315
Performing 2-point Scaling
Performing 2-point Scaling p.90
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1 to 6
For moving to "SCALE" - "AUTO", see steps 1 to 6 in p.314.
7
Press the
/
keys to select "2PT" and press the
8
Press the
9
Set the measured value of point 1.
The current measured value is displayed on the main display and the
current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
key when the main display shows "POINT1".
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
Enter the setting value and then press the
10
Press the
11
Set the measured value of point 2.
13
316
Setting the Output Conditions
"OK/CAN" is displayed on the sub-display.
Press the
key to execute scaling or
Press the
/
keys.
key.
key when the main display shows "POINT2".
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
Enter the setting value and then press the
12
key.
/
keys.
key.
key to cancel.
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
Performing Thickness Scaling
Performing Thickness Scaling p.92
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
1 to 5
For moving to "SCALE", see steps 1 to 5 in p.314.
6
Display
Description
Select "THICK" as the scaling type.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select "THICK" and press the
key.
7
The current measured value is displayed on the main display and the
current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display
blinks.
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
Enter the setting value and then press the
8
9
"OK/CAN" is displayed on the sub-display.
Press the
key to execute scaling or
Press the
/
keys.
key.
key to cancel.
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Sensor controller operations
9
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
317
Setting Hold
Setting the Hold Mode
Setting the Hold Mode p.98
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for selecting the "PEAK" hold mode setting.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
2
Press the
/
key to select MEAS, then press the
key.
3
Press the
/
key to select TASK1, then press the
key.
4
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "OUTPUT" and press the
5
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "HOLD" and press the
6
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "TYPE" and press the
7
Set the hold mode.
PEAK: Peak
BOTTOM: Bottom
P-P: PEAK TO PEAK
AUTOPK: AUTO PEAK
AUTOBT: AUTO BOTTOM
AUTOPP: AUTO PEAK TO PEAK
AVE: AVERAGE
SAMPLE: Sampling
OFF: Through
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "PEAK" and press the
key.
8
318
Setting the Output Conditions
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
Setting Triggers
Setting Triggers p.101
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for selecting the "TIMING" trigger type setting.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
1 to 5
For moving to "HOLD", see steps 1 to 5 in p.318.
Display
Description
6
Press the
/
keys to select "TRIG" and press the
7
Set the trigger method.
TIMING: External
SELF-U: SELF-UP
SELF-D: SELF-DOWN
"TYPE" is displayed on the main display and the current setting
value is displayed on the sub-display.
key.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "TIMING" and press the
key.
8
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Sensor controller operations
9
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
319
Performing Hold with a Key Input
Press the
/
key on the Sensor Controller to enable the TIMING or RESET input.
• TIMING input is ON while the
•
• RESET input is ON when the
key is pressed.
key is pressed.
Note that the key input is disabled in the default setting. Set the following when using this function.
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
2
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "SYSTEM" and press the
3
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "KEY.IN" and press the
4
Enable the key input.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select "ON" and press the
key.
5
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Note
The above settings are also possible using the personal computer tools.
Performing Hold with a Key Input p.103
320
Setting the Output Conditions
ZW User's Manual
Setting a Trigger Delay
Setting a Trigger Delay p.104
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
1 to 5
For moving to "HOLD", see steps 1 to 5 in p.318.
Display
Description
6
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "DELAY" and press the
7
Enable the delay.
"DELAY" is displayed on the main display and the current setting
value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select "ON" and press the
key.
8
Select the delay time.
Press the
/
keys to select "DLY.TIM" and press the
key.
9
Set the delay time.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display
blinks.
/
keys.
key.
Press the key to return to the previous menu.
11
Select the sampling time.
Press the
/
keys to select "SMP.TIM" and press the
key.
12
Set the sampling time.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display
blinks.
13
ZW User's Manual
Press the
/
9
10
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
In this example, input "10", then press the
Sensor controller operations
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
In this example, input "10", then press the
keys.
key.
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Setting the Output Conditions
321
Setting the Zero Reset
Setting the Status
Setting the Status p.105
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for selecting the "ON" (Enabled) zero reset type
setting.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
2
Press the
/
key to select MEAS, then press the
key.
3
Press the
/
key to select TASK1, then press the
key.
4
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "OUTPUT" and press the
5
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "ZERO" and press the
6
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "STATUS" and press the
7
Set zero reset ON/OFF.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "ON" and press the
key.
8
322
Setting the Output Conditions
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Offset
Setting the Offset p.106
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for selecting the "10 mm" reference value setting.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
1 to 5
For moving to "ZERO", see steps 1 to 5 in p.322.
Display
Description
6
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "OFFSET" and press the
7
Change the offset value.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display
blinks.
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
In this example, input "10", then press the
8
9
/
keys.
key.
The decimal point is displayed.
Press the
/
key to move the decimal point.
Determine the decimal point and then press the
Press the
key.
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Sensor controller operations
9
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
323
Setting the Zero Reset Mode
Setting the Zero Reset Type p.107
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for selecting the "REAL" zero reset type setting.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
1 to 5
For moving to "ZERO", see steps 1 to 5 in p.322.
Display
Description
6
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "TYPE" and press the
7
Select the zero reset mode.
REAL: Real
HOLD: Hold
Select "REAL" as the zero reset type.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "REAL" and press the
key.
8
324
Setting the Output Conditions
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Zero Reset Memory
Setting the Zero Reset Memory p.108
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for selecting the "ON" (enabled) zero reset memory
setting.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
2
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "SYSTEM" and press the
3
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "ZER.MEM" and press the
4
Select zero reset memory ON/OFF.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "ON" and press the
key.
5
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Sensor controller operations
9
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Output Conditions
325
9-9 Setting the Banks
Switching Banks
Switching Banks p.64
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for setting BANK2.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the key for two seconds to enter the FUN
mode.
2
Press the
/
key to select BANK, then press the
3
Press the
key.
/
key to select BK.CHG, then press the
4
Select BANK2 for the bank number.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
key.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select "BANK2" and press the
key.
5
326
Setting the Banks
Press and hold the
mode.
key for two seconds to enter the RUN
ZW User's Manual
Changing the Bank Mode
Changing the Bank Mode p.110
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for selecting the "NORMAL" bank mode setting.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
2
Press the
/
key to select BANK, then press the
3
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "BK.MODE" and press the
4
Select the bank data.
NORMAL: NORMAL
JUDGE: JUDGEMENT
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
key.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "NORMAL" and press the
key.
5
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Sensor controller operations
9
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Banks
327
Copying the Bank Settings
Copy the selected bank setting to another bank.
Copying the Bank/System Settings p.111
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for copying the BANK1 setting to BANK4.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
2
Press the
/
key to select BANK, then press the
3
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "BK.COPY" and press the
4
Select "BANK1" as the bank setting to be copied.
"FROM" is displayed on the main display and the current setting
value is displayed on the sub-display.
key.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select "BANK1" and press the
key.
5
Select "BANK4" as the target to copy the bank setting.
"TO" is displayed on the main display and the current setting value is
displayed on the sub-display.
Press the
/
keys to enter the editing mode, and the subdisplay blinks.
Select "BANK4" and press the
key.
6
328
Setting the Banks
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
Saving the Bank/System Settings
Save the bank/system settings to the Sensor Controller.
Important
• The settings of all banks are saved regardless of the currently selected bank number.
• After you have made or changed settings, be sure to save the setup data. All settings will be deleted if you turn the
power OFF without saving the data.
Here is an explanation of the procedure for saving the bank/system settings.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
2
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "SYSTEM" and press the
3
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "SAVE" and press the
4
"OK/CAN" is displayed on the sub-display.
Press the
key to save the settings or the
cancel.
Press the
key to
Sensor controller operations
5
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
9
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Banks
329
Clearing the Bank Settings
Clear (initialize) the setting of the currently selected bank.
Clearing the Bank Settings p.113
Important
Operations on the Sensor Controller do not initialize system settings and settings displayed in RUN mode.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
2
Press the
/
key to select BANK, then press the
3
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "BK.CLR" and press the
4
"OK/CAN" is displayed on the sub-display.
Press the
key to clear the settings or the
cancel.
5
330
Display
Setting the Banks
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
key.
key to
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
9-10Setting Threshold Value
3-6 Setting Threshold Value p.68
There are two ways of setting the threshold value.
Method
Operating key
Description
TEACHING
Perform the measurement and set the result as the threshold value.
This is a convenient way when the upper or lower limit sample is available.
Direct
/
/
/
Set the threshold value by entering the numerical values directly.
This is a convenient way when you know the dimensions of a quality product or
when adjusting the threshold value set by teaching.
Teaching
Perform the measurement and set the result as the threshold value.
Sensor head
Sensor head
Teaching point
= HIGH threshold value
Teaching point
= LOW threshold value
Threshold sample
(lower limit)
Sensor controller operations
Threshold sample
(upper limit)
The existing settings for hold, trigger, and scaling are also reflected in the measurement during teaching.
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for setting the current measured value as a HIGH
threshold value.
9
ZW User's Manual
Setting Threshold Value
331
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
2
Press the
/
key to select MEAS, then press the
key.
3
Press the
/
key to select TASK1, then press the
key.
4
Press the
key.
/
key to select JUDGE, then press the
5
Press the
key.
/
key to select TEACH, then press the
6
Select HIGH THRESHHOLD as the threshold value type.
Press the
/
key to select H.JUDGE, then press the
key.
7
The current measured value is displayed on the main display and the
current set threshold value is displayed on the sub-display. (At this
time, the THRESHOLD-H indicator lights up.)
Press the
key to display the current measured value on the
lower line in the main display.
8
9
332
Setting Threshold Value

Press the
key to start a teaching.
The indicator for the current measured value on the main display
lights up, applying the value as a threshold value.
Press and hold the
mode.
key for two seconds to enter the RUN
ZW User's Manual
Direct
Set the threshold value by entering the numerical values directly.
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for setting a HIGH threshold value by entering "40.000"
directly.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
1 to 4
For moving to JUDGE, see steps 1 to 4 on p.332.
Display
Description
5
Press the
key.
6
Select HIGH THRESHHOLD as the threshold value type.
Press the
/
key to select H.JUDGE, then press the
key.
7
Set "40.000" as the HIGH threshold value.
The current measured value is displayed on the main display and the
current set threshold value is displayed on the sub-display. (At this
time, the THRESHOLD-H indicator lights up.)
Press
blinks.
8
/
key to select DIRECT, then press the
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display
To edit numerical values, use the
/
Enter "40.000" and press the
key.
Press and hold the
mode.
/
/
keys.
key for two seconds to enter the RUN
Sensor controller operations
9
ZW User's Manual
Setting Threshold Value
333
9-11Setting the System
Display/set the system environment.
Checking Information
Display the set measuring cycle and information of the Sensor Controller and Sensor Head.
Checking Information p.114
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for displaying the serial No. of the Sensor Head.
Operating procedure
Steps
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
2
Press the
key.
3
Select the information to display.
CYCLE: Currently set measurement cycle [ms]
C.INFO: CONTROLLER INFORMATION
H.INFO: SENSOR HEAD INFORMATION
In this example, press the
/
keys, select "H.INFO" and
press the
key.
4
When the Controller information and Sensor Head information have
been changed, select the additional information to display:
VER: Controller version information
MAC.ADR: Controller MAC address
MODEL: Sensor Head model information
SER.NO: Sensor Head serial No.
In this example, press the
/
keys, select "SER.NO" and
press the
key.
5
334
Key operation
-
/
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
keys to select "SYSTEM" and press the
"SER.1" is displayed on the main display and the higher-order digit
of the serial No. is displayed on the sub-display.
6
When the
/
key is pressed, "SER.2" is displayed on the
main display and the lower-order digit of the serial No. is displayed
on the sub-display.
7
Press the
Setting the System
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Key Lock
Setting the Key Lock p.115
Important
Note that, moving to the key lock setting menu or moving between menu hierarchies are possible even when the key
lock function is ON.
Here is an explanation of the procedure for turning the key lock ON.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
2
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "SYSTEM" and press the
3
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "LOCK" and press the
4
Select key lock ON/OFF.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press the
/
keys to enter the editing mode, and the subdisplay blinks.
In this example, select "ON" and press the
key.
Press the
Sensor controller operations
5
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
9
ZW User's Manual
Setting the System
335
Calibrating Sensor Head
Calibrating Sensor Head p.42
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
1
Description
Press and hold the
key for two seconds to enter the FUN mode.
(For details on the functions of the Mode switching key, see p.294.)
2
Press the
/
keys to select "SYSTEM" and press the
key.
3
Press the
/
keys to select "H.CALIB", then press the
key.
4
"OK/CAN" is displayed on the sub-display.
Press the
5
Press the
key to execute calibration or the
key to cancel.
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Important When Sensor Head calibration fails
If the Sensor Head is calibrated in an inappropriate environment, an error is displayed on the main display. If this
key to return to the previous screen and try again. If an error continues even after
happens, press the
calibrating the Sensor Head in an appropriate environment, the fiber connector on the Sensor Head or Sensor
Controller may be stained. Clean the fiber cable or fiber connector referring to p.39.
336
Setting the System
ZW User's Manual
Initializing Settings
Initializing Settings p.116
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
mode.
2
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "SYSTEM" and press the
3
Press the
/
keys to select "INIT" and press the
4
"OK/CAN" is displayed on the sub-display.
Press the
key to restore the default values, or
cancel.
5
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the FUN
key.
key to
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Sensor controller operations
9
ZW User's Manual
Setting the System
337
9-12Connecting Parallel I/O
Settings for Analog Output
Setting the analog output destination
Setting the analog output destination p.140
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for outputting the voltage.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
2
Press the
/
keys to select "I/O" and press the
3
Press the
/
keys to select "ANALOG" and press the
4
Press the
/
keys to select "V OR C" and press the
5
Select the output destination.
VOLT: Voltage
CUR: Current
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key for two seconds to enter the FUN mode.
338
Connecting Parallel I/O
Press the
key.
key.
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "VOLT" and press the
6
key.
key.
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
Assigning Analog Output
Assigning Analog Output p.141
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for outputting the results of TASK1 as analog.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
1 to 3
For moving to "ANALOG", see steps 1 to 3 in p.338.
Display
Description
2
Press the
/
keys to select "OUTPUT" and press the
3
Select the task to output.
TASK1 to TASK4/OFF
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
key.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "TASK1" and press the
key.
4
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Setting Monitor Focus
Sensor controller operations
Setting Monitor Focus p.142
The following describes the procedure when setting 4 mA output (Point1) for measured value of 0 mm and 20
mA output for measured value of 6mm (Point2).
Operating procedure
Key operation
1 to 3
For moving to "ANALOG", see steps 1 to 3 in p.338.
4
ZW User's Manual
Display
Description
Press the
9
Steps
/
keys to select "FOCUS" and press the
key.
Connecting Parallel I/O
339
Steps
Key operation
5
Display
Description
Select monitor focus ON/OFF.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "ON" and press the
key.
6
Set the distance value of the 1st point.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "4mA" and press the
key.
7
Set the output value of the 1st point.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display blinks.
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
/
In this example, input "0", then press the
8
9
keys.
key.
The decimal point is displayed.
Press the
/
key to move the decimal point.
Determine the decimal point and then press the
key.
Set the distance value of the 2nd point.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "20mA" and press the
key.
10
Set the output value of the 2nd point.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display blinks.
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
In this example, input "6", then press the
11
12
13
340
Connecting Parallel I/O
/
keys.
key.
The decimal point is displayed.
Press the
/
key to move the decimal point.
Determine the decimal point and then press the
"OK/CAN" is displayed on the sub-display.
Press the
key to reflect the settings or the
Press the
key.
key to cancel.
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
Adjusting the analog output value
Adjusting the analog output value p.143
As an example, the following explains the procedure for correcting 4 mA output (Point1) and 20 mA output
(Point2).
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
1 to 3
For moving to "ANALOG", see steps 1 to 3 in p.338.
Display
Description
4
Press the
/
keys to select "CALIB" and press the
5
Select analog output correction ON/OFF.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
key.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "ON" and press the
key.
6
Set the reference value of the point1.
The current set value for the point1 is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "4mA" and press the
key.
7
Set the adjustment value of the point1.
Press the
press the
/
/
key.
/
keys to input the adjustment value and
Next, check the ammeter value and press the
8
Set the reference value of the point2.
The current set value for the point2 is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "20mA" and press the
9
key.
key.
Sensor controller operations
To re-adjust, press the
key.
Set the adjustment value of the point2.
10
11
ZW User's Manual
"OK/CAN" is displayed on the sub-display.
Press the
key to execute correction or
Press and hold the
9
Press the
/
/
/
keys to input the adjustment value and
press the
key.
Next, check the ammeter value and press the
key.
To re-adjust, press the
key.
key to cancel.
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Connecting Parallel I/O
341
Settings for Judgment Output
Assigning judgment output
Assigning judgment output p.145
As an example, the following explains the procedure for outputting the judgment results for TASK1.
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
key for two seconds to enter the FUN mode.
2
Press the
/
keys to select "I/O" and press the
3
Press the
/
keys to select "JUDGE" and press the
4
Press the
/
keys to select "OUTPUT" and press the
5
Select the task for which to output the judgment result.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
key.
key.
key.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "TASK1" and press the
key.
6
342
Connecting Parallel I/O
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
Setting Operation at Judgment Output
Setting Operation at Judgment Output p.146
As an example, the following explains the procedure for setting the timer type to "1 SHOT" and the timer
duration to "10ms".
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
1 to 3
For moving to "JUDGE", see steps 1 to 3 in p.342.
Display
Description
4
Select the judgment output setting item.
HYS: Hysteresis width
TIMER: Timer mode
In this example, press the
/
keys, select "TIMER" and press the
key.
5
Select the timer mode.
OFF: Not set
OFF.DLY: Off Delay
ONDLY: On Delay
1SHOT: One Shot
Select "1SHOT" as the judgment output type.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press the
/
keys to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display
blinks.
Select "1SHOT" and press the
key.
6
Set the timer duration.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display blinks.
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
In this example, input "10", then press the
Press and hold the
keys.
key.
Sensor controller operations
7
/
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
9
ZW User's Manual
Connecting Parallel I/O
343
Settings for Processing When Measurement Is Not Possible
Setting operation when measurement is not possible
Setting operation when measurement is not possible p.148
As an example, the following explains the procedure for setting processing for when measurement is not
possible to "CLAMP".
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
key for two seconds to enter the FUN mode.
2
Press the
/
keys to select "I/O" and press the
3
Press the
/
keys to select "HLD.RST" and press the
4
Select the operation when measurement is not possible.
KEEP: KEEP
CLAMP: CLAMP
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
key.
key.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
In this example, select "CLAMP" and press the
key.
344
Connecting Parallel I/O
ZW User's Manual
Setting the Clamp Value
Setting the Clamp Value p.149
As an example, the following explains the procedure for setting the clamp value to "analog voltage output 10V".
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
1 to 4
For moving to "HLD.RST" - "CLAMP", see steps 1 to 4 in p.344.
Display
Description
2
Press the
/
keys to select "ANALOG" and press the
6
Set the clamp value.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
key.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select "10V" and press the
key.
7
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Sensor controller operations
9
ZW User's Manual
Connecting Parallel I/O
345
Setting for Internal Logging
Setting LOGGING save count and LOGGING save intervals
Settings for Internal Logging p.151
As an example, here is an explanation of the procedure for setting save intervals to "1" and save count to "100".
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
2
Press the
/
keys to select "I/O" and press the
3
Press the
/
keys to select "PAR.LOG" and press the
4
Select the save intervals.
Press the
/
keys to select "INTRVL" and press the
5
key for two seconds to enter the FUN mode.
/
keys.
Press the
7
Select the save count.
Press the
/
keys to select "COUNT" and press the
Connecting Parallel I/O
key.
key.
6
key to return to the previous menu.
key.
Set the save count.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display blinks.
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
In this example, input "100", then press the
346
key.
Set the save intervals.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
key to enter the editing mode, and the sub-display blinks.
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
In this example, input "1", then press the
8
key.
/
keys.
key.
ZW User's Manual
Steps
Key operation
9
Display
Description
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Sensor controller operations
9
ZW User's Manual
Connecting Parallel I/O
347
9-13Connecting with EtherCAT
Setting Fieldbus
Setting default settings for EtherCAT communications p.165
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
key for two seconds to enter the FUN mode.
2
Press the
/
keys to select "SYSTEM" and press the
3
Press the
/
keys to select "COM" and press the
4
Press the
/
keys to select "MEMLNK" and press the
5
Select the Fieldbus.
E-CAT: EtherCAT communications
EIP: EtherNet/IP communications
OFF: OFF
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
key.
key.
key.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select "E-CAT" and press the
key.
6
348
Connecting with EtherCAT
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
Setting GATE Signal ON Time
Setting default settings for EtherCAT communications p.165
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
2
Press the
/
keys to select "SYSTEM" and press the
3
Press the
/
keys to select "COM" and press the
4
Press the
/
keys to select "GATE.TM" and press the
5
Select the GATE signal ON time.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key for two seconds to enter the FUN mode.
Press the
key.
key.
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
To edit numerical values, use the
/
/
In this example, input "1", then press the
6
key.
/
keys.
key.
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Sensor controller operations
9
ZW User's Manual
Connecting with EtherCAT
349
9-14Connecting with EtherNet/IP
Network Settings of the Sensor
Network Settings of the Sensor p.203
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
2
Press the
/
keys to select "SYSTEM" and press the
3
Press the
/
keys to select "COM" and press the
4
Press the
/
keys to select "ETN" and press the
5
Select the IP address from the setting item.
Press the
/
keys to select "IPADDR" and press the
/
key for two seconds to enter the FUN mode.
6
Press the
keys to select "IP1" and press the
7
Set the value of P1.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
key.
key.
key.
key.
key.
Press the
/
/
/
keys to enter the editing mode, and the
sub-display blinks.
Input the value of IP1, then press the
key.
8
9
key to return to the previous menu.
Repeat steps 6 to 8 to enter the "IP2", "IP3" and "IP4" setting values.
10
Press the
11
Select the subnet mask from the setting item.
Press the
/
keys to select "SUBNET" and press the
12
350
Press the
key twice to return to the menu before last.
key.
Perform the same steps to set the subnet mask.
Connecting with EtherNet/IP
ZW User's Manual
Steps
Key operation
Display
13
Description
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Important
• The default gateway cannot be set from the Sensor Controller.
• To enable the settings, restart the Sensor Controller.
Setting Fieldbus
Network Settings of the Sensor p.203
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
Press and hold the
key for two seconds to enter the FUN mode.
2
Press the
/
keys to select "SYSTEM" and press the
3
Press the
/
keys to select "COM" and press the
4
Press the
/
keys to select "MEMLNK" and press the
5
Select the Fieldbus.
E-CAT: EtherCAT communications
EIP: EtherNet/IP communications
OFF: OFF
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
key.
key.
key.
Sensor controller operations
1
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select "EIP" and press the
key.
6
Press the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
9
ZW User's Manual
Connecting with EtherNet/IP
351
9-15 Connecting by No-protocol Communications
Initial Settings for No-protocol Communications
Initial Settings for No-protocol Communications p.228
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
1 to 3
For moving to "COM", see steps 1 to 3 in p.350.
Description
4
Press the
/
keys to select "RS232C" and press the
key.
5
Select the setting item:
IPADDR: IP address
SUBNET: Subnet mask
PROTCL: Protocol
OUTIP: Output IP address
PORT.IN: Port number
PORT.OT: Output destination port number
In this example, press the
/
keys, select "PROTCL" and press
the
key.
6
Selects the protocol.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select "TCP.SV" and press the
key.
7
Press the
8
Press the
9
/
keys to select "OUTIP" and press the
key.
Repeat steps 6 to 8 to set other items.
10
352
key to return to the previous menu.
Connecting by No-protocol Communications
Press and hold the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
Setting Communications Specifications (RS-232C Communications)
Setting Communications Specifications (RS-232C Communications) p.230
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
1 to 3
For moving to "COM", see steps 1 to 3 in p.350.
Description
4
Press the
5
Select the setting item:
BAUD.RT: baud rate
DATA: data length
PARITY: parity
STOP: stop bit
CS/RS: CS/RS control
In this example, press the
key.
6
/
keys to select "RS232C" and press the
/
key.
keys, select "DATA" and press the
Selects the data length.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select the data length, and press the
key.
7
Press the
8
Press the
/
keys to select "PARITY" and press the
key.
Sensor controller operations
9
key to return to the previous menu.
Repeat steps 6 to 8 to set other items.
10
Press and hold the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
9
ZW User's Manual
Connecting by No-protocol Communications
353
Setting Serial Data Output
Setting the data output destination p.231
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
Description
1
Press and hold the
key for two seconds to enter the FUN mode.
2
Press the
/
keys to select "I/O" and press the
3
Press the
key.
/
keys to select "COM.OUT" and press the
4
Select the setting item:
OUTPUT: Data output destination
FORMAT: Output data type
INT.NUM: Digits of integer
DEC.NUM: Digits of decimal
ZEROSP: Zero suprression
FIELD: Field separator
RECORD: Record separator
In this example, press the
/
keys, select "OUTPUT" and press
the
key.
5
Automatically Following the Range of Measurement Area2
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
key.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select the data length, and press the
key.
6
Press the
7
Select the save count.
Press the
/
keys to select "FORMAT" and press the
8
key.
Repeat steps 5 to 7 to set other items.
9
354
key to return to the previous menu.
Connecting by No-protocol Communications
Press and hold the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
ZW User's Manual
Set the delimiter
Setting Communications Specifications (RS-232C Communications) p.230
Operating procedure
Steps
Key operation
Display
1 to 3
For moving to "COM", see steps 1 to 3 in p.350.
Description
4
Press the
/
keys to select "DELIMI" and press the
5
Select the delimiter.
The current setting value is displayed on the sub-display.
key.
Press
/
key to enter editing mode and the sub-display blinks.
Select the delimiter, and press the
key.
6
Press and hold the
key for two seconds to enter the RUN mode.
Sensor controller operations
9
ZW User's Manual
Connecting by No-protocol Communications
355
MEMO
356
Connecting by No-protocol Communications
ZW User's Manual
APPENDICES
10-1 Specifications and External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
10-2 Firmware update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
10-3 Processing Item Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
10-4 System data list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
10-5 Object Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
APPENDICES
10
10-1 Specifications and External Dimensions
Sensor Head
Specifications
Item
Specifications
ZW-S07
ZW-S30
ZW-S40
ZW-SR07
ZW-SR20
ZW-SR40
Measurement center distance
7 mm
20 mm
30 mm
40 mm
7 mm
20 mm
40 mm
Measuring range
±0.3 mm
±1 mm
±3 mm
±6 mm
±0.3 mm
±1 mm
±6 mm
Static resolution *1
0.01 m
0.02 m
0.06 m
0.08 m
0.01 m
0.02 m
0.08 m
Linearity *2
±0.8 m
±1.2 m
±4.5 m
±7.0 m
±1.1 m
±1.6 m
±9.3 m
Near
20 m dia.
45 m dia.
70 m dia.
90 m dia.
20 m dia.
45 m dia.
90 m dia.
Center
18 m dia.
40 m dia.
60 m dia.
80 m dia.
18 m dia.
40 m dia.
80 m dia.
Far
20 m dia.
45 m dia.
70 m dia.
90 m dia.
20 m dia.
45 m dia.
90 m dia.
Spot diameter *3
Measuring cycle
500 s to 10 ms
Operating ambient illumination
Illumination on object surface of 10000 lx or less (incandescent light)
Ambient temperature range
Operation: 0 to +50C, Storage: -15 to +60C
(No freezing and condensation)
Ambient humidity range
Operation/storage: 35 or 85% (No condensation)
Degree of protection
IP40 (IEC60529)
Vibration resistance (destructive)
10 to 150 Hz (half amplitude 0.35 mm), 80 mins in each of X/Y/Z directions
Shock resistance (destructive)
150 m/s2, 6 direction, 3 times each (up/down, left/right, forward/backward)
Temperature characteristic *4
0.6 m/C
1.5 m/C
2.8 m/C
4.8 m/C
0.6 m/C
1.5 m/C
4.8 m/C
(0.45 m/C) (1.0 m/C) (2.0 m/C) (3.8 m/C) (0.45 m/C) (1.0 m/C) (3.8 m/C)
Material
Chassis: aluminum die cast
Fiber cable sheath: PVC
Calibration ROM: PC
Fiber cable length
0.3 m, 2 m (flex-resistant cable)
Fiber cable minimum bend radius
20 mm
Insulation resistance (Calibration
ROM)
Between case and all terminals: 20 M (by 250 V megger)
Dielectric strength (Calibration
ROM)
Between case and all terminals: 1000 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 min
Weight
Approx. 105 g (chassis, fiber cable total)
Accessories
Instruction Manual, Calibration ROM fixing screws (M2), Note on Use
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
358
ZW-S20
Approx. 130 g (chassis, fiber cable total)
Capacity value when OMRON standard mirror surface target is measured at the measurement center distance as the average of 4,096
times
When connected with the controller for the Export Control Trade Ordinance ([email protected]/[email protected]@T), the minimum resolution is 0.25 m,
regardless of the Sensor Head and the number of measurements averaged.
Material setting for the OMRON standard mirror surface target: Error from an ideal straight line when measuring on mirror surface
The reference values for linearity when targets to measure other than the above are as in the table below.
Target to Measure
ZW-S07
ZW-S20
ZW-S30
ZW-S40
ZW-SR07
ZW-SR20
ZW-SR40
Glass
±1.0 m
±1.2 m
±4.5 m
±7.0 m
±1.1 m
±1.6 m
±9.3 m
SUS BA
±1.2 m
±1.4 m
±5.5 m
±8.5 m
±1.2 m
±1.8 m
±9.3 m
White ceramic
±1.6 m
±1.7 m
±6.4 m
±9.5 m
±1.6 m
±1.9 m
±11.0 m
Capacity value defined by 1/e2 (13.5%) of the center optical intensity in the measured area
Temperature characteristic at the measurement center distance when fastened with an aluminum jig between the Sensor Head and the
target and the Sensor Head and the Sensor Controller are set in the same temperature environment. Figures in parentheses are converted
value obtained by subtracting the effect of expansion and contraction of the aluminum jig itself.
Specifications and External Dimensions
ZW User's Manual
External Dimensions
● ZW-S07/S20/S30/S40
Note 1.
Standard
surface
4-M3
4-φ3.5 (Mounting holes)
X
12
11.8
11.7
11.7
M
0.3
1
3
6
Standard
surface
16
16±0.1
16±0.1
43±0.1
L
7
20
30
40
4
4±0.1
Standard surface
Type
ZW-S07
ZW-S20
ZW-S30
ZW-S40
16
43
Mounting hole dimensions
M (Note1)
M (Note1)
Standard fiber cable (φ2.0)
Connector
Measurement
center
12
24
Measurement end
FAR
Measurement
CENTER
(φ10)
Measurement end
NEAR
X (Note1)
24
L (Note1)
Caution
label
(40)
64
(50)
(42)
Standard
surface
Lighting and
receiving axis
(Unit: mm)
● ZW-SR07/SR20/SR40
Note 1.
Standard
surface
(64)
Standard fiber
cable (φ2.0)
L
7
20
40
M
0.3
1
6
16
43±0.1
16±0.1
(12)
Type
ZW-SR07
ZW-SR20
ZW-SR40
4
4±0.1
4-φ3.5
(Mounting holes)
(24)
(23.6)
(24)
Standard
surface
4-M3
16±0.1
43
16
Mounting hole dimensions
24
Connector
(40)
12
32.5
24
64
(φ10)
(24)
(23.6)
8.5
Measurement end
NEAR
L (Note1)
Standard
surface
(50)
APPENDICES
Lighting and
receiving axis
(42)
Caution
label
Measurement
CENTER
M (Note1)
10
Measurement end
FAR
M (Note1)
ZW User's Manual
12
12
Measurement
CENTER
24
23.6
(24)
(U i
)
Specifications and External Dimensions
359
1.8
● Calibration ROM (ZW-XROM) *
14
6.9
16.5
19
le
ho
3
3.6
7
g
in
nt
ou
m
1
3.5
2.6
.5
φ2
5
3.5
7
33
27.4
(Unit: mm)
* This comes with the Sensor Head (ZW-S07/S20/S30/S40/SR07/SR20/SR40). Be sure to use a Calibration
ROM together with the Sensor Head with the same serial number.
Spot diameter
Spot diameters of ZW-SR07, ZW-SR20, and ZW-SR40 are the same as spot diameters of ZW-S07, ZW-S20,
and ZW-S40 respectively.
● ZW-S07
Me
asu
rin
Mea
g ra
n
0.3 ge
mm
er
met
t dia
o
p
S
Far µm
φ20 enter
C µm
φ18 Near m
µ
φ 20
360
suri
ng c
e
7 m nter di
m stan
ce
0.3
mm
Specifications and External Dimensions
ZW User's Manual
● ZW-S20
Me
asu
rin
Mea
suri
g ra
t
Spo
eter
diam
Far µm r
φ45 Centem
µ
φ40 Nearµm
φ 45
ng
1me
m
ng c
e
20 mnter di
m stanc
e
1m
m
● ZW-S30
Me
asu
rin
eter
Mea
g ra
n
3 m ge
m
m
t dia
Spo Far
µm
φ70 enter
C µm r
φ60 Nea µm
φ 70
suri
3m
m
ng c
e
30 mnter di
m stanc
e
APPENDICES
10
ZW User's Manual
Specifications and External Dimensions
361
● ZW-S40
Me
asu
rin
g ra
6 m nge
m
er
met
t dia r
o
p
S
Fa µm
φ 90
Mea
suri
6m
m
ter
Cen µm
φ80
ng c
40 menter d
m istan
ce
r
Nea µm
φ 90
Linearity characteristic by material (typical examples)
Shows the measured distance displayed on the Sensor Controller's main display and the X-axis distance.
The measured distance displayed on the main display expresses the measurement center distance as 0 with
the near side from the sensor head as + and the far side as -.
● ZW-S07
Material setting: Mirror surface
Material setting: Normal
5
Mirror
SUS BA
Glass
White ceramic
Mirror
SUS BA
Glass
4
3
1
0
-1
3
2
1
0
-1
1
0
-1
-2
-2
-2
-3
-3
-3
-4
-4
-4
-5
-0.3
-5
-0.3
-0.2
-0.1
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
Distance [mm]
Specifications and External Dimensions
White ceramic
4
2
Error [μm]
Error [μm]
2
5
Error [μm]
4
3
362
Material setting: Diffusion surface
5
-0.2
-0.1
0
0.1
Distance [mm]
0.2
0.3
-5
-0.3
-0.2
-0.1
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
Distance [mm]
ZW User's Manual
● ZW-S20
Material setting: Mirror surface
Material setting: Normal
Mirror
SUS BA
Glass
White ceramic
6
Mirror
SUS BA
Glass
8
6
2
0
-2
6
4
2
0
-2
2
0
-2
-4
-4
-4
-6
-6
-6
-8
-8
-8
-10
-10
-1 -0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2
0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
-10
-1 -0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2
1
White ceramic
8
4
Error [μm]
4
10
Error [μm]
8
Error [μm]
Material setting: Diffusion surface
10
10
Distance [mm]
0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
1
-1 -0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2
Distance [mm]
0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
1
Distance [mm]
● ZW-S30
Material setting: Normal
Material setting: Mirror surface
20
Mirror
SUS BA
Glass
White ceramic
12
Mirror
SUS BA
Glass
16
12
4
0
-4
White ceramic
16
12
8
Error [μm]
8
20
8
Error [μm]
16
Error [μm]
Material setting: Diffusion surface
20
4
0
-4
4
0
-4
-8
-8
-8
-12
-12
-12
-16
-16
-16
-20
-3 -2.5 -2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
-20
-3 -2.5 -2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Distance [mm]
-20
-3 -2.5 -2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Distance [mm]
Distance [mm]
● ZW-S40
Material setting: Mirror surface
Material setting: Normal
30
Mirror
SUS BA
Glass
White ceramic
20
15
20
15
Error [μm]
10
Mirror
SUS BA
Glass
25
5
0
-5
20
15
10
5
0
-5
10
5
0
-5
-10
-10
-10
-15
-15
-15
-20
-20
-20
-25
-25
-30
-25
-30
-30
-6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1
0
1
2
3
4
5
White ceramic
25
Error [μm]
25
Error [μm]
Material setting: Diffusion surface
30
30
6
-6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1
Distance [mm]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
-6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1
Distance [mm]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Distance [mm]
Material setting: Mirror surface
Material setting: Normal
5
3
0
-1
2
Error [μm]
1
1
0
-1
1
0
-1
-2
-2
-2
-3
-3
-3
-4
-4
-5
-0.3
-0.2
-0.1
0
0.1
Distance [mm]
ZW User's Manual
0.2
0.3
-5
-0.3
White ceramic
4
3
2
Error [μm]
2
Mirror
SUS BA
Glass
4
10
Mirror
SUS BA
Glass
White ceramic
4
Error [μm]
Material setting: Diffusion surface
5
5
3
APPENDICES
● ZW-SR07
-4
-0.2
-0.1
0
0.1
Distance [mm]
0.2
0.3
-5
-0.3
-0.2
-0.1
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
Distance [mm]
Specifications and External Dimensions
363
● ZW-SR20
Material setting: Mirror surface
Material setting: Normal
10
Mirror
SUS BA
Glass
White ceramic
6
Mirror
SUS BA
Glass
8
6
8
2
0
-2
4
2
0
-2
2
0
-2
-4
-4
-4
-6
-6
-6
-8
-8
-8
-10
-10
-10
-1 -0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2
0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
1
White ceramic
6
4
Error [μm]
4
10
Error [μm]
8
Error [μm]
Material setting: Diffusion surface
10
-1 -0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2
Distance [mm]
0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
-1 -0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2
1
Distance [mm]
0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
1
Distance [mm]
● ZW-SR40
Material setting: Mirror surface
Material setting: Normal
25
20
15
20
15
25
5
0
-5
-10
15
10
5
0
-5
-10
5
0
-5
-10
-15
-15
-15
-20
-20
-20
-25
-25
-30
-25
-30
-30
-6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
White ceramic
20
10
Error [μm]
Error [μm]
Mirror
SUS BA
Glass
25
10
-6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1
Distance [mm]
364
Material setting: Diffusion surface
30
30
Mirror
SUS BA
Glass
White ceramic
Error [μm]
30
Specifications and External Dimensions
0
1
2
Distance [mm]
3
4
5
6
-6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Distance [mm]
ZW User's Manual
Angle Characteristic (typical examples)
The angle characteristic plots the slope of the target in the measuring range and the maximum value of the
error generated in analog output.
Straight Type
α direction
β direction
Model nameplate
Slope angle +
Slope angle +
Slope angle −
Slope angle −
● ZW-S07
5
5
Slope angle
+8°
0°
-8°
4
3
2
1
0
-1
Slope angle
+8°
0°
-8°
4
3
Error [μm]
Error [μm]
Mirror β direction
Mirror α direction
2
1
0
-1
-2
-2
-3
-3
-4
-4
-5
-0.3
-0.15
0
0.15
-5
-0.3
0.3
Distance [mm]
4
3
2
1
0
-1
2
1
0
-1
-2
-2
-3
-3
-4
-4
-0.15
0
0.15
Distance [mm]
0.3
-5
-0.3
-0.15
0
0.15
APPENDICES
-5
-0.3
0.3
Slope angle
+50°
0°
-50°
5
Error [μm]
Error [μm]
3
0.15
White ceramic β direction
Slope angle
+50°
0°
-50°
4
0
Distance [mm]
White ceramic α direction
5
-0.15
0.3
Distance [mm]
10
ZW User's Manual
Specifications and External Dimensions
365
● ZW-S20
Mirror β direction
Mirror α direction
10
10
Slope angle
+8°
0°
-8°
Error [μm]
4
Slope angle
+8°
0°
-8°
8
6
Error [μm]
8
6
2
0
-2
-4
-6
4
2
0
-2
-4
-6
-8
-8
-10
-10
-1
-0.5
0
-0.5
1
-1
-0.5
Distance [mm]
White ceramic α direction
-0.5
1
White ceramic β direction
10
10
Slope angle
+50°
0°
-50°
6
4
6
2
0
-2
4
2
0
-2
-4
-4
-6
-6
-8
-8
-10
-10
-1
-0.5
0
-0.5
Slope angle
+50°
0°
-50°
8
Error [μm]
8
Error [μm]
0
Distance [mm]
-1
1
-0.5
Distance [mm]
0
-0.5
1
Distance [mm]
● ZW-S30
Mirror β direction
Mirror α direction
20
20
Slope angle
+6°
0°
-6°
15
10
Error [μm]
Error [μm]
10
5
0
-5
5
0
-5
-10
-10
-15
-15
-20
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
Slope angle
+6°
0°
-6°
15
-20
-3
3
-2
Distance [mm]
White ceramic α direction
Slope angle
+50°
0°
-50°
2
3
Slope angle
+50°
0°
-50°
15
10
Error [μm]
10
Error [μm]
1
20
15
5
0
-5
5
0
-5
-10
-10
-15
-15
-20
-2
-1
0
1
2
Distance [mm]
366
0
White ceramic β direction
20
-20
-3
-1
Distance [mm]
Specifications and External Dimensions
3
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
Distance [mm]
ZW User's Manual
● ZW-S40
Mirror α direction
30
20
10
Slope angle
+5°
0°
-5°
20
Error [μm]
Error [μm]
Mirror β direction
30
Slope angle
+5°
0°
-5°
0
-10
10
0
-10
-20
-20
-30
-6
-4
-2
0
2
4
6
-30
-6
-4
Distance [mm]
White ceramic α direction
30
4
6
Slope angle
+50°
0°
-50°
20
Error [μm]
Error [μm]
2
White ceramic β direction
10
0
-10
10
0
-10
-20
-30
0
30
Slope angle
+50°
0°
-50°
20
-2
Distance [mm]
-20
-6
-4
-2
0
2
Distance [mm]
4
6
-30
-6
-4
-2
0
2
4
6
Distance [mm]
APPENDICES
10
ZW User's Manual
Specifications and External Dimensions
367
Right angle type
β direction
α direction
Slope angle +
Slope angle +
Slope angle −
Slope angle −
● ZW-SR07
5
4
5
4
Slope angle
+8°
0°
-8°
3
2
1
0
-1
-2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-3
-4
-4
-5
-0.3
-0.15
0
0.15
Slope angle
+8°
0°
-8°
3
Error [μm]
2
Error [μm]
Mirror β direction
Mirror α direction
-5
-0.3
0.3
Distance [mm]
3
3
Error [μm]
Error [μm]
2
1
0
-1
-2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-3
-4
-4
-0.15
0
0.15
Distance [mm]
368
0.3
Slope angle
+50°
0°
-50°
4
2
-5
-0.3
0.15
White ceramic β direction
5
Slope angle
+50°
0°
-50°
4
0
Distance [mm]
White ceramic α direction
5
-0.15
Specifications and External Dimensions
0.3
-5
-0.3
-0.15
0
0.15
0.3
Distance [mm]
ZW User's Manual
● ZW-SR20
Mirror β direction
Mirror α direction
10
10
Slope angle
+8°
0°
-8°
4
2
0
-2
-4
-6
4
2
0
-2
-4
-6
-8
-10
Slope angle
+8°
0°
-8°
8
6
Error [μm]
Error [μm]
8
6
-8
-1
-0.5
0
0.5
-10
1
-1
-0.5
Distance [mm]
White ceramic α direction
10
1
White ceramic β direction
Slope angle
+50°
0°
-50°
8
6
4
Error [μm]
Error [μm]
4
0.5
10
Slope angle
+50°
0°
-50°
8
6
0
Distance [mm]
2
0
-2
2
0
-2
-4
-6
-4
-6
-8
-8
-10
-10
-1
-0.5
0
0.5
1
-1
-0.5
Distance [mm]
0
0.5
1
Distance [mm]
● ZW-SR40
Mirror α direction
30
Slope angle
+5°
0°
-5°
20
10
Slope angle
+5°
0°
-5°
20
Error [μm]
Error [μm]
Mirror β direction
30
0
-10
-20
10
0
-10
-20
-30
-6
-4
-2
0
2
4
-30
6
-6
-4
Distance [mm]
6
Error [μm]
0
-20
10
Error [μm]
4
Slope angle
+50°
0°
-50°
20
10
-10
10
0
-10
-20
-30
-6
-4
-2
0
2
Distance [mm]
ZW User's Manual
2
White ceramic β direction
30
Slope angle
+50°
0°
-50°
20
0
APPENDICES
White ceramic α direction
30
-2
Distance [mm]
4
6
-30
-6
-4
-2
0
2
4
6
Distance [mm]
Specifications and External Dimensions
369
Sensor controller
Specifications
Item
Specifications
ZW-CE10T
ZW-CE15T
Input/output type
NPN
PNP
Number of connected sensor heads
1
Sensor head compatibility
Available
Light source for measurement
White LED
Segment
Display
Main display
11-segment red display, 6 digits
Sub-display
11-segment green display, 6 digits
Status indicators
HIGH (orange), PASS (green), LOW (orange), STABILITY (green), ZERO
(green), ENABLE (green), THRESHOLD-H (orange), THRESHOLD-L
(orange), RUN (green)
EtherCAT indicator
ECAT RUN (green), L/A IN (Link/Activity IN) (green), L/A OUT (Link/Activity
OUT) (green), ECAT ERR (red)
Ethernet
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
EtherCAT
EtherCAT exclusive protocol 100BASE-TX
RS-232C
Max. 115,200 bps
LED display
External I/F
Analog
output
terminal
block
Analog voltage output
(OUT 1 V)
-10 V to +10 V, output impedance: 100 
Analog current output
(OUT 1 A)
4 mA to 20 mA, max. load resistance: 300 
32-pole
expansion
connector
Judgment output
Transistor output system
(HIGH 1/PASS 1/LOW 1) Output voltage: 21.6 to 30 VDC
Load current: 50 mA or less
Busy output (BUSY 1)
Residual voltage when turning ON: 1.2 V or less
Leakage voltage when turning OFF: 0.1 mA or less
Alarm output (ALARM)
Enable output
(ENABLE 1)
LED OFF input
(LED OFF 1)
Zero reset input
(ZERO 1)
DC input system
Input voltage: 24 VDC ± 10% (21.6 to 26.4 VDC)
Input current: 7 mA Type. (24 VDC)
ON voltage/ON current: 19 V/3 mA or less
ON voltage/ON current: 5 V/1 mA or less
Timing input (TIMING 1)
Reset input (RESET 1)
Logging input (LOGGING)
Bank
370
Currently
selected
bank output
(BANK_OUT
1 to 3)
Transistor output system
Output voltage: 21.6 to 30 VDC
Load current: 50 mA or less
Residual voltage when turning ON: 1.2 V or less
Leakage voltage when turning OFF: 0.1 mA or less
Bank
Selection
input
(BANK_SEL
1 to 3)
DC input system
Input voltage: 24 VDC ± 10% (21.6 to 26.4 VDC)
Input current: 7 mA Type. (24 VDC)
ON voltage/ON current: 19 V/3 mA or more
OFF voltage/OFF current: 5 V/1 mA or less
Specifications and External Dimensions
ZW User's Manual
Item
Specifications
ZW-CE10T
Main functions Exposure time
Rating
ZW-CE15T
Automatic/Fixed
Measuring cycle
500 s to 10 ms
Material setting
Standard/Mirror/Rough surfaces
MEASUREMENT ITEM
Height/Thickness of transparent object/Calculation
Filtering
Median/Average/Differentiation/High pass/Low pass/Band pass
Output
Scaling/Different holds/Zero reset/Logging for a measured value
Display
Measured value/Threshold value/Analog output voltage or current value/
Judgment result/Resolution/Exposure time
Number of configurable banks
Max. 8 banks
Task process
Multi-task (up to 4 tasks per bank)
System
Save/Initialization/Display measured information/Communication settings/
Sensor head calibration/Key-lock/Zero reset memory/Timing input
Power supply voltage
21.6 to 26.4 VDC (including ripple)
Current consumption
600 mA max.
Insulation resistance
Across all lead wires and FG terminal: 20 M (by 250 V megger)
Dielectric strength
Between all lead wires and FG terminal: 500 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 minute
Environmental Degree of protection
resistance
Vibration resistance (destructive)
IP20 (IEC60529)
10 to 55 Hz (half amplitude 0.35 mm), 50 mins in each of X/Y/Z directions
Shock resistance (destructive)
150 m/s2, 6 direction, 3 times each (up/down, left/right, forward/backward)
Ambient temperature range
Operation: 0 to +40C, Storage: -15 to +60C
(No freezing and condensation)
Ambient humidity range
Operation/storage: 35 to 85% (No condensation)
Grounding
D-type grounding (grounding resistance of 100  or less)
Note: For conventional Class D grounding
Material
Chassis: PC
Weight
Approx. 750 g (main unit only), Approx. 150 g (Parallel cable)
Accessories
Instruction Manual
Member registration sheet
Parallel cable (ZW-XCP2E)
When this Sensor Controller is used, the minimum resolution is 0.25 m, regardless of the sensor head and the number of measurements averaged.
APPENDICES
10
ZW User's Manual
Specifications and External Dimensions
371
Status indicators
Mode
RUN
Status
Normal measurement
Display
Output
Input
RS-232C/
Ethernet
11-segment dis- ANALOG
play
Output
Judgment output
(HIGH/PASS/
LOW)
LED OFF
Zero
reset
Measurement
result
Output
according to
measurement
result
Judgment
result
Enabled
Enabled
Output at
clamp level
Output OFF
Measurement KEEP
Previous value
error
CLAMP "------"
Measured value not
applied

LED OFF

FUN

Display
according to
menu
System
error

"SYS.ERR"
blinks
Voltage:
0 V output
Current:
12 mA output
When
starting

"INIT"
Output at
clamp level
(approx. -10.8
V)
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Commands
are accepted
but not
executed.
Invalid (Note)
Note: Do not obtain data during start-up. The RS-232C output is indeterminate at this time.
372
Specifications and External Dimensions
ZW User's Manual
External Dimensions
ZW-CE10T/CE15T
ROM mounting screw hole
M2, depth 2.0 MAX.
6
40.8
34.9
124
128
(10.2)
72
127.5
(21.4)
Frame ground terminal mounting screw hole
M4, depth 7.0 MAX.
40
Frame ground terminal mounting screw
M4-L6
DIN track attachment hook
70
70±0.1
4-φ4.5
43±0.1
14.5
43
Mounting hole dimensions
Installation holes
4-M4 depth 6.0 MAX.
(Unit: mm)
EtherCAT communications specifications
Communications standard
IEC 61158 Type12
Physical layer
100BASE-TX (IEEE802.3)
Connector
RJ45 × 2
EtherCAT IN: EtherCAT input
EtherCAT OUT: EtherCAT output
Communications media
Twisted pair cable Category 5 or higher
(Straight, double-shielded cable comprising aluminum tape and braid is recommended.)
Communications distance
Distance between nodes: 100 m max.
Process data
Variable PDO mapping
Mailbox (CoE)
Emergency message, SDO request, SDO response, SDO information
Distributed block
Synchronization by DC mode
LED display
L/A IN (Link/Activity IN) × 1
L/A OUT (Link/Activity OUT) × 1
ECAT RUN × 1
ECAT ERR × 1
ZW User's Manual
10
Specifications
APPENDICES
Item
Specifications and External Dimensions
373
PC tools (Sysmac Studio)
Item
Operating environment
(OS) (*1)
374
Operating system
Japanese or English
Windows XP (Service Pack3 or later) / Vista (32bit version) / 7 (32bit version/64bit
version) / 8 (32bit version/64bit version)
CPU
Windows PC mounted with Celeron 540 (1.8 GHz) or faster chip
Core i5 M520 (2.4 GHz) or equivalent or faster product is recommended.
Main memory
2 GB or more
Hard disk
At least 1.6 GB of free space (*2)
Display
XGA 1024 × 768, 16,000,000 colors
WXGA 1280 × 800 dots or higher resolution is recommended.
Disk drive
DVD-ROM drive
Communication port
USB2.0 compatible USB port or Ethernet port
*1:
Note about Sysmac Studio compatible operating systems:
The required system and hard disk capacity differs according to the system environment.
*2:
Separate logging memory is required to use the file logging function.
Specifications and External Dimensions
ZW User's Manual
Accessories
Extension fiber cable
ZW-XF02R/XF05R/XF10R/XF20R/XF30R
Fiber Cable (φ2.0)
FC connector
FC connector
(φ10)
(50)
(42)
(42)
L*
(Unit: mm)
* The following table lists cable lengths per models.
Type
ZW-XF02R
ZW-XF05R
ZW-XF10R
ZW-XF20R
ZW-XF30R
Specification
2m
5m
10m
20m
30m
Item
Specifications
Ambient temperature
Operation: 0 to +50C, Storage: -15 to +60C
(No condensation)
Ambient humidity
Operation, storage: 35 to 85%RH
(No condensation)
Vibration resistance
(destructive)
10 to 55 Hz (half amplitude 0.35 mm), 50 mins in each of X/Y/Z directions
Shock resistance
(destructive)
150 m/s2, 6 direction, 3 times each (up/down, left/right, forward/backward)
Fiber length
2m
Material
Cable sheath: PVC, Connector: Bronze
Fiber cable minimum
bending radius
20 mm
ZW-XF02R
ZW-XF05R
5m
Approx. 40 g
ZW-XF10R
L (mm)
2000±20
5000±50
10000±100
20000±200
30000±300
ZW-XF20R
ZW-XF30R
10 m
20 m
30 m
Approx. 60 g
Approx. 110 g
Approx. 150 g
Approx. 30 g
Accessories
Connection adapter (ZW-XFC), Instruction Manual
APPENDICES
Weight
Important
ZW User's Manual
Specifications and External Dimensions
10
Secure a minimum bending radius (R) for the fiber cable that is at least as large as the specification value. A bending
radius smaller than the specification value could cause damage to the fiber cable.
375
Connection adapter (for connecting fiber cable)
φ9.8
ZW-XFC
4.5
6
15
(Unit: mm)
The connection adapter (ZW-XFC) comes packed together with the extension fiber cable ([email protected]), but the
connection adapter alone can be purchased for maintenance.
Fiber connector cleaner
ZW-XCL
φ2.4±0.05
29±0.1
151±0.1
(Unit: mm)
This cleaner can be used only for the following locations:
• Grooves on the fiber connector of the Sensor Controller ([email protected])
• Grooves on the connection adapter (ZW-XFC) supplied with the extension fiber cable ([email protected])
Take note that this cleaner must not be used to clean the tips of fiber cables.
For cleaning of the tips of fiber cables, refer to "Connecting Fiber Cable" p.38.
Item
Applicable item
Specifications
• Grooves on the fiber connector of the Sensor Controller ([email protected])
• Grooves on the connection adapter (ZW-XFC) supplied with the extension fiber cable ([email protected])
Packed quantity
10 pcs/set
Number of times
cleanable
Once
External size
Length 180 mm, 2.4 mm
Operating ambient
temperature range
5 to 35C
Operating ambient
humidity range
40 to 80%
Storage ambient
temperature range
5 to 35C
Storage ambient humidity 40 to 80%
range
Material
376
Nylon plastic, polyolefin plastic, polyester
Weight
20 g
Accessories
Note on use
Specifications and External Dimensions
ZW User's Manual
EtherCAT cable
Product name
Manufacturer
Cable length (m) Model
Size/number of cores
Cable with connector at
(number of pairs): AWG22 both ends (RJ45/RJ45)
× 2P
OMRON
0.3
XS5W-T421-AMD-K
0.5
XS5W-T421-BMD-K
1
XS5W-T421-CMD-K
2
XS5W-T421-DMD-K
5
XS5W-T421-GMD-K
10
XS5W-T421-JMD-K
0.3
XS5W-T421-AMC-K
0.5
XS5W-T421-BMC-K
1
XS5W-T421-CMC-K
2
XS5W-T421-DMC-K
5
XS5W-T421-GMC-K
10
XS5W-T421-JMC-K
Cable with connector at
both ends (M12/RJ45)
Size/number of cores
Cable
(number of pairs): AWG24
× 4P
RJ45 connector
Size/number of cores
Cable
(number of pairs): AWG22
RJ45 assembled type
× 2P
connector
*1:
*2:
*3:
*1
OMRON
Tonichi Kyosan Cable, Ltd.
NETSTAR-C5E SAB 0.5 × 4P
*2
Kuramo Electric Co., LTD.
KETH-SB *2
SWCC SHOWA CABLE SYSTEMS CO.,
LTD.
FAE-5004 *2
Panduit Corp.
MPS588 *2
Kuramo Electric Co., LTD.
KETH-PSB-OMR *3
OMRON
XS6G-T421-1 *3
This cable is available in 0.3, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, and 15 m lengths. For details, refer to the industrial Ethernet connector catalog (CDJC006).
Use of the above combinations of EtherCAT cables and RJ45 connector is recommended.
Use of the above combinations of EtherCAT cables and RJ45 assembled type connector is recommended.
APPENDICES
10
ZW User's Manual
Specifications and External Dimensions
377
RS-232C cable
ZW-XPT2 (for PLC/programmable terminal connection)
2000±150
(100)
(20±5)
33.6
41
(4)
25.4
11.7
9-pin square
connector plug type
17-pin square connector
24.99
32.2
26
13.15
2.2
15
Vinyl insulated round cord φ5.8 12 cores
(Conductor cross sectional area: 0.08 mm2/Insulated outside diameter: φ0.6)
(Unit: mm)
ZW-XRS2 (for PC connection)
2000±150
(100)
(20±5)
33.6
41
(4)
32.2
24.99
25.4
26
13.15
2.2
11.7
15
9-pin square
connector socket type
17-pin square connector
Vinyl insulated round cord φ5.8 12cores
(Conductor cross sectional area: 0.08 mm2/Insulated outside diameter: φ0.6)
(Unit: mm)
Item
Specifications
ZW-XPT2
378
ZW-XRS2
Applicable Controller
ZW series
Ambient temperature
Operation: 0 to +50C, Storage: -15 to +60C
(No freezing and condensation)
Ambient humidity
Operation/storage: 35 or 85% RH (No condensation)
Dielectric strength
1000 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 min
Insulation resistance
20 M (by 250 VDC megger)
Vibration resistance
(destructive)
10 to 55 Hz (half amplitude 0.35 mm), 50 mins in each of X/Y/Z directions
Shock resistance
(destructive)
150 m/s2, 6 direction, 3 times each (up/down, left/right, forward/backward)
Material
Cable sheath: PVC
Cable minimum bending
radius
35 mm
Weight
Approx. 150 g
Accessories
Instruction Manual
Specifications and External Dimensions
ZW User's Manual
Important
Secure a minimum bending radius (R) for the cable that is at least as large as the specification value. If the bending
radius is smaller than the specification value, this can cause damage to the cable.
Parallel cable
ZW-XCP2E
6
7
A1
B16
A16
2110
+140
0
(35.45)
B1
(13.1)
(Unit: mm)
Item
Specifications
Applicable Controller
[email protected]@T series
Ambient temperature
Operation: 0 to +50C, Storage: -15 to +60C
(No freezing and condensation)
Ambient humidity
Operation/storage: 35 or 85% RH (No condensation)
Dielectric strength
1000 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 min
Insulation resistance
20 M (by 250 VDC megger)
Vibration resistance (destructive)
10 to 55 Hz (half amplitude 0.35 mm), 50 mins in each of X/Y/Z directions
Shock resistance (destructive)
150 m/s2, 6 direction, 3 times each (up/down, left/right, forward/backward)
Material
Cable sheath: PVC
Cross section of flat cable
AWG28
Core wire pitch
1.27 mm
Cable minimum bending radius
5.5 mm
Weight
Approx. 150 g
Accessories
Instruction Manual
APPENDICES
Important
Secure a minimum bending radius (R) for the cable that is at least as large as the specification value. If the bending
radius is smaller than the specification value, this can cause damage to the cable.
CE Marking
Conformed *1
*1:
10
EMC Directive Conformity
Applicable directive
Safety category
Low voltage directive
EMC directive
Not applicable
Conformed *1
B
For more details on conformity level, please contact your OMRON sales representative to obtain "Declaration of Conformity: In compliance
with EN45014)."
ZW User's Manual
Specifications and External Dimensions
379
10-2 Firmware update
For information on how to obtain the latest version of the firmware, please contact your OMRON sales
representative.
After obtaining the latest version of the firmware, follow the procedure below to update the firmware.
Important
Do not turn OFF the power supply to the Sensor Controller during updating. The Sensor Controller would no longer
start up properly.
Use PC tools (Sysmac Studio) to update.
 Explorer pane
 Edit pane
1
: [Device Group] | [(Sensor Name)] (double click)
: [Tools] icon (
)
Click [Sensor setup] - [Update], and select
the update file.
The update file extension is ".BIN". When the file
is selected, the [FirmwareWriteInWindow]
popup is displayed.
Important
The current firmware version is displayed at
[Sensor setup]. Be sure to check the version
before updating the firmware.
2
Click [Start the update.].
A message to confirm to start the update
appears.
Important
When you click [Start the update.], if the "Different
format" message is displayed, this means that the
format information for the connected Sensor
Controller and the specified file do not match. If
this happen, never continue with the firmware
update. The Sensor Controller breaks down and
no longer starts up properly.
380
Firmware update
ZW User's Manual
3
Check the content of the message, and click
[OK].
The firmware update is started.
A progress bar is displayed during update
processing. Wait for the [Firmware Write
Completed] popup to be displayed. (The update
takes several minutes to complete.)
Important
• Errors may occur on the Sensor Controller
during updating, but just wait for the update to
complete.
• If the update progress bar stops midway or the
update does not end even after ten minutes,
there is the possibility that the update has failed.
In this case, contact an OMRON branch or sales
office about the firmware version before update
and the firmware version in the write file.
4
Click [Close].
The firmware update is completed.
Performing the Update on Warp Engine ZW
Warp Engine ZW is automatically installed when Smart Monitor ZW is installed. For details on the Smart
Monitor ZW, refer to the Smart Monitor ZW Operation manual (Cat. No.Z323-E1-01).
Before proceeding with this operation, connect the ZW to the personal computer where Warp Engine ZW is
installed using an Ethernet cable.
Important
• Only start Warp Engine ZW when the computer has recognized the Sensor Controller normally.
• Do not change the IP address and the subnet mask when using Warp Engine ZW on the same personal computer
with which SmartMonitor ZW is used. If you are using a different personal computer, refer to p.227 and change the
APPENDICES
IP address and the subnet mask of the Sensor Controller.
10
ZW User's Manual
Firmware update
381
1
From the personal computer's Start menu,
select [All Programs] - [OMRON] - [ZW] [Warp Engine ZW].
The [Warp Engine ZW] screen is displayed.
If Warp Engine ZW fails to start up, a message
and then the following screen is displayed.
In this case, set the connection port.
2
If necessary, click [Update Controller
Information].
The model name and version of the currently
connected Sensor Controller are displayed.
3
Click [Read Update File], and select the file
to write to.
The model name and version of the Sensor
Controller held in the file are displayed.
4
Click [Start Update].
A message to confirm to start the update
appears.
Important
When you click [Start Update], if the "Different
format" message is displayed, this means that the
format information for the connected Sensor
Controller and the specified file do not match. If
this happen, never continue with the firmware
update. The Sensor Controller breaks down and
no longer starts up properly.
382
Firmware update
ZW User's Manual
5
Check the content of the message, and click
[OK].
The firmware update is started.
A progress bar is displayed during update
processing. Wait for the successful end
message box to be displayed. (The update takes
several minutes to complete.)
Important
• Errors may occur on the Sensor Controller
during updating, but just wait for the update to
complete.
• If the update progress bar stops midway or the
update does not end even after ten minutes,
there is the possibility that the update has failed.
In this case, contact an OMRON branch or sales
office about the firmware version before the
update and the one in the write file.
6
When the update is successfully completed,
a message appears. Click [OK].
7
Click [Finish] and exit Warp Engine ZW.
APPENDICES
10
ZW User's Manual
Firmware update
383
10-3 Processing Item Data List
Unit
Processing Item Data
Parameter
number
number
default
value
Setting range/output range Acquisition Setting
Yes/No
Yes/No
0
1
(Note
1)
20
Image input
Exposure time
control
(When 2 area
mode is OFF)
Measurement
object
0
Measuring cycle
2000
500 to 10000 (s)
Yes
No
22
2 area mode
0
0: OFF
1: ON
Yes
Yes
23
Area tracking mode
0
0: Tracking OFF
1: Start point tracking
2: End point tracking
3: End point/start point
tracking
Yes
Yes
30
Start direction of count
measurement surfaces
0
0: NEAR
1: FAR
Yes
Yes
39
Surface subject to area
tracking (Reference surface)
0
0: SUR.1ST
1: SUR.2ND
2: SUR.3RD
3: SUR.4TH
4: LIGHT PEAK
Yes
Yes
40
Surface subject to area
tracking (Tracking surface)
1
0: SUR.1ST
1: SUR.2ND
2: SUR.3RD
3: SUR.4TH
4: LIGHT PEAK
Yes
Yes
193
2 area teaching

1: Execute
No
Yes
0
Exposure time control mode
0
0: Auto
1: Fixed
Yes
Yes
2
Surface subject to exposure
time control
4
0: SUR.1ST
1: SUR.2ND
2: SUR.3RD
3: SUR.4TH
4: LIGHT PEAK
Yes
Yes
6
Exposure time fixed value
1000
1 to 5000 (s)
Yes
Yes
14
Exposure time upper limit
1000
1 to 5000 (s)
Yes
Yes
36
Exposure time
1000
1 to 5000 (s)
Yes
No
37
Received light amount (1
surface)

0 to 4095 (Gradation)
Yes
No
38
Received light amount (2
surfaces)

0 to 4095 (Gradation)
Yes
No
39
Received light amount (3
surfaces)

0 to 4095 (Gradation)
Yes
No
40
Received light amount (4
surfaces)

0 to 4095 (Gradation)
Yes
No
1
Material
0
0: Normal
1: Mirror surface
2: Diffusion surface
Yes
Yes
4
Background removal level
100
0 to 4095 (Gradation)
Yes
Yes
(Note 1) When using exposure time control with 2 area mode ON,
Area 1 exposure time control: Unit number "4"
Area 2 exposure time control: Unit number "5"
384
Processing Item Data List
ZW User's Manual
Unit
Processing Item Data
Parameter
number
number
default
value
Setting range/output range Acquisition Setting
Yes/No
Yes/No
40
41
Measurement
point
Scaling
0
MEASUREMENT ITEM
1:
TASK 1
0:
TASK 2 to
3
0: None
1: Height
2: Thickness of
transparent object
3: Calculation
Yes
Yes
1
Measurement surface 1
4
0: SUR.1ST
1: SUR.2ND
2: SUR.3RD
3: SUR.4TH
4: LIGHT PEAK
Yes
Yes
2
Measurement surface 2
4
0: SUR.1ST
1: SUR.2ND
2: SUR.3RD
3: SUR.4TH
4: LIGHT PEAK
Yes
Yes
3
Calculation parameter X
0
0: None
1: TASK 1
2: TASK 2
3: TASK 3
4: TASK 4
Yes
Yes
4
Calculation parameter Y
0
0: None
1: TASK 1
2: TASK 2
3: TASK 3
4: TASK 4
Yes
Yes
5
Calculation parameter K
0
-999999999 to 999999999 Yes
Yes
6
Calculation parameter m
0
-100 to 100 (1 div: 0.1)
Yes
Yes
7
Calculation parameter n
0
-100 to 100 (1 div: 0.1)
Yes
Yes
13
Measurement area
0
0: Area 1
1: Area 2
Yes
Yes
2
Scaling mode
0
0: OFF
1: Height auto
2: Manual
3: Thickness auto
Yes
Yes
3
Span value
10000
-20000 to 20000 (1 div:
0.1)
Yes
Yes
4
Offset value
0
-999999999 to 999999999 Yes
(nm)
Yes
MEDIAN
2
Median filter mode
0
0: OFF
1: 3 times
2: 9 times
3: 15 times
Yes
Yes
43
AVERAGE
2
Average count
8: 256
times
0: Once
1: Twice
2: 4 times
3: 8 times
4: 16 times
5: 32 times
6: 64 times
7: 128 times
8: 256 times
9: 512 times
10: 1024 times
11: 2048 times
12: 4096 times
Yes
Yes
10
ZW User's Manual
APPENDICES
42
Processing Item Data List
385
Unit
Processing Item Data
Parameter
number
number
default
value
Setting range/output range Acquisition Setting
Yes/No
Yes/No
44
45
46
47
49
Frequency filter
2
Filter type
0
0: OFF
1: High pass filter
2: Low pass filter
3: Band pass filter
Yes
Yes
3
Cut-off frequency
1
1 to 999999 (1 div: 0.001)
Yes
Yes
4
Cut-off frequency (upper)
999999
1 to 999999 (1 div: 0.001)
Yes
Yes
5
Cut-off frequency (lower)
1
1 to 999999 (1 div: 0.001)
Yes
Yes
Differential mode
0
0: OFF
1: ON
Yes
Yes
3
Number of differential cycles
1
1 to 5000 (ms)
Yes
Yes
2
Hold mode
0
0: OFF
1: Peak
2: Bottom
3: Peak to peak
4: Auto peak
5: Auto bottom
6: AUTO PEAK TO PEAK
7: Average
8: Sample
Yes
Yes
3
Trigger method
0
0: External
1: Self-up trigger
2: Self-down trigger
Yes
Yes
4
Trigger level
0
-999999999 to 999999999 Yes
(nm)
Yes
5
TRIGGER HYSTERESIS
0.05% of
0 to 999.999999 (mm)
measuring
range
Yes
Yes
6
Trigger delay time
1
1 to 5000 (ms)
Yes
Yes
7
Sampling time
100
1 to 5000 (ms)
Yes
Yes
8
Trigger delay mode
0
0: OFF
1: ON
Yes
Yes
5
Offset when a zero reset is
executed Offset
0
-999999999 to 999999999 Yes
(nm)
Yes
7
ZERO RESET MODE
0
0: Real
1: Hold
Yes
Yes
64
Zero reset execution enabled/
disabled (Status)
1
0: OFF
1: ON
Yes
Yes
2
LOW threshold value
-25% of
-999999999 to 999999999 Yes
measuring (nm)
range
Yes
3
HIGH threshold value
+25% of
-999999999 to 999999999 Yes
measuring (nm)
range
Yes
DIFFERENTIAL 2
Hold
Zero reset
Judgment
output
Unit numbers 40 to 49 are parameters for the TASK 1 processing unit. To reference the parameters for the processing unit for TASK N, add 20 ×
(N - 1) to the unit number you want to reference.
(Example)
To change the average processing for TASK 2, reference the parameters for
Processing unit number = 43 + 20 × (2 - 1) = 63
Data number = 2
386
Processing Item Data List
ZW User's Manual
Unit
Processing Item Data
Parameter
number
number
default
value
120
Judgment
processing
Setting range/output range Acquisition Setting
Yes/No
Yes/No
0
Hysteresis width
0.05% of
0 to 999999999 (nm)
measuring
range
Yes
Yes
1
Timer mode
0
0: OFF
1: Off delay
2: On delay
3: One shot
Yes
Yes
2
Delay time
1
1 to 5000 (ms)
Yes
Yes
3
Task subject to judgment
output
0
0: TASK 1
1: TASK 2
2: TASK 3
3: TASK 4
Yes
Yes
Nonmeasurement
processing
0
Mode at non-measurement
1
0: Keep
1: Clamp
Yes
Yes
122
Analog output
2
Monitor focus mode
0
0: OFF
1: ON
Yes
Yes
3
Monitor focus output position 1 -999999999 to
(measuring 999999999 (nm)
range)/2
Yes
Yes
4
Monitor focus output position 2 +
-999999999 to
(measuring 999999999 (nm)
range)/2
Yes
Yes
5
Monitor focus current lower
limit
4
4 to 20 (mA)
Yes
Yes
6
Monitor focus current upper
limit value
20
4 to 20 (mA)
Yes
Yes
7
Monitor focus voltage lower
limit value
-10
-10 to 10 (V)
Yes
Yes
8
Monitor focus voltage upper
limit value
10
-10 to 10 (V)
Yes
Yes
21
Output object task
1
0: None
1: TASK 1
2: TASK 2
3: TASK 3
4: TASK 4
Yes
Yes
23
Output level during clamping
0
At current output
0: MAX (approx. 21 mA)
1: 20 mA
2: 19 mA
:
16: 5 mA
17: 4 mA
18: MIN (approx. 3 mA)
At voltage output
0: MAX (approx. 10.8 V)
1: 10 V
2: 9 V
:
20: -9 V
21: -10V
22: MIN (approx. -10.8 V)
Yes
Yes
APPENDICES
121
10
ZW User's Manual
Processing Item Data List
387
10-4 System data list
388
Data
number
Parameter
default value Setting range/output range
Acquisition Setting
Yes/No
Yes/No
100
RS-232C data length
1
0: 7 bit
1: 8 bit
Yes
Yes
101
RS-232C parity
0
0: None
1: Off
2: Even
Yes
Yes
102
RS-232C stop bit
0
0: 1 bit
1: 2 bit
Yes
Yes
103
RS-232C baud rate
2
0: 9600
1: 19200
2: 38400
3: 57600
4: 115200
Yes
Yes
104
Flow control
0
0: None
1: ON
Yes
Yes
260
Ethernet protocol
1
0: None
1: TCP server
2: TCP client
3: UDP
Yes
Yes
261
IN port number
9601
0 to 65535
Yes
Yes
262
OUT port number
9601
0 to 65535
Yes
Yes
300
Memory link function
2
0: OFF
1: Ethernet/IP
2: EtherCAT
Yes
Yes
301
Communications delimiter
0
0: CR
1: LF
2: CR+LF
Yes
Yes
302
GATE period
1
0 to 100
Yes
Yes
400
Serial data output destination
0
0: OFF
1: Ethernet
2: RS-232C
Yes
Yes
401
Serial data output data format
0
0: ASCII
1: BINARY
Yes
Yes
402
Serial data output number of
integer digits
5
1 to 5
Yes
Yes
403
Serial data output number of digits 6
past decimal point
0 to 6
Yes
Yes
405
Serial data output field delimiter
0
0: None
1: Comma
2: Tab
3: Space
4: CR
5: LF
6: CR+LF
7: Semi-colon
Yes
Yes
406
Serial data output record delimiter
0
0: None
1: Comma
2: Tab
3: Space
4: CR
5: LF
6: CR+LF
7: Semi-colon
Yes
Yes
407
Serial data output zero suppress
0
0: None
1: ON
Yes
Yes
System data list
ZW User's Manual
Data
number
Parameter
default value Setting range/output range
Acquisition Setting
Yes/No
Yes/No
500
Analog output destination
0
0: Voltage
1: Current
Yes
Yes
600
Bank mode
0
0: Normal
1: Judgment value
Yes
Yes
601
Current bank number
0
0 to 7: Banks 1 to 8 (start bank number)
Yes
0 to 31: Banks 1 to 32 (start judgment value
bank number)
Yes
750
LOGGING save count
12800
0 to 128000
Yes
Yes
750
LOGGING save intervals
1
0 to 1000
Yes
Yes
900
Number of digits displayed past
decimal point
1
0 to 5: 0 to 5 digits
Yes
Yes
901
Key lock
0
0: OFF
1: ON
Yes
Yes
902
Timing/reset key input control
0
0: OFF
1: ON
Yes
Yes
1000
Zero reset memory
0
0: OFF
1: ON
Yes
Yes
APPENDICES
10
ZW User's Manual
System data list
389
10-5 Object Dictionary
Object Dictionary Area
The CAN application protocol over EtherCAT (CoE) is based on the object dictionary of the CAN application
protocol. All objects are assigned a 4-digit hex index and comprise the following areas.
Index
Area
Description
0000 hex to 0FFF hex
Data type area
Definition of data type
1000 hex to 1FFF hex
CoE communications area
Definition of variables that can be used for all servers intended for
exclusive communications
2000 hex to 2FFF hex
Manufacturer unique area 1
Variables defined in common to all OMRON products
3000 hex to 5FFF hex
Manufacturer unique area 2
Variables defined on ZW series EtherCAT slaves
6000 hex to 9FFF hex
Device profile area
Unused (not supported)
A000 hex to FFFF hex
Reserved area
Area reserved for use in the future
Data type
The following data types are used by this profile.
390
Data type
Abbreviation
Size
Range
Boolean
BOOL
1 bit
true (1), false (0)
Unsigned 8
U8
1 byte
0 to 255
Unsigned 16
U16
2 bytes
0 to 65535
Unsigned 32
U32
4 bytes
0 to 4294967295
Integer 8
INT8
1 byte
-128 to 127
Integer 16
INT16
2 bytes
-32768 to 32767
Integer 32
INT32
4 bytes
-2147483648 to 2147483647
Visible string
VS


Object Dictionary
ZW User's Manual
Description Format of Objects
This manual describes objects in the following format.
Object description format
<Index>
<Object name>
Setting range: <Setting range>
Unit: <Unit>
Size: <Size>
Factory setting: <Factory setting>
Access: <Access>
Data attribute: <Data attribute>
PDO map: <Yes/No>
Object description format when objects have a sub-index
<Index>
<Object name>
Sub-index 0
Setting range: <Setting range>
Unit: <Unit>
Size: <Size>
Factory setting: <Factory setting>
Access: <Access>
Data attribute: <Data attribute>
PDO map: <Yes/No>
.
.
.
Sub-index N
Setting range: <Setting range>
Unit: <Unit>
Size: <Size>
Factory setting: <Factory setting>
Access: <Access>
Data attribute: <Data attribute>
PDO map: <Yes/No>
<> indicates the data. Data details are are shown as follows.
• Object name
: Object name
• Range
: Range of numerical values that can be set
• Unit
: Physical unit
• Factory setting
: Default value set at shipment of product from the factory
• Data attributes
: Timing that changes are enabled by writable objects
A : Enabled at all times
B : Count stopped  operation timing
C : Pre-operational state  safe operational state timing
D : Pre-operational state  initialization state timing
R : Power reset
 : Not writable
• Size
: The size of objects is indicated in bytes.
• Access
: Indicates read-only or read/write.
RO : Read-only
RW: Read/write
• PDO map
: Indicates mappability to PDO.
ZW User's Manual
10
: Index of object indicated as a 4-digit hex number
APPENDICES
• Index
Object Dictionary
391
Communication Object
1000 hex
Device Type
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Data attributes: 
Factory setting: 00000000 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• The ZW series does not support device profiles.
1001 hex
Error Register
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Data attributes: 
Factory setting: 00 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Indicates the error type that occurred on the slave.
Bit
Name
Bit
Name
0
General error
4
Communication error
1
Current error
5
Error unique to device profile
2
Voltage error
6
(Reserved)
3
Temperature error
7
Manufacturer unique error
1008 hex
Manufacturer Device Name
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 20 bytes (VS)
Factory setting:
For each slave type*
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
• Displays the model of the slave.
1009 hex
Manufacturer Hardware Version
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 20 bytes (VS)
Factory setting:
For each slave type*
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
• Displays the hardware version of the slave.
100A hex
Manufacturer Software Version
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 20 bytes (VS)
Factory setting:
For each slave type*
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
• Displays the software version of the slave.
*:
392
The device type, device name, hardware version, and software version factory settings are as follows according to the slave.
Model
Manufacuture device name
Manufacture hardware version Manufacture software version
ZW-CE10T
ZW-CE15T
ZW-CE1x
Space (20 hex)
20 characters
Object Dictionary
"C1.00
"
(Space (20 hex))
15 characters
ZW User's Manual
1011 hex
Restore Default Parameters
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Data attributes: 
Factory setting: 01 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Restore Default Parameters
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 00000001 hex
Access: RW
Data attribute: A
PDO map: Not possible
• Returns parameters to their factory setting values.
• Parameters are restored only when a specific numerical value is written to sub-index 1 so that parameters are not
restored by mistake.
• Specific numerical value means "load".
MSB
LSB
d
a
o
l
64 hex
61 hex
6F hex
6C hex
• The ABORT code is indicated when a value other than the specific numerical value is written.
• During a read, 0000 0001 hex (command enabled) is indicated.
• This is not supported on the ZW series.
1018 hex
Identity Object
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 04 hex
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Vendor ID
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 00000083 hex
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Product Code
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting:
For each slave type*
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Revision Number
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting:
For each slave type*
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: Serial Number
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Unit: 
Factory setting: For each unit
Access: RO
APPENDICES
Setting range: 
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
• This object indicates the device information.
10
• Sub-index 1 (Vendor ID) indicates the manufacturer identifier.
• For sub-index 2 (Product Code), a value assigned to each slave type is indicated.
• For sub-index 3 (Revision Number), the revision number of the unit is indicated.
• Bits 0 to 15: Minor revision number of device
• Bits 16 to 31: Major revision number of device
• For sub-index 4 (Serial Number), the serial number given to each product is indicated.
• In unit version Ver.1.0, the serial number is always indicated as 00000000 hex.
ZW User's Manual
Object Dictionary
393
*
The value of Identity object is as follows according to the slave.
Model
Product Code (hex)
Revision Number (hex)
ZW-CE10T
ZW-CE15T

00010000
10F3 hex
Diagnosis History
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 0D hex
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Maximum Messages
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 00 hex
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Newest Message
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 5: Flags
Setting range: 0000 hex-0001 hex
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory setting: 0000 hex
Access: RW
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 6 to 13: Diagnosis Message 1 to 8
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 23 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
• This objects indicates a maximum of 8 diagnosis histories. It also sets emergency message enabled/disabled.
• Sub-index 1 (Maximum Messages) indicates the number of error messages.
• Sub-index 2 (Newest Messages) indicates the sub-index number of the latest diagnosis history.
• Sub-index 5 (Flags) is the control flag of the diagnosis history. This sets whether or not to notify error messages as
emergency messages. 0001 hex sets to notify as an emergency message, and 0000 hex sets not to notify as an
emergency message. When the power is started up, the setting is 0000 hex (Emergency non-notification).
• Sub-index 6 to 13 (Diagnosis message 1 to 8) indicates the diagnosis history.
From Sub-index 6 (Diagnosis message 1) to sub-index 13 (Diagnosis message 8), 8 errors are stored successively.
For the 9th error, sub-index 6 (Diagnosis message 1) is returned to and an error is stored there.
• The ZW series supports only Flags.
394
Object Dictionary
ZW User's Manual
PDO Mapping Object
From index 1600 hex to 17FF hex and from 1A00 hex to 1BFF hex are used for setting receive PDO mapping
and transmit PDO mapping, respectively. Sub-index 1 onwards indicate the information of application objects to
be mapped.
31
16 15
8 7
SubIndex
Index
0
Bit length
MSB
LSB
Bits 0 to 7
: Bit length of mapped object
(For example, in the case of 32 bits, 20 hex is indicated.)
Bits 8 to 15
: Sub-index of mapped object
Bits 16 to 31
: Index of mapped object
16FF hex
256th receive PDO Mapping
Sub-index 0: Number of objects
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 01 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: 1st Output Object to be mapped
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 30000120 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Mapping for applications that use displacement sensor functions.
• 3000 hex (control signal) is mapped in four bytes.
• This object is excluded from being applied when 1700 hex (257th receive PDO mapping) is selected.
1700 hex
257th receive PDO Mapping
Sub-index 0: Number of objects
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 20 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1 to 32: 1st-32th Output Object to be mapped
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Unit: 
Factory setting: 30000201 to 30002101 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
APPENDICES
• Mapping for applications that use displacement sensor functions.
• 3000 hex (control signal) is mapped in 1-byte units.
• This object is excluded from being applied when 16FF hex (257th receive PDO mapping) is selected.
10
ZW User's Manual
Object Dictionary
395
1701 hex
258th receive PDO Mapping
Sub-index 0: Number of objects
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 04 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: 1st Output Object to be mapped
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory settings: 30020020 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: 2nd Output Object to be mapped
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 30100120 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: 3rd Output Object to be mapped
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 30100220 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: 4th Output Object to be mapped
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 30100320 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Mapping for applications that use displacement sensor functions.
• 3002 hex (Command code)
• 3010 hex (Command execution parameter 1-3)
1AFF hex
256th transmit PDO Mapping
Sub-index 0: Number of objects
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 01 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: 1st Input Object to be mapped
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 30010120 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Mapping for applications that use displacement sensor functions.
• 3001 hex (status signal) is mapped in four bytes.
• This object is excluded from being applied when 1B700 hex (257th transmit PDO mapping) is selected.
1B00 hex
257th transmit PDO Mapping
Sub-index 0: Number of objects
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 20 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1 to 32: 1st-32th Input Object to be mapped
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Unit: 
Factory setting: 30010201 to 30012101 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Mapping for applications that use displacement sensor functions.
• 3001 hex (status signal) is mapped in 1-byte units.
• This object is excluded from being applied when 1AFF hex (256th transmit PDO mapping) is selected.
396
Object Dictionary
ZW User's Manual
1B01 hex
258th transmit PDO Mapping
Sub-index 0: Number of objects
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 04 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: 1st Input Object to be mapped
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory settings: 30030020 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: 2nd Input Object to be mapped
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory settings: 30040020 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: 3rd Input Object to be mapped
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory settings: 30050120 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: 4th Input Object to be mapped
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory settings: 30060020 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Mapping for applications that use displacement sensor functions.
• 3003 hex (Response command code)
• 3004 hex (Response code)
• 3005 hex (Response date 1)
• 3006 hex (Extended data)
1B02 hex
259th transmit PDO Mapping
Sub-index 0: Number of objects
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 08 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1-8: 1st-8th Input Object to be mapped
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory settings: 30200120 to 30200820 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Mapping for applications that use displacement sensor functions.
• 3020 hex (Output data 1 to 8)
1B03 hex
260th transmit PDO Mapping
APPENDICES
Sub-index 0: Number of objects
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 08 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1 to 8: 1st-8th Input Object to be mapped
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
10
Setting range: 
Factory settings: 30200920 to 30201020 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Mapping for applications that use displacement sensor functions.
• 3020 hex (Output data 9 to 16)
• This object is excluded from being applied when 1B04 hex (261th transmit PDO mapping) or 1B05 hex (262th
transmit PDO mapping) is selected.
ZW User's Manual
Object Dictionary
397
1B04 hex
261th transmit PDO Mapping
Sub-index 0: Number of objects
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 18 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1 to 24: 1st-24th Input Object to be mapped
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory settings: 30200920 to 30202020 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Mapping for applications that use displacement sensor functions.
• 3020 hex (Output data 9 to 32)
• This object is excluded from being applied when 1B03 hex (260th transmit PDO mapping) or 1B05 hex (262th
transmit PDO mapping) is selected.
1B05 hex
262th transmit PDO Mapping
Sub-index 0: Number of objects
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 38 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1 to 56: 1st-56th Input Object to be mapped
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory settings: 30200920 to 30204020 hex
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Mapping for applications that use displacement sensor functions.
• 3020 hex (Output data 9 to 64)
• This object is excluded from being applied when 1B03 hex (260th transmit PDO mapping) or 1B04 hex (261th
transmit PDO mapping) is selected.
1BFF hex
512th transmit PDO Mapping
Sub-index 0: Number of objects in this PDO
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 01 hex
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: 1st Input Object to be mapped
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Unit: 
Factory setting: 20020108 hex
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
• This object is mapping for the slave to notify that it detected an error.
• 2002 hex to 01 hex: Sysmac error status is mapped.
• When connected to the machine automation controller NJ series, 1C13 hex:
This object is assigned to the Sync Manager 3PDO assignment.
By the Sysmac Studio default setting, this object is automatically assigned.
398
Object Dictionary
ZW User's Manual
Sync Manager Communication Object
Memory for EtherCAT is set by objects from 1C00 hex to 1C13 hex.
1C00 hex
Sync Manager Communication Type
Sub-index 0: Number of used SM channels
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 04 hex
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Communication Type Sync Manager 0
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U8)
Factory setting: 01 hex
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Communication Type Sync Manager 1
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U8)
Factory setting: 02 hex
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Communication Type Sync Manager 2
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U8)
Factory setting: 03 hex
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: Communication Type Sync Manager 3
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U8)
Factory setting: 04 hex
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
• Sync Manager is set as follows:
• SM0: Mailbox receive (EtherCAT master  slave)
• SM1: Mailbox transmit (slave  EtherCAT master)
• SM2: Process data output EtherCAT master  slave)
• SM3: Process data output (slave  EtherCAT master)
1C10 hex
Sync Manager 0 PDO Assignment
Sub-index 0: Number of assigned PDOs
Setting range: 00 hex
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 00 hex
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
• Indicates the number of PDO mappings used by this Sync Manager.
• The mailbox receive Sync Manager does not have PDOs.
APPENDICES
1C11 hex
Sync Manager 1 PDO Assignment
Sub-index 0: Number of assigned PDOs
Setting range: 00 hex
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Unit: 
Factory setting: 00 hex
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
10
• Indicates the number of PDO mappings used by this Sync Manager.
• The mailbox transmit Sync Manager does not have PDOs.
ZW User's Manual
Object Dictionary
399
1C12 hex
Sync Manager 2 PDO Assignment
Sub-index 0: Number of assigned receiving PDOs
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 02Hex
Access: RW
*
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1 to 2: 1st-2nd PDO Mapping Object Index of assigned PDO
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Access: RW*
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
*:
Factory setting:
For each slave type*
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
When no receive PDO is held, access becomes "RO".
• Indicates the receive PDO used by this Sync Manager.
1C13 hex
Sync Manager 3 PDO Assignment
Sub-index 0: Number of assigned transmit PDOs
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Factory setting: 05 hex
Access: RW*
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1 to 5: 1st-5th PDO Mapping Object Index of assigned PDO
Setting range: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
*:
Unit: 
Factory setting:
For each slave type*
Access: RW*
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
When no transmit PDO is held, access becomes "RO".
• Indicates the transmit PDO used by this Sync Manager.
*:
400
The factory settings of Sync manager 2 PDO assignment and Sync manager 3 PDO assignment differ for
OMRON tools and tools made by other manufacturers. Factory settings are as follows.
Object Dictionary
ZW User's Manual
Factory settings for OMRON tools (when an NJ series Controller is used in Sysmac Studio)
Model
[email protected] (all models)
Sync manager 2
PDO assignment
(Hex)
Number of assignment RxPDO
02 hex
Assigned PDO
1
16FF hex (256th receive PDO Mapping)
2
1701 hex (258th receive PDO Mapping)
Sync manager 3
PDO assignment
(Hex)
Number of assignment RxPDO
04 hex
Assigned PDO
1
1AFF hex (256th transmit PDO Mapping)
2
1B01 hex (258th transmit PDO Mapping)
3
1B02 hex (259th transmit PDO Mapping)
4

5
1BFF hex (512th transmit PDO Mapping)
OMRON tool (when the position control unit [email protected]@ is used in CX-Programmer)
Model
Sync manager 2
PDO assignment
(Hex)
Sync manager 3
PDO assignment
(Hex)
[email protected] (all models)
Number of assigned RxPDOs
02 hex
Assigned PDO
1
16FF hex (256th receive PDO Mapping)
2
1701 hex (258th receive PDO Mapping)
Number of assigned RxPDOs
03 hex
Assigned PDO
1
1AFF hex (256th transmit PDO Mapping)
2
1B01 hex (258th transmit PDO Mapping)
3
1B02 hex (259th transmit PDO Mapping)
4

5

Tools made by other manufacturers
Model
Sync manager 2
PDO assignment
(Hex)
Sync manager 3
PDO assignment
(Hex)
[email protected] (all models)
Number of assignment RxPDO
02 hex
Assigned PDO
1
1700 hex (257th receive PDO Mapping)
2
1701 hex (258th receive PDO Mapping)
03 hex
Assigned PDO
1
1B00 hex (257th transmit PDO Mapping)
2
1B01 hex (258th transmit PDO Mapping)
3
1B02 hex (259th transmit PDO Mapping)
4

5

APPENDICES
Number of assignment RxPDO
10
ZW User's Manual
Object Dictionary
401
Manufacturer Unique Objects
This section describes the CiA401 generic I/O module device profile mounted on ZW series EtherCAT slaves
and mounted objects that are unique to ZW series EtherCAT slaves.
Sysmac device common objects
• Manufacturer unique area 1
2100 hex
Error History Clear
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Factory setting: 00000000 hex
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
Data attribute: A
PDO map: Not possible
• This object clears the diagnosis history of 10F3 hex (Diagnosis History).
• The diagnosis history is cleared only when a specific numerical value is written. Specific numerical value means
"elcl".
MSB
LSB
l
c
l
e
6C hex
63 hex
6C hex
65 hex
Writing of values other than these numeric values is invalid.
402
Object Dictionary
ZW User's Manual
2002 hex
Sysmac Error
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 02 hex
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Sysmac Error Status
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 00 hex
Access: RO
Data attributes: 
PDO map: Possible
Sub-index 2: Sysmac Error Status Clear
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 00 hex
Access: RW
Data attribute: A
PDO map: Not possible
• Notifies and clears Sysmac error status.
• Sub-index 1: Sysmac Error Status
• This object is for the slave to notify that it detected an error.
• When connected to a machine automation controller NJ series, this object is mapped to the PDO.
• Sub-index 2: Sysmac Error Status Clear
• This object is for the Controller of the Sysmac device to reset the error occurring on the slave.
Note
With the Sysmac studio default setting, sub-index 1: System Error Status is automatically mapped to the PDO by the
assignment of 1BFF hex: 512th transmit PDO mapping.
2200 hex
Communication Error Setting
Setting range: 00 hex to 0F hex
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Unit: Times
Factory setting: 01 hex
Access: RW
Data attribute: C
PDO map: Not possible
• This object is mounted only on slaves running in the DC mode.
• This object sets the continuous number of times that a communications error is detected.
• The setting range is 00 to 0Fh, and the detection count is "set count +1".
• When the slave is running in the DC mode, values can be rewritten. However, the slave runs at the preset value
when the state migrates from pre-operational to save operational. The newly rewritten value is read as the read
value at this time.
Note
APPENDICES
With the factory setting of 01 hex, an error is detected when a communications error is detected twice consecutively.
10
ZW User's Manual
Object Dictionary
403
2201 hex
Sync Not Received Timeout Setting
Setting range: 0000 hex to 0258
hex
Unit: s
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory setting: 0000 hex
Access: RW
Data attribute: C
PDO map: Not possible
• This object is mounted only on slaves running in the DC mode.
• This object sets the standby time until the first sync interrupt signal (SYNC 0) is input after the state migrates to safe
operational (state in which DC mode operation is determined).
• If no initial interrupt signal (SYNC 0) is input during this preset time, a sync error occurs.
• The setting range is 0000 hex to 0258 hex (600 s), and operation is performed at 120 s when 0000 hex is set.
• When the slave is running in the DC mode, values can be rewritten. However, the slave runs at the preset value
when the state migrates from pre-operational to save operational. The newly rewritten value is read as the read
value at this time.
Displacement Sensor Specific Objects
• Object specifications (PDO)
3000 hex
Common Control Flag
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Common Control Flag
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 00000000 hex
Access: RW
PDO map: R
Sub-index 2: EXE Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Setting range: False (0)
Access: RW
PDO map: R
Sub-index 3: SYNC Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: R
Sub-index 4 to 17: Common Control Reserve Bit 02 to 15
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Setting range: False (0)
Access: RW
PDO map: R
Sub-index 18: ERRCLR Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Setting range: False (0)
Access: RW
PDO map: R
Sub-index 19 to 33: Common Control Reserve Bit 17 to 31
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Setting range: False (0)
Access: RW
PDO map: R
• This object controls the displacement sensor.
• EXE Bit: This is set to execute a command.
• ERRCLR bit: This is set to clear the ERR bit (XXX).
404
Object Dictionary
ZW User's Manual
3001 hex
Sensor Head 1 Control Flag
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Sensor Head 1 Control Flag
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 00000000 hex
Access: RW
PDO map: R
Sub-index 2: TIMING 1 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Setting range: False (0)
Access: RW
PDO map: R
Sub-index 3: RESET 1 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Setting range: False (0)
Access: RW
PDO map: R
Sub-index 4: LIGHTOFF 1 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Setting range: False (0)
Access: RW
PDO map: R
Sub-index 5 to 17: Sensor Head 1 Control Reserve Bit 3 to 15
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Setting range: False (0)
Access: RW
PDO map: R
Sub-index 18 to 21: ZERO 1_T1 to T4 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Setting range: False (0)
Access: RW
PDO map: R
Sub-index 22 to 25: ZEROCLR 1_T1 to T4 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Setting range: False (0)
Access: RW
PDO map: R
Sub-index 26 to 33: Sensor Head 1 Control Reserve Bit 24 to 31
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Setting range: False (0)
Access: RW
PDO map: R
• This object controls sensor head 1 of the displacement sensor.
3003 hex
Command code
Sub-index: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Unit: 
APPENDICES
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: R
• Commands such as bank switching are stored.
10
ZW User's Manual
Object Dictionary
405
3004 hex
Command parameter
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1 to 2: Command parameter 1 to 2
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: R
Sub-index 3: Command parameter 3
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: R
• Command parameters are stored. (Example: When the bank switching command is executed, the bank number is
stored.)
3010 hex
Common Status Flag
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Status Flag
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 2: FLG Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 3: SYNCFLG Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 4: READY Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 5: Common Status Reserve Bit 03
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 6: RUN Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 7 to 12: Common Control Reserve Bit 05 to 10
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 13 to 17: BANKOUT 1_A to E Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
406
Object Dictionary
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
ZW User's Manual
Sub-index 18: ERR Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 19 to 33: Common Status Reserve Bit 17 to 31
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
• This object acquires the status of the displacement sensor.
3011 hex
Sensor Head 1 Status Flag
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Sensor Head 1 Status Flag
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 2: HOLDSTAT 1 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 3: RESETSTAT 1 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 4: LIGHT 1 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 5: STABILITY 1 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 6: ENABLE 1 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 7: GATE 1 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
APPENDICES
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Sub-index 8: OR 1 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
10
Sub-index 9 to 17: Sensor Head 1 Status Reserve Bit 07 to 15
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 18 to 21: ZEROSTAT 1_T1 to T4 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
ZW User's Manual
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Object Dictionary
407
Sub-index 22: HIGH 1_T1 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 23: PASS 1_T1 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 24: LOW 1_T1 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 25: HIGH 1_T2 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 26: PASS 1_T2 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 27: LOW 1_T2 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 28: HIGH 1_T3 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 29: PASS 1_T3 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 30: LOW 1_T3 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 31: HIGH 1_T4 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 32: PASS 1_T4 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 33: LOW 1_T4 Bit
Setting range: True (1) or False (0) Unit: 
Size: 1 bit (BOOL)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
• This object acquires the status of sensor head 1 of the displacement sensor.
3013 hex
Response
Sub-index: 
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
• The executed command code is stored.
408
Object Dictionary
ZW User's Manual
3014 hex
Response code
Sub-index: 
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
• The execution result of the command is stored. (OK: 00000000 hex, NG: FFFFFFFF hex)
3015 hex
Response data
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Response data 1
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
• The response data of the command execution result is stored.
(Example: When the processing unit data acquisition command is executed, the acquired data is stored.)
3020 hex
Measurement Value
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1 to 4: Measurement Value of Task 1 to 4
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
Sub-index 5 to 8: Measurement Value Reserve 01 to 04
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: T
• The output data is stored.
• Object specifications (current bank)
3100 hex
Sensor Head Number
Sub-index: 
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 1
Access: RW
APPENDICES
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 0
PDO map: Not possible
• The target sensor head number is stored. (On the [email protected], this is fixed at "0".))
3101 hex
Picture Input
10
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Measurement Cycle
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
ZW User's Manual
Unit: s
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Object Dictionary
409
Sub-index 2: Area 1 Upper Line
Setting range: 0 to 255
Factory setting: 
Unit: pix
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Area 1 Lower Line
Setting range: 0 to 255
Factory setting: 
Unit: pix
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: Gain
Setting range: 0 to 2
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 5: Area Mode
Setting range: 0 to 1
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 6: Area Follow Mode
Setting range: 0 to 3
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 7: Area 2 upper Line
Setting range: 0 to 255
Factory setting: 
Unit: pix
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 8: Area 2 lower Line
Setting range: 0 to 255
Factory setting: 
Unit: pix
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 9: Start offset of Follow
Setting range: -999999999 to
999999999
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 10: End offset of Follow
Setting range: -999999999 to
999999999
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 11: Measurement Cycle (Test)
Setting range: 
Unit: s
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 12: Measurement Center
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 13: Measurement Range
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 14: Measurement Cycle (Clk)
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
410
Object Dictionary
Factory setting: 
Unit: CLK
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
ZW User's Manual
Sub-index 15: Reference Measurement Value
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 16: Current Area
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 17: Base
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 4
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 18: Follow
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 4
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 19: Reference Teach
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: WO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 20: Area Teach
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: WO
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to processing item "image input" is stored.
3102 hex
Exposure Time Control (2 area mode off)
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Exposure Mode
Setting range: 0 to 1
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Control Edge
Setting range: 0 to 4
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Exposure Time (Fixed)
Setting range: 1 to 5000
Unit: s
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
APPENDICES
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Sub-index 4: Exposure Time (Maximum)
Setting range: 1 to 5000
Unit: s
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
10
Sub-index 5: Incident Level
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 6: Exposure Time Control Status
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
ZW User's Manual
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Object Dictionary
411
Sub-index 7: Incident Level (Average)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 8: Exposure Time
Setting range: 
Unit: s
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 9 to 12: Incident Level (1st Edge) to (4th Edge)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 13: Enable Status
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 14: Optimum Incident Level Lower
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 15: Optimum Incident Level Upper
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 16: Total Density
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 17: Background Base Level
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 18: Number of Average Incident Level
Setting range: 0 to 8
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 19: LED On/Off
Setting range: 0 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to processing item "Exposure time control (when 2 area mode is OFF)" is stored.
• The data of exposure time control in the 2 area mode is stored to
Exposure time control of area 1: Index 3103 hex
Exposure time control of area 2: Index 3104 hex
412
Object Dictionary
ZW User's Manual
3105 hex
Target to Measure
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Material
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 2
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Average Number of Times
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 15
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Noise Cut Level
Setting range: 0 to 4095
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: Measurement Value of Acceptance Edge
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 5: Measurement Value of Acceptance Edge (Absolute)
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to processing item "target to measure" is stored.
3106 hex
Measuring Point (Task 1)
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Measurement Mode
Setting range: 0 to 3
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Measurement Surface 1
Setting range: 0 to 4
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Measurement Surface 2
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
APPENDICES
Setting range: 0 to 4
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: Parameter X
Setting range: 0 to 4
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
10
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Sub-index 5: Parameter Y
Setting range: 0 to 4
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
ZW User's Manual
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Object Dictionary
413
Sub-index 6: Parameter K
Setting range: -999999999 to
999999999
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 7: Parameter M
Setting range: -100 to 100
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 8: Parameter N
Setting range: -100 to 100
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 9: Measurement Area
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 10: Measurement Result
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 11: Measurement Value (Top)
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 12: Measurement Value (End)
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to TASK 1 processing item "measurement point" is stored.
• The measurement point data of TASK 2 to 4 is stored to:
TASK 2: Index 3110 hex
TASK 3: Index 311A hex
TASK 4: Index 3124 hex
3107 hex
Scaling (Task 1)
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Scaling Mode
Setting range: 0 to 3
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Span
Setting range: -20000 to 20000
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Offset
Setting range: -999999999 to
999999999
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
414
Object Dictionary
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
ZW User's Manual
Sub-index 4: Result of Scaling
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 5: Scaling Direction
Setting range: 0 to 1
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 6: Setting Height (1 Point)
Setting range: -999999999 to
999999999
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 7: Setting Height (2 Point)
Setting range: -999999999 to
999999999
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 8: Setting Thickness (1 Point)
Setting range: -999999999 to
999999999
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 9: Measurement Height Value (1 Point)
Setting range: -999999999 to
999999999
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 10: Measurement Height Value (2 Point)
Setting range: -999999999 to
999999999
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 11: Measurement Thickness Value (1 Point)
Setting range: -999999999 to
999999999
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 12: Number of Scaling
Setting range: 0 to 1
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 13: Execute Scaling
Setting range: 0 to 1
Factory setting: 
Access: WO
APPENDICES
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Unit: 
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to TASK 1 processing item "scaling" is stored.
• The scaling data of TASK 2 to 4 is stored to:
TASK 2: Index 3111 hex
TASK 3: Index 311B hex
10
TASK 4: Index 3125 hex
ZW User's Manual
Object Dictionary
415
3108 hex
Median Filter (Task 1)
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Median Filter Mode
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 3
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Median Filter Result
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to TASK 1 processing item "media" is stored.
• The media data of TASK 2 to 4 is stored to:
TASK 2: Index 3112 hex
TASK 3: Index 311C hex
TASK 4: Index 3126 hex
3109 hex
Average Filter (Task 1)
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Average Number of Times
Setting range: 0 to 12
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Average Filter Result
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Resolution
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to TASK 1 processing item "average" is stored.
• The average data of TASK 2 to 4 is stored to:
TASK 2: Index 3113 hex
TASK 3: Index 311D hex
TASK 4: Index 3127 hex
416
Object Dictionary
ZW User's Manual
310A hex
Frequency Filter (Task 1)
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Filter Mode
Setting range: 0 to 3
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Cutoff Frequency
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: MHz
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Cutoff Frequency (Upper Limit)
Setting range: 1 to 999999
Factory setting: 
Unit: MHz
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: Cutoff Frequency (Lower Limit)
Setting range: 1 to 999999
Factory setting: 
Unit: MHz
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 5: Frequency Filter Result
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to TASK 1 processing item "frequency filter" is stored.
• The frequency filter data of TASK 2 to 4 is stored to:
TASK 2: Index 3114 hex
TASK 3: Index 311E hex
TASK 4: Index 3128 hex
APPENDICES
10
ZW User's Manual
Object Dictionary
417
310B hex
Differentiation Filter (Task 1)
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Differentiation Mode
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Differentiation Cycle
Setting range: 1 to 5000
Factory setting: 
Unit: ms
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Differentiation Filter Result
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to TASK 1 processing item "differentiation" is stored.
• The differentiation data of TASK 2 to 4 is stored to:
TASK 2: Index 3115 hex
TASK 3: Index 311F hex
TASK 4: Index 3129 hex
310C hex
Hold (Task 1)
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Hold Mode
Setting range: 0 to 10
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Trigger Method
Setting range: 1 to 2
Factory setting: 
Unit: ms
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Trigger Level
Setting range: -999999999 to
999999999
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: Trigger Hysteresis
Setting range: 0 to 999999999
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 5: Trigger Delay Time
Setting range: 1 to 5000
Factory setting: 
Unit: ms
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 6: Sampling Time
Setting range: 1 to 5000
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
418
Object Dictionary
Factory setting: 
Unit: ms
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
ZW User's Manual
Sub-index 7: Trigger Delay Mode
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 8: Value of Hold
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 9: Hold Status
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 10: Update Status
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 11: Trigger Input Status
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 12: Hold off Input Status
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to TASK 1 processing item "hold" is stored.
• The hold data of TASK 2 to 4 is stored to:
TASK 2: Index 3116 hex
TASK 3: Index 3120 hex
TASK 4: Index 312A hex
310D hex
Zero Reset (Task 1)
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Zero Reset Status
Setting range: 0 to 1
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Zero Reset Offset
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
APPENDICES
Setting range: -999999999 to
999999999
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Zero Reset Type
Setting range: 0 to 1
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
10
Sub-index 4: Zero Reset Measurement Value
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
ZW User's Manual
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Object Dictionary
419
Sub-index 5: Zero Reset Execution Enabled/Disabled Status
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 6: Zero Reset Flag
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: WO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 7: Zero Reset Cancel Flag
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: WO
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to TASK 1 processing item "zero reset" is stored.
• The zero reset data of TASK 2 to 4 is stored to:
TASK 2: Index 3117 hex
TASK 3: Index 3121 hex
TASK 4: Index 312B hex
310E hex
Non-Measurement Setting (Task 1)
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Output Data
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to TASK 1 processing item "processing at non-measurement" is stored.
• The processing at non-measurement of TASK 2 to 4 is stored to:
TASK 2: Index 3118 hex
TASK 3: Index 3122 hex
TASK 4: Index 312C hex
• On the ZW, this is not required since settings are not made directly.
310F hex
Judgement Output (Task 1)
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: LOW Threshold
Setting range: -999999999 to
999999999
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: HIGH Threshold
Setting range: -999999999 to
999999999
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Output Data
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
420
Object Dictionary
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
ZW User's Manual
Sub-index 4: Output Judgement Status
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 5: HIGH Result
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 6: PASS Result
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 7: LOW Result
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 8: ERROR Result
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to TASK 1 processing item "judgment output" is stored.
• The judgment output of TASK 2 to 4 is stored to:
TASK 2: Index 3119 hex
TASK 3: Index 3123 hex
TASK 4: Index 312D hex
312E hex
Judgement Processing
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Hysteresis Width
Setting range: 0 to 999999999
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Timer Mode
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 3
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Delay Time
Setting range: 1 to 5000
Factory setting: 
Unit: ms
Access: RW
APPENDICES
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: Output Object
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 3
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
312F hex
10
• Data relating to processing item "judgment processing" is stored.
Non-Measurement Setting
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
ZW User's Manual
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Object Dictionary
421
Sub-index 1: Non-Measurement Mode
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Analog Clamp Output
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Binary Clamp Output
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to processing item "processing at non-measurement" is stored.
3130 hex
Analog Output
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Monitor Focus Mode
Setting range: 0 to 1
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2 to 3: Monitor Focus Output Position 1 to 2
Setting range: -999999999 to
999999999
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: Monitor Focus Current Low Limit
Setting range: 4 to 20
Factory setting: 
Unit: mA
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 5: Monitor Focus Current High Limit
Setting range: 4 to 20
Factory setting: 
Unit: mA
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 6: Monitor Focus Voltage Low Limit
Setting range: -10 to 10
Factory setting: 
Unit: V
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 7: Monitor Focus Voltage High Limit
Setting range: -10 to 10
Factory setting: 
Unit: V
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 8: Analog Output Adjustment Mode
Setting range: 0 to 1
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 9: Analog Output Adjustment Span
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 10: Analog Output Adjustment Offset
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
422
Object Dictionary
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
ZW User's Manual
Sub-index 11: Monitor Focus Clear
Setting range: 1 to 1
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 12: Analog Output Adjustment Clear
Setting range: 1 to 1
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 13: Test Adjustment Mode
Setting range: 0 to 1
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 14: Test Adjustment Dac Output
Setting range: 3069 to 61069
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 15: Clamp Dac Output
Setting range: 3069 to 61069
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 16: Current/Voltage Mode
Setting range: 0 to 1
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 17: Output Object
Setting range: 0 to 4
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 18: Output Level During Clamping
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 19: Reference Data Address
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 20: Analog Output Data
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 21: Output Dac Low Limit
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
APPENDICES
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Sub-index 22: Output Dac High Limit
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
10
Sub-index 23: Dac Range of Analog Output Convert
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 24: Round Number of Analog Output Calculation
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
ZW User's Manual
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Object Dictionary
423
Sub-index 25: Analog Output Adjustment
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 26: Monitor Focus Output Position Low Limit
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 27: Monitor Focus Output Position High Limit
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 28: Monitor Focus Tilt Sign
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 29: Dac Limit Distance (Max.)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 30: Dac Limit Distance (Min.)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 31: Da Output After Adjustment
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 32: Before Current Adjustment (1 Point)
Setting range: 4 to 20
Factory setting: 
Unit: mA
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 33: Before Current Adjustment (2 Point)
Setting range: 4 to 20
Factory setting: 
Unit: mA
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 34: Current Dac (1 Point)
Setting range: -999 to 999
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 35: Current Dac (2 Point)
Setting range: -999 to 999
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 36: Before Voltage Adjustment (1 Point)
Setting range: -10 to 10
Factory setting: 
Unit: V
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 37: Before Voltage Adjustment (2 Point)
Setting range: -10 to 10
Factory setting: 
Unit: V
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 38: Voltage Dac (1 Point)
Setting range: -999 to 999
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
424
Object Dictionary
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
ZW User's Manual
Sub-index 39: Voltage Dac (2 Point)
Setting range: -999 to 999
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (INT32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 40: Test Adjustment Output (1 Point)
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 41: Test Adjustment Output (2 Point)
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 42: Execute Adjustment
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: WO
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to processing item "analog output" is stored.
3133 hex
Parallel Output
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Parallel Output Target
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 4
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Parallel Output Result
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 4
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to processing item "parallel output" is stored.
3134 hex
Parallel Input
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Parallel Input Mode
Setting range: 0 to 1
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
APPENDICES
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Sub-index 2: Control Task
Setting range: 0 to 5
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
10
Sub-index 3: Parallel 0 Input Status
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: Parallel 1 Input Status
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
ZW User's Manual
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Object Dictionary
425
Sub-index 5: Parallel 2 Input Status
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 6: Parallel 3 Input Status
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 7: Trigger
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 8: Hold Reset
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 9: Led off
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 10: Zero Reset
Unit: 
Setting range: 0 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 11: Zero Reset Cancel
Unit: 
Setting range: 1 to 1
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to processing item "parallel input" is stored.
3135 hex
Line Bright
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Upper Line
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: pix
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Lower Line
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: pix
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Thin Number
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: pix
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
• Data relating to processing item "measurement waveform" is stored.
3150 hex
Unit Data Read Execution
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
426
Object Dictionary
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
ZW User's Manual
Sub-index 1: Unit No
Setting range: 0 to #xFFFF
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Data No
Setting range: 0 to #xFFFF
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
3151 hex
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Unit Data Read Result
Sub-index: 
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
3152 hex
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Unit Data Write Execution
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Unit No
Setting range: 0 to #xFFFF
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Data No
Setting range: 0 to #xFFFF
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Sub-index 3: Write Data
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
• Object specifications (system information)
3200 hex
Controller System Information
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Controller Serial No.
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
APPENDICES
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Model
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 16 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
10
Sub-index 3: Type
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: Number of Sensor Head
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
ZW User's Manual
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Object Dictionary
427
Sub-index 13: Mac Address
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 14: Port No.
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 15: Ethernet Protocol
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 17: Host Major Version
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 17: Host Minor Version
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
3201 hex
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sensor Head 1 Information
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Sensor Serial No.
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Model
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 16 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Type
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: Work Distance
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 5: Measurement Range
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 8: Grouping
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 13 to 54: Linearity Calibration Data 1 to 42
Setting range: 
Size: 
428
Object Dictionary
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
ZW User's Manual
• Object specifications (other information)
3203 hex
Controller Information
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: LED Information
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Expansion Flag
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Controller Version
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: Controller Type
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 5: Number of All Sensor Head
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 6: PIX
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: pix
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 7: Distance
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Unit: nm
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 8: RUN/FUN Mode
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
3205 hex
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Measuring cycle
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
APPENDICES
Setting range: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Basic Cycle Time
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
10
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Measurement Cycle Time
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
ZW User's Manual
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Object Dictionary
429
3206 hex
Operation instruction
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1 to 2: Parameter 1 to 2
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Command
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
3207 hex
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Command Execution Status
Sub-index: 
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• The same error code is stored as the Compoway error response code.
• System data
3204 hex
System Data
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Data Length
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 1
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 3: Parity
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: Stop Bit
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 5: Baud Rate
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 2
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 6: Cs/Rs
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 8: Ip Address
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
430
Object Dictionary
Unit: 
Factory settings: 855288000
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
ZW User's Manual
Sub-index 9: Subnet Mask
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory settings: 16777215
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 10: Default Gateway
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 13: Out Ip Address 1
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory settings: 1694148800
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 14: Port No. Out 1
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory settings: 9600
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 15: Port No. In 1
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory settings: 9600
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 16: Socket Protocol 1
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 1
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 18: Out Ip Address 2
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory settings: 1694148800
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 19: Port No. Out 2
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory settings: 9601
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 20: Port No. In 2
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory settings: 9601
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 21: Socket Protocol 2
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 1
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 23: Out Ip Address 3
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Factory settings: 1694148800
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
APPENDICES
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Sub-index 24: Port No. Out 3
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory setting: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
10
Sub-index 25: Port No. In 3
Factory setting: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 26: Socket Protocol 3
Setting range: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
ZW User's Manual
Unit: 
Factory setting: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Object Dictionary
431
Sub-index 28: Out Ip Address 4
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory settings: 1694148800
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 29: Port No. Out 4
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory setting: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 30: Port No. In 4
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory setting: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 31: Socket Protocol 4
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 33: Node No.
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 34: Non Procedural Communication Mode
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 35: Delimiter
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 36: Memory Link
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 2
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 37: Gate Time
Setting range: 0 to 100
Unit: ms
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 39: Serial Data Output
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 40: Data Type
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 41: Integer Digit
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 5
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 42: Decimal Point
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 6
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 43: Minus Depiction
Setting range: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
432
Object Dictionary
Unit: 
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
ZW User's Manual
Sub-index 44: Separation Field
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 45: Separation Record
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 46: Zero Suppress
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 48: Analog Output Direction
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 50: Bank Mode
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 51: Current Bank No.
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 52: Current Judgement Bank No.
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 54: Logging Data Size
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory settings: 128
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 55: Logging Sampling Interval
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 56 to 59: Logging On/off Task 1 to 4
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 61: Internal Logging Data Size
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Factory settings: 1000
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
APPENDICES
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Sub-index 62: Internal Logging Sampling Interval
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (U16)
Factory setting: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
10
Sub-index 63 to 66: Internal Logging On/off Task 1 to 4
Factory setting: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 68: Input Polarity: Zero
Setting range: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
ZW User's Manual
Unit: 
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Object Dictionary
433
Sub-index 69: Input Polarity: Reset
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 70: Input Polarity: Timing
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 71: Input Polarity: Led-off
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 72: Input Polarity: Reserve
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 73: Input Polarity: Bank
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 74: Input Polarity: Binary-Sel
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 76: Initial Task No.
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 77: Run Mode Display
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 78: Decimal Point Digit
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 1
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 79: Key Lock
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 80: Timing/Reset Key Input
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 0
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 82: Zero Reset Memory
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory settings: 1
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 84: Sensor Head Model
Setting range: 
Size: 30 bytes (VS)
Unit: 
Factory settings: ZW-C
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
• The system data is stored.
434
Object Dictionary
ZW User's Manual
• Standard bank
3301 hex
Bank Data 1
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Identification String
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 16 bytes (VS)
Factory settings: ZW-C BANK 1010
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Bank Name
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 30 bytes (VS)
Factory settings: BANK 1
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4: Picture Input 1
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 30 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 5: Picture Input 2
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 2 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 6: Exposure Time Control (2 Areas Mode off)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 25 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 7: Exposure Time Control Buffer
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 7 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 8: Exposure Time Control (Area 1)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 24 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 9: Exposure Time Control (Area 2)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 24 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 10: Target to Measure
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 24 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
APPENDICES
Sub-index 11: Measuring Point (Task 1)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 29 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 12: Measuring Point Buffer (Task 1)
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
10
Setting range: 
Size: 3 bytes (VS)
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 13: Scaling (Task 1)
Setting range: 
Size: 16 bytes (VS)
ZW User's Manual
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Object Dictionary
435
Sub-index 14: Median Filter (Task 1)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 15: Average Filter (Task 1)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 16: Frequency Filter (Task 1)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 24 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 17: Differentiation Filter (Task 1)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 18: Hold 1 (Task 1)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 30 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 19: Hold 2 (Task 1)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 10 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 20: Zero Reset (Task 1)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 24 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 21: Non-Measurement Setting (Task 1)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 22: Judgement Output (Task 1)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 24 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 23: Measuring Point (Task 2)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 29 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 24: Measuring Point Buffer (Task 2)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 3 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 25: Scaling (Task 2)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 16 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 26: Median Filter (Task 2)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 27: Average Filter (Task 2)
Setting range: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
436
Object Dictionary
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
ZW User's Manual
Sub-index 28: Frequency Filter (Task 2)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 24 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 29: Differentiation Filter (Task 2)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 30: Hold 1 (Task 2)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 30 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 31: Hold 2 (Task 2)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 10 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 32: Zero Reset (Task 2)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 24 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 33: Non-Measurement Setting (Task 2)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 34: Judgement Output (Task 2)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 24 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 35: Measuring Point (Task 3)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 29 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 36: Measuring Point Buffer (Task 3)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 3 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 37: Scaling (Task 3)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 16 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 38: Median Filter (Task 3)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
APPENDICES
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Sub-index 39: Average Filter (Task 3)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 24 bytes (VS)
10
Sub-index 40: Frequency Filter (Task 3)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 41: Differentiation Filter (Task 3)
Setting range: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
ZW User's Manual
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Object Dictionary
437
Sub-index 42: Hold 1 (Task 3)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 30 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 43: Hold 2 (Task 3)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 10 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 44: Zero Reset (Task 3)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 24 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 45: Non-Measurement Setting (Task 3)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 46: Judgement Output (Task 3)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 24 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 47: Measuring Point (Task 4)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 29 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 48: Measuring Point Buffer (Task 4)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 3 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 49: Scaling (Task 4)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 16 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 50: Median Filter (Task 4)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 51: Average Filter (Task 4)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 52: Frequency Filter (Task 4)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 24 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 53: Differentiation Filter (Task 4)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 54: Hold 1 (Task 4)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 30 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 55: Hold 2 (Task 4)
Setting range: 
Size: 10 bytes (VS)
438
Object Dictionary
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
ZW User's Manual
Sub-index 56: Zero Reset (Task 4)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 24 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 57: Non-Measurement Setting (Task 4)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 58: Judgement Output (Task 4)
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 24 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 59: Judgement Processing
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 16 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 60: Non-Measurement Setting
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 61: Analog Output 1
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 30 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 62: Analog Output 2
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 10 bytes (VS)
Sub-index 63: Binary Output
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
1*
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 30 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 64: Binary Output 2*
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 10 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 65: Logging
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 66: Parallel Output
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
APPENDICES
Size: 16 bytes (VS)
Sub-index 67: Stub
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
10
Sub-index 68: Parallel Input
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 69: Line Bright
Setting range: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
ZW User's Manual
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Object Dictionary
439
Sub-index 70: Test Item
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 8 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 76: Byte Count of Parameter
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 77: Sum
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 78: Xor
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
• This is bank data 1 for backup use.
• The indexes for bank data 2 onwards are as follows:
Bank data 2: 3302 hex
Bank data 3: 3303 hex
Bank data 4: 3304 hex
Bank data 5: 3305 hex
Bank data 6: 3306 hex
Bank data 7: 3307 hex
Bank data 8: 3308 hex
*:
[email protected] does not output sub-indexes 63/64.
• Judgment value bank
3401 hex
Bank Data1 (Judge Mode)
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Identification String
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 16 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Name of Bank
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 30 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 4 to 7: TASK 1 to 4
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 12 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 9: SUM
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 10: XOR
Setting range: 
Size: 4 bytes (U32)
440
Object Dictionary
Unit: 
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
ZW User's Manual
• This is bank data for backup use when the bank mode is Judgment Value. The following also must be backed up in
addition to the bank data. (When the bank mode is Normal, all 0's are stored.)
• The indexes for bank data (Judgment Value) 2 onwards are as follows:
Bank data (Judgment Value) 2: 3402 hex
Bank data (Judgment Value) 3: 3403 hex
.
.
.
Bank data (Judgment Value) 32: 3420 hex
APPENDICES
10
ZW User's Manual
Object Dictionary
441
• Line bright (measurement waveform)
3500 hex
Line Bright
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1: Taking Sensor Head Channel
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 2: Taking Line Bright Area
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RW
PDO map: Not possible
• The line bright data is stored.
3501 hex
Line Bright
Sub-index 0: Number of entries
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 1 byte (U8)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
Sub-index 1 to 39: Line Bright Data1 to 39
Setting range: 
Unit: 
Size: 30 bytes (VS)
Factory setting: 
Access: RO
PDO map: Not possible
• The line bright data is stored.
• Only sub-index 39, size is 8byte (VS).
442
Object Dictionary
ZW User's Manual
Index
RESET input command
245
Restart
259
Sensor head calibration command
247
Subnet mask acquisition
254
Subnet mask setting
254
System data acquisition
251
System data setting
252
TIMING input command
245
Version information acquisition
command
246
White LED OFF input command 246
Zero reset cancel command
244
Zero reset execution command 243
Connection adapter
40, 376
Numeric
24 V input terminal block
Terminal functions
Wiring
32-pole extension connector
Signal functions
Terminal functions
Wiring
28
47
47
28
45
44
44
Analog output
Adjusting output value
Assigning
Setting monitor focus
Analog output terminal block
Terminal functions
Wiring
299
143
141
142
28
46
46
A
D
Delimiter
Digital Displays
Alphabetical notation
Changing Display Details
Changing Threshold Values
Entering Numerical Values
Positioning decimal point
DIN track attachment hook
Displayed task
Distance
B
Bank
Bank Settings
Clearing
Copy
Saving the Bank/System Settings
63
113
111
112
C
ZW User's Manual
Edit pane
Effective bank
Electrical Specifications
Input circuit
Output circuit
ENABLE indicator
Error Messages
Common
EtherCAT (SDO)
EtherCAT (Sysmac Error Status)
Ethernet, Ethernet/IP
ESI Specification (V1.0)
EtherCAT
EtherCAT telegram
Ethernet connector
Ethernet frames
Explorer pane
Exposure time
Extension fiber cable
58
299
49
50
27
283
281
270
282
197
159
160
28
159
57
299
375
F
Fiber cable
Connect
Extend
Fiber cleaner
Fiber connector cleaner
Filters
Average Filter
Differentiation Filter
38
40
39, 41
376
93
95
97
Index
11
Processing unit data acquisition
command
239
Processing unit data setting command
240
E
Index
Calibration ROM
Connecting
37
Names of parts
25
Communications command
Current bank data acquisition command
241
Current bank data setting command 242
Data save command
250
Default gateway acquisition
255
Default gateway setting
255
Head serial information acquisition 258
Internal logging data acquisition
command
248
Internal logging data clear command
249
Internal logging data information
acquisition command
250
Internal logging start command 247, 248
IP address acquisition
253
IP address setting
253
Judgment result acquisition command
238
MAC address acquisition
258
Measurement command
237
OUT IP address acquisition of the
specified socket number
256
OUT IP address setting of the specified
socket number
257
230
295
295
300
301
297
297
28, 36
299
299
443
Frequency Filter
Median Filter
96
94
Thickness Scaling
92
Sensor Controller
External Dimensions
373
Installing on bottom
37
Installing on the DIN track
36
Names of parts
26
Precautions for installation
35
Specifications
370
Sensor Head
Angle Characteristic
365
Calibrate
42
External Dimensions
359
Installation
30
Interference
33
Linearity characteristic
362
Measuring range
31
Names of parts
25
Precautions for installation
30
Specifications
358
Spot diameter
360
Serial Number Display
197
Setting Exposure Time Control Mode 76,
77, 78, 79
Setting Measurement Items
83
Calculation
86
Height
83
Thickness
85
Setting the System
114
Sensor Information
114
Setting Threshold Value
68
Direct
68, 333
Teaching
331
Settings for Bank Control
150, 151
Output the currently selected bank
number
150
Selecting banks
150, 151
SII Data Check
197
STABILITY indicator
27
Sub-display
27
Sysmac Device
196
Sysmac Error Status
196, 270
Sysmac Error Status, Checking
272
Sysmac Error Status, Clearing
272
Sysmac Error Status, Descriptions 273
Sysmac Studio Main Window
56
Sysmac Studio Measurement Sensor
Edition
23
Sysmac Studio Standard Edition
23
Sysmac Studio, Installing
51
Sysmac Studio, window sections
56
System Configuration
22
H
HIGH indicator
Hold
Clearing conditions
Performing with Key Input
Trigger
Trigger Delay
27
100
320
101
104
I
Icons
Installation screw hole
59
28
J
Judgment Output
Assigning
145
Setting Operation at Judgment Output
146
Judgment result
299
L
LEFT/RIGHT key
LOW indicator
27, 294
27
Main display
Measuring range
Mode switching key
Multi-task Function
27, 298
31
27, 294
62
M
N
Node Address Setting, Saving
Non-Measurement setting
Clamp Value
No-protocol
196
148
149
226
Object Dictionary
Offline
Offline, Debugging
Offline, Settings
Operating Keys
Operation modes
390
265
263
262
294
61
O
P
Parallel cable
PASS indicator
PC tool
Project
Export
Import
Launching
Save
379
27
23, 374
70
70
54
70
R
Resolution
RS-232C connector
RUN indicator
299
28
27
S
Scaling
1-point Scaling
2-point Scaling
Manual Scaling
444
Index
87
88
90
87
T
Threshold
THRESHOLD-H indicator
THRESHOLD-L indicator
Timing Chart
EtherCAT
EtherNet/IP
299
27
27
189
220
ZW User's Manual
Parallel I/O
152
U
UP/DOWN key
294
Z
ZERO indicator
Zero reset
Cancel
Execute
Offset
Type
ZERO/SET key
ZERORST/ESC key
27
65, 105
67
66
106
107
27, 294
27, 294
Index
11
ZW User's Manual
Index
445
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number at the bottom of the front and back covers of
this manual.
Cat. No. Z332-E1-06
Revision code
Revision code
01
446
Date
Revision Contents
October 2012
Original production
02
May 2013
Minor corrections
03
July 2013
Mistake corrections
04
October 2013
Minor correction about EtherCAT connection
05
December 2013
Minor corrections for compatibility with Windows 8
06
August 2014
Addition of Sensor Head, minor corrections
Revision History
ZW User's Manual
OMRON Corporation
Industrial Automation Company
Tokyo, JAPAN
Authorized Distributor:
Contact: www.ia.omron.com
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Sensor Business Unit
Carl-Benz-Str. 4, D-71154 Nufringen, Germany
Tel: (49) 7032-811-0/Fax: (49) 7032-811-199
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
2895 Greenspoint Parkway, Suite 200
Hoffman Estates, IL 60169 U.S.A
Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2),
Alexandra Technopark,
Singapore 119967
Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200
© OMRON Corporation 2012 All Rights Reserved.
In the interest of product improvement,
specifications are subject to change without notice.
Cat. No. Z332-E1-06
0814(1012)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement